Inventors list

Assignees list

Classification tree browser

Top 100 Inventors

Top 100 Assignees


Bridge or gateway between networks

Subclass of:

370 - Multiplex communications

370351000 - PATHFINDING OR ROUTING

370389000 - Switching a message which includes an address header

370400000 - Having a plurality of nodes performing distributed switching

Patent class list (only not empty are listed)

Deeper subclasses:

Class / Patent application numberDescriptionNumber of patent applications / Date published
370402000 Bridge between bus systems 43
Entries
DocumentTitleDate
20080285573METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AN ASYMMETRIC PHY OPERATION FOR ETHERNET A/V BRIDGING AND ETHERNET A/V BRIDGING EXTENSIONS - Signals may be communicated with A/V Bridging services between an upstream link partner and a down stream link partner, each comprising an asymmetric multi-rate Ethernet physical layer (PHY). High bandwidth AN signals may be transmitted from the upstream link partner and low bandwidth signals may be transmitted from the downstream link partner. One or more of a time stamp, a traffic class and/or a destination address may be utilized in generating PDUs as well as data rate request and a resource reservation messages via the asymmetric Ethernet PHY. The receiving link partner may register for deliver of the PDUs. An aggregate communication rate may be distributed evenly or unevenly among one or more links for transmission and aggregated upon reception via asymmetric multi-rate Ethernet PHY operations. Compressed, uncompressed, encrypted and/or unencrypted signals may be handled. Signal processing may comprise echo cancellation, cross talk cancellation, forward error checking and equalization.11-20-2008
20130044760REMOTE RECOGNITION OF AN ASSOCIATION BETWEEN REMOTE DEVICES - A device identification server identifies a “household” to which a particular device belongs by associating the device with a LAN MAC address of the router through which the device connects to a wide area network such as the Internet because the LAN MAC address (i) is unique to the router and (ii) is not readily discoverable by interaction with the router through the wide area network, impeding spoofing by malicious entities. The device queries and receives the LAN MAC address of the router through the local area network. The device passes the LAN MAC address of the router along with its digital fingerprint to the device identification server. Devices that report the same LAN MAC address of the router through which they connect to the wide area network are determined to be from the same “household”, i.e., to be managed by one and the same entity.02-21-2013
20130044765FIBRE CHANNEL NETWORK EMPLOYING REGISTERED STATE CHANGE NOTIFICATION WITH ENHANCED PAYLOAD - A network of switches that employ Registered State Change Notifications (RSCNs) with enhanced payloads is disclosed. In one embodiment, the network comprises multiple switches coupled together, and multiple node devices each directly-coupled to at least one other switch. Each of the switches preferably provides RSCNs to other switches when a node device state change is detected. One or more of the RSCNs preferably includes a device entry having more than four properties associated with the node device undergoing the state change. The switches receiving the enhanced RSCNs preferably maintain caches of remote node device entries copied from the RSCN device entries. The device entries preferably include one or more of the following: Owner Identifier, Port Type, Port Identifier, Port Name, Node Name, Initial Process Associator, Node IP Address, Class of Service, FC-4 Types, Port IP Address, Fabric Port Name, and Hard Address. Traffic overhead may advantageously be reduced.02-21-2013
20130044764GENERATING FLOWS FOR MANAGED INTERCONNECTION SWITCHES - A network controller for managing a set of interconnection switching elements that connect segmented networks to a shared physical interconnection network. The network controller includes i) an interface for receiving a logical control plane definition of a logical switching element that couples to a set of network segments at different segmented networks; ii) a control application for translating the logical control plane definition of the logical switching element into a first set of flow entries in a logical forwarding plane; and iii) a virtualization application for translating the first set of flow entries into a second set of flow entries in a physical control plane. The flow entries in the physical control plane are for subsequent conversion by the managed interconnection switching elements into a third set of flow entries in a physical forwarding plane that directs the forwarding of network data by the managed interconnection switching elements.02-21-2013
20130044761HIERARCHICAL CONTROLLER CLUSTERS FOR INTERCONNECTING TWO OR MORE LOGICAL DATAPATH SETS - Some embodiments provide a novel network control system for managing a set of switching elements in a network. The network control system includes a first set of network controllers for managing a first set of switching elements that enable communication between a first set of machines. The network control system includes a second set of network controllers for managing a second set of switching elements that enable communication between a second set of machines. The second set of switching elements is separate from the first set of switching elements and the second set of machines is separate from the first set of machines. The network control system includes a third set of network controllers for managing the first and second sets of network controllers in order to enable communication between machines in the first set of machines and machines in the second set of machines.02-21-2013
20130044759N-WAY ROUTING PACKETS ACROSS AN INTERMEDIATE NETWORK - A system and method for routing packets. The method includes receiving a first packet from an intermediate network by a first network interface card (NIC) operatively connected to a host, where the first packet originates from a first remote network, where the first NIC is operatively connected to the intermediate network, and where the first packet, the intermediate network, and the first NIC use a first network protocol. The method further includes classifying, by the first NIC, the first packet based on the first remote network, sending the first packet to a first receive ring in the first NIC, sending the first packet from the first receive ring to a first non-global container, and converting the first packet, using a first converter located in the first non-global container, to obtain a first converted packet, where the first converted packet and the first remote network use a second network protocol.02-21-2013
20130044758Dynamic Traffic Routing And Service Management Controls For On-Demand Application Services - A network routing and service control design enables an internet protocol (“IP”) network to effectively divert, on-demand, a given set of IP traffic flow from its normally followed network path to a network-attached application service processing complex and then enable the IP network to re-inject post-processed (e.g., Distributed Denial of Service scrubbed) traffic back into the network for routing to an originally-intended destination. This design also provides a sophisticated control mechanism for application service providers and/or customers/users for service management purposes. For example, application service providers can manage network and service processing resources and customers/users can manage their service requests.02-21-2013
20100142546COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus stores therein link information indicating a network connection status of an entire hierarchical network, collects link information indicating a network connection status in its own area in predetermined cycles, and transmits the collected link information to another area assigned a level different from a level assigned to its own area. When receiving link information from another area assigned a different level, the communication apparatus determines whether the received link information is new link information newer than link information stored in a predetermined storage unit; when it is determined that the received link information is new link-information, the communication apparatus stores the new link information into the predetermined storage unit and advertises it in its own area; by contrast, when it is determined that the received link information is not new link-information, the communication apparatus discards the received link information without storing and advertising.06-10-2010
20100142545NETWORK APPARATUS, EDGE ROUTER, AND PACKET COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A network apparatus includes: a slot table for storing a record including an identifier of a time slot witch is assigned to packet transmission from a particular transmission source to a particular transmission destination, and respective identifiers of an input interface and an output interface which are used for the packet transmission; and means for, upon receiving a first control packet which includes an identifier of a particular time slot and indicates a start of the particular time slot, specifying the input interface and the output interface corresponding to the particular time slot from the slot table, and for sending out one or more packets from the specified input interface to the specified output interface during a period until receiving a second control packet which includes the identifier of the particular time slot and indicates an end of the particular time slot.06-10-2010
20110182296Bandwidth and Topology Management Device for Home Networks - Systems, methods, and equipment for use in the management of network topology and bandwidth for computing networks are provided. In an illustrative implementation of a device acting as a patch panel is provided. The patch panel works on both the physical wire and on the frequencies of the wire to route data to appropriate destination points. For example, both ADSL and telephony could be bridged among copper wires, using several independent busses. Home Phone Network Alliance Association (HPNA) standardized data could either be bridged among wires, or connected to an internal switching device, that would store and forward the native Ethernet packets used by HomePNA in a way similar to that done by Ethernet switches today. Additionally, an Ethernet uplink could attach the HPNA ports to a larger network or to a DSL Modem, and HPNA/ADSL could be removed from wires that might have privacy concerns or otherwise need filters to perform properly.07-28-2011
20120163391METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR REDUNDANCY ASSOCIATED WITH A FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET NETWORK - In some embodiments, an apparatus includes a gateway device configured to be operatively coupled to a Fibre Channel switch by a first data port and a second data port. The gateway device is configured to designate the first data port as a primary data port and the second data port as a secondary data port. The gateway device is configured to associate a set of virtual ports with the first data port and not the second data port when in the first configuration. The gateway device is configured to associate the set of virtual ports with the second data port when in the second configuration. The gateway device moves from the first configuration to the second configuration when an error associated with the first data port is detected.06-28-2012
20090067440Systems and Methods for Bridging a WAN Accelerator with a Security Gateway - The solution described herein provides systems and methods for the interoperability of network processing programs that process network packets at different levels of the network stack. This solution bridges the communications of a network packet between a first network processing program operating at a first level of a network stack in an intermediary and a second network processing program operating at a second level of the network stack of the intermediary. The first network processing program may modify an incoming network packet so that the packet may traverse the network stack to an upper level of the stack to the second network processing program. After processing the network packet at the upper layers of the stack or by the second network processing program, the first network processing program modifies the network pack in order to transmit the packet to the intended destination while traversing the intermediary.03-12-2009
20080259944METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PROVIDING RESOURCE ALLOCATION AND ADMISSION CONTROL SUPPORT IN A VPN - Method and apparatus for effectively supporting resource allocation and admission control of a Virtual Private Network in a service provider network.10-23-2008
20080259943IP COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND NAT TYPE DETERMINATION METHOD BY THE SAME - In a NAT type determination method pursuant to RFC 3489, address information added in a binding response from a STUN server in response to a binding request issued in a latest transmission test is compared with address information added in a binding response in response to any transmission test executed therebefore. When the address information are not identical, a NAT type is determined symmetric. Even when a router whose NAT type changes frequently according to a use status is connected, communication is capable without manual setting change by a user.10-23-2008
20130044762Packet processing in managed interconnection switching elements - Some embodiments provide a novel network control system for interconnecting several separate networks. The system includes a set of interconnection switching elements. Each interconnection switching element in the set is for connecting one of the separate networks to a common interconnecting network. The system includes a set of network controllers for managing the interconnection switching elements in order for the interconnection switching elements to send packets from a first machine at a first one of the networks to a second machine at a second one of the networks.02-21-2013
20130044763PACKET PROCESSING IN FEDERATED NETWORK - Some embodiments provide a novel method for forwarding a packet at a managed switching element in a first domain. The method receives a packet from a local machine. The method encapsulates the packet with a first context identifier that identifies a first logical port of a first logical switching element that couples to machines in both the first domain and a second domain. The first logical port maps to a destination address of the packet. Based on a mapping of the first logical port to a second logical port of a second logical switching element that couples to machines in only the first domain, the method encapsulates the packet with a second context identifier that identifies the second logical port. The method transmits the twice-encapsulated packet out of a port of the managed switching element based on the second context identifier.02-21-2013
20100080238Extended Private LAN - A virtual private network is provided across a Provider Link State Bridging (PLSB) network between a first node connected to a private LAN and a second node connected to a roaming device. The roaming device is authenticated. A successful authentication results in a Service Identifier for the VPN being sent to the second node. Connectivity between members of the VPN service instance is maintained as part of the PLSB Link State process for forwarding table maintenance, rather than by any form of explicit signalling. A single Customer Virtual Bridge/Virtual Switch Instance can be located at the first node to provide point-to-point connectivity to each roaming device. A virtual Residential Gateway function can be combined with the Customer Virtual Bridge/Virtual Switch Instance.04-01-2010
20110194566POTS/PACKET BRIDGE - A system and method for bridging the POTS network and a packet network, such as the Internet, uses a set of access objects that provide the interfacing and functionality for exchanging address and payload information with the packet network, and for exchanging payload information with the payload subnetwork and signaling information with the signaling subnetwork of the POTS network. The system includes a communications management object that coordinates the transfer of information between the POTS network and the packet network; a payload object that transfers payload information between the system and the payload subnetwork of the first communications network; a signaling object that transfers signaling information between the system and the signaling subnetwork of the first communications network in accordance with a signaling protocol associated with the signaling subnetwork; and a packet object that transfers payload and address information between the system and the second communications network in accordance with a communications protocol associated with the second communications network. An alternative embodiment uses a plurality of payload, signaling and packet objects to provide a scalable system.08-11-2011
20110194565PACKET ROUTING APPARATUS - A packet routing apparatus has a plurality of routing units, connected by a first connecting mechanism. The plurality of routing units comprise a first routing unit, connected to at least one port, and a second routing unit, connected to an extended function processor. The first routing unit transmits a packet, received from the port, to another first routing unit and/or a second routing unit. The second routing unit transmits the packet, received from the first connecting mechanism, to the extended function processor.08-11-2011
20090122803METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING REPORTING OF AN EVENT TIMESTAMP - The present invention discloses a method for controlling the reporting of an event timestamp. The method includes the following steps: a timestamp control parameter is set; the MG determines whether to report the timestamp of the event according to the timestamp control parameter. Further, the present invention discloses an MG and an MGC. The technical solution provided by the present invention controls the MG to report the timestamp of an event; enables the MGC or other applications that require the timestamp of the event to determine the actual time when the event appears according to the obtained timestamp; and controls the reported event not to include the timestamp if the MGC or other applications do not need the timestamp of the event, thus saving the bandwidth resources and other system resources.05-14-2009
20090122802Enhanced encapsulation mechanism using GRE protocol - Wireless gateway nodes are enabled to support mobile node services, such as content based billing, when a data treatment server is present in the system. Using one of a defined Content Flow Label (CFL), an Application Program Interface (API), and a compression protocol header, content based billing is provided such as by exchanging content and byte count information with the data treatment server.05-14-2009
20130083802OSPF NON-STOP ROUTING FROZEN STANDBY - Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Non-stop Routing (NSR) with frozen standby LSDB is described. A network element includes a first OSPF instance initially acting as an active OSPF instance and a second OSPF instance initially acting as a standby OSPF instance. The second OSPF instance receives LSAs from the first OSPF instance and installs the LSAs in its LSDB. The LSAs in the LSDB are only aged by the active OSPF instance. If and when the second OSPF instance becomes the active OSPF instance, the second OSPF instance then ages the LSAs in the LSDB and processes each of the LSAs according to the aging of that LSA, where processing includes one of purging that LSA and refreshing that LSA.04-04-2013
20120177055SWITCH DEVICE, NETWORK, AND ADDRESS LEARNING METHOD USED FOR THEM - A switch device capable of achieving a significant load reducing effect without placing any load on the MAC address learning function is provided. A switch device (07-12-2012
20100118881ROUTING NETWORK PACKETS BASED ON ELECTRICAL POWER PROCUREMENT ARRANGEMENTS - In general, this disclosure describes techniques of selecting routes for network packets through a computer network based, at least in part, on electrical power procurement arrangements of devices in the computer network. As described herein, there may be a plurality of routes through a computer network from a first device to a second device. Each of these routes may include one or more devices that consume electrical power. A route selection device may make a determination regarding how network packets are to be routed among these routes based, at least in part, on arrangements made to procure the electrical power consumed by the devices along the routes. After the route selection device makes this determination, the route selection device may cause network packets to be routed among these routes in accordance with this determination.05-13-2010
20130208726PACKET ROUTING FOR EMBEDDED APPLICATIONS SHARING A SINGLE NETWORK INTERFACE OVER MULTIPLE VIRTUAL NETWORKS - Techniques are provided for packet routing in a distributed network switch. The distributed network switch includes multiple switch modules operatively connected to one another, and each switch module includes multiple bridge elements and a management controller. In one embodiment, a shared interface routing (SIR) framework is provided that includes an analysis and bifurcation layer and at least one packet interface. A packet is received over a first logical network and via a physical port, the packet being destined for at least a first application executing on the management controller. The analysis and bifurcation layer analyzes the packet and sends the packet to the packet interface, which then routes the packet to the first application.08-15-2013
20100074269METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RESERVING RESOURCES - The present disclosure relates to the communication field, and discloses a method and device for reserving resources to improve the efficiency in reserving the same type of resources. According to the disclosure, a bearer control device sends a message that instructs to reserve resources to a bearer device, wherein the message carries the description and quantity of the resources to be reserved in a specified context. The bearer device reserves the resources in the specified context according to the description and quantity of the resources in the message. After the bearer device reserves the resources in the specified context, the bearer device may return a reply to the bearer control device, so that the bearer control device can know the resource reservation result.03-25-2010
20100074268MULTI-HOMING USING CONTROLLED ROUTE LEAKAGE AT A BACKUP SERVICE PROVIDER - In one embodiment, a network node of a secondary network receives a message from a multi-homed network. The message includes a block of network addresses allocated to the multi-homed network. It is determined that a primary network has advertised an aggregated route including the multi-homed network's allocated block of network addresses. Advertisements of the multi-homed network's allocated block of network addresses are suppressed, after a determination that the primary network has advertised an aggregated route including the multi-homed network's allocated block of network addresses. It may be later be determined that the multi-homed network has lost network connectivity via the primary network. Advertisements of the multi-homed network's allocated block of network addresses are unsuppressed, after a determination that the multi-homed network has lost network connectivity via the primary network.03-25-2010
20100074267NETWORK ROUTER APPARATUS AND METHOD - An improved network router apparatus and associated network architecture is disclosed. In one exemplary embodiment, the router apparatus is adapted to interface between an external network (such as an HFC/DOCSIS digital network) and a local network created using existing HFC cabling within a premises. The router device provides address translation between the single IP address assigned to the router by the external network and the addresses of the individual nodes or access points on the local network through creation of logical ports assigned to various portions of the available bandwidth of the cable system. The router further distinguishes network protocols from the media content streamed over the HFC network, allowing for the foregoing functionality and replacing any existing cable modem. Methods of initiating the router and assigning addresses are also disclosed, as well as business models for leasing the router equipment and access points.03-25-2010
20100074266IP-USN WITH MULTIPLE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A router connects an Internet protocol (IP)-ubiquitous sensor network (USN) with an external network. The IP-USN is disclosed when the IP-USN includes one or more routers. An IP-USN with multiple routers includes one or more routers, and sensor nodes in the IP-USN may reliably communicate with the external network. The sensor nodes in the IP-USN may communicate with one another using the router if necessary. When one router does not operate, communication with the external network is performed by using other routers.03-25-2010
20100074265Packet synchronization switching method and gateway device - A gateway device includes plural electronic circuit boards with redundant structures, between first and second networks, which are different. The gateway device receives data provided through the first network and, after applying data processing, outputs data to the second network. Data processing reference timings and time information, which are common in the gateway device, are shared, the data processing is executed in synchronization with the reference timings, and synchronized packets are provided. System switching between the electronic circuit boards is executed in accordance with the time information. Thus, packet outputs are synchronously switched.03-25-2010
20100074264METHOD AND APPARATUS TO FACILITATE SYSTEM TO SYSTEM PROTOCOL EXCHANGE IN BACK TO BACK NON-TRANSPARENT BRIDGES - A dual host system and method with back to back non-transparent bridges and a proxy packet generating mechanism. The proxy packet generating mechanism enables the hosts to send interrupt generating packets to each other.03-25-2010
20100074263Configurable Media Access Controller - Embodiments related to configurable Media Access Controllers (MACs) are described and depicted.03-25-2010
20120183000DYNAMICALLY AND EFFICIENTLY FORMING HIERARCHICAL TUNNELS - In one embodiment, a hierarchical tunnel that encapsulates a plurality of child tunnels along a shared path segment is used. The shared path segment extends from a head-end node across one or more intermediate nodes to a tail-end node. A state of a child tunnel of the plurality of child tunnels encapsulated within the hierarchical tunnel is refreshed by the head-end node sending one or more refresh messages along the child tunnel that include a request that the one or more intermediate nodes remove the state of the child tunnel without sending error messages, and sending one or more encapsulated refresh messages within the hierarchical tunnel that cause the tail-end node to continue propagation of refresh messages along the child tunnel.07-19-2012
20120182999QUALITY OF SERVICE HALF-DUPLEX MEDIA ACCESS CONTROLLER - A network switch includes a transmitter and a controller. The transmitter is configured to selectively terminate transmission of a first frame from the network switch. The controller is configured to, in response to the transmitter terminating the transmission of the first frame, increment respective attempt counts for a first class of service associated with the first frame and all classes of service lower than the first class of service, determine whether any of the respective attempt counts is greater than a predetermined attempt threshold, and, in response to any of the respective attempt counts being greater than the predetermined attempt threshold, discard frames having the first class of service and frames having any of the classes of service lower than the first class of service.07-19-2012
20130077634Systems and Methods of Providing Outside Plant Transport Gateway - In example embodiments of systems and methods of outside plant transport gateway provided herein, instead of locating the gateway/media converter inside the customer premises, the gateway/media converter is located outside the customer premises and may be configured to provide access/media conversion for multiple homes. In previous systems, the gateway/media converter is located in the customer premises. However, the customer premises must be entered to perform maintenance or other work. Moving the gateway/router outside of the customer premises offers easier maintenance at the gateway level.03-28-2013
20130039367Peer-to-Peer Packet Switching - Peer-to-Peer traffic switching that allows gateway traversal is accomplished using a traffic switch that receives packets from each of the nodes, accommodates synchronization flags, as well as sequence numbering and packet acknowledgements. Avoiding a complex and cumbersome registration process allows two peer nodes to communicate with each other while traversing network address translation gateways, and allows for a process that provides a transparent experience to both nodes so that they do not necessarily perceive that they are communicating through a gateway.02-14-2013
20130083804MANAGING SIDEBAND ROUTERS IN ON-DIE SYSTEM FABRIC - Methods and apparatus for managing sideband routers in an On-Die System Fabric (OSF) are described. In one embodiment, a sideband OSF router is configurable during runtime based, at least in part, on information stored in a table accessible by an agent coupled to the sideband OSF router. Other embodiments are also disclosed.04-04-2013
20130083805Network Integration System and Method - A network integration system/method allowing computer network functionality in a coordinated/concerted fashion in network configurations that are local to and/or spanning network gateway routers is disclosed. The system utilizes a Smart Gateway Power Controller (SGPC) to interact within a home automation network (HAN) to permit the local HAN to operate as a distinct network but still permit access to/from remote networks such as the Internet. The system permits inter-networking of HAN devices (including SGPCs) and device interaction as a group with consumers within a man-machine “social network,” where information is pushed/pulled just as with a conventional social network. The system/method allows HAN device setup/action/monitoring wherein HAN devices host a number of user interfaces supported locally and externally to web interfaces/networks, these interfaces supporting local/remote access devices including mobile phones, tablet computers, laptops, desktop computers, and the like.04-04-2013
20100158024OPTIMIZED FORWARDING FOR PROVIDER BACKBONE BRIDGES WITH BOTH I&B COMPONENTS (IB-PBB) - In one embodiment, when a frame is directed to one or more customer instance ports (CIPs) of a switch having received the frame, the frame (a “local frame”) may be forwarded on the one or more CIPs based on only a customer space (C-space) lookup operation. Also, if the frame is not directed to any CIPs of the switch, the frame (a “transient frame”) may be forwarded on at least one or more provider backbone ports (PBPs) of the switch based on only a backbone space (B-space) lookup operation. For example, a unicast frame may be forwarded based on whether the frame terminates at the switch having received the frame (to a CIP of the switch), while a multicast frame may be forwarded based on determining whether an instance service identifier (I-SID) of the frame maps to a local VLAN ID (L-VID) at the switch (to any CIPs servicing that L-VID).06-24-2010
20130034108System and Method for Communications Network Configuration - A method for operating a first communications device includes transmitting a provisioned network list to an access router, and receiving a logical router interface address for each network in the provisioned network list. The method also includes transmitting a first message to one of the logical router interface addresses corresponding to a first selected network, receiving a first address prefix for a first gateway router of the first selected network, and transmitting a first packet to a second communications device, the first packet including the first address prefix as a source prefix.02-07-2013
20100046535BORDER CONTROL SYSTEM, METHOD, AND SOFTWARE - Embodiments disclosed herein include systems, methods, and software that reduce processing burdens on host soft switches. A method of operating a communication network comprises receiving a plurality of update messages from a plurality of border controllers that interface communications between a first packet network and a second packet network. The update messages are processed to determine operational states of the plurality of border controllers. Responsive to receiving a query from a soft switch in the first packet network for a session between the first and second packet networks, the query is processed to select a first border controller for the session from the plurality of border controllers based on the operational states of the plurality of border controllers. A response is transferred to the soft switch indicating the first border controller.02-25-2010
20100046534DATA TRANSMISSION APPARATUS - A data transmission apparatus includes an input interface; an output interface; and a first and second switch portions which are provided between the input interface and the output interface and which transfer a frame from the input interface to a destination output interface, wherein the first and the second switch portions each include a buffer which stores the frame from the input interface according to the destination output interface, a scheduler which reads the frame from the buffer and transfers the frame to the destination output interface, and a frame amount detection portion which detects the amount of frames held in the buffer according to the destination output interface, and the scheduler controls reading from the buffer based on difference between the held frame amount of the first switch portion and the held frame amount of the second switch portion which is detected by the frame amount detection portion.02-25-2010
20100046531AUTONOMIC NETWORK NODE SYSTEM - An autonomic network node system for providing at least one virtual router (VR) for providing on demand virtual routing service, the autonomic network node system includes a plurality of autonomic router components (ARCs) comprising at least one autonomic control component (ACC) and at least one autonomic forwarding component (AFC), physical resources comprising a plurality of logical resource partitions (LRPs), at least one database for storing information relating to the plurality of ARCs and LRPs, and a autonomic framework configured for receiving at least one request of on demand virtual routing service, accessing at the at least one database, allocating at least one LRP to perform at least one ARC to be installed in the autonomic network node system, installing the at least one ARC in the autonomic network node system, allocating the installed ARC and, updating the at least one database.02-25-2010
20100046530IP Address Distribution in Middleboxes - A middlebox and method of operating the middlebox to provide an interface between first and second IP networks. An entity within the first IP network allocates IP addresses to one or more entities in the second IP network. The middlebox routes IP traffic within and between the networks based on the IP addresses, implements at least one IP address dependent service other than routing, and dynamically informs each service of the IP addresses allocated to the network entities and of changes to these addresses.02-25-2010
20100046533ROUTER AND PACKET DISCARDING METHOD - A router controlling a route of packets. The router includes a counter counting an amount of received control packets on a user-identifier-by-user-identifier basis, the control packets being used for managing a network, a discard determining unit comparing a counter value of the counter with a threshold value, and a control packet discarding unit discarding a control packet including a user identifier for which the discard determining unit determines that the counter value exceeds the threshold value.02-25-2010
20100046528Intelligent IMS Gateway for Legacy DSLAMs - Systems and methods according to the present invention address this need and others by improving service within the telecommunications field for gateways. According to exemplary embodiments, a gateway stores policy information which it uses to determine whether access to a requested service is permissible. The gateway manages a single Internet Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) session capable of supporting multiple requests for service from different requesting sources.02-25-2010
20100046529METHOD OF CONFIGURING THE QUALITY-OF-SERVICE PROFILE OF A GIVEN STREAM AT AN ACCESS NODE OF A PACKET COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method is provided for configuring the service quality profile of a given flow at the access node of a packet communication network to which is connected to the gateway of a receiving user of the flow. The method includes a step where the gateway determines on its own a service quality profile to be associated with the flow, that is triggered upon reception of a packet from the access node, and a step where the service quality profile thus determined is sent to the access node. The profile is used by the access node for transmitting packets intended for the gateway and belonging to the flow in question.02-25-2010
20130089102COARSE-GRAINED RECONFIGURABLE ARRAY BASED ON A STATIC ROUTER - Provided is a processor with a data transfer structure that is excellent in performance and efficiency. According to an aspect, the processor may include a plurality of processing elements, a plurality of routers respectively connected to the processing elements, and a plurality of connection links formed between the routers such that data is transferred between the processors via a network.04-11-2013
20130089104System and Method for High-Performance, Low-Power Data Center Interconnect Fabric - A system and method are provided that support a routing using a tree-like or graph topology that supports multiple links per node, where each link is designated as an Up, Down, or Lateral link, or both, within the topology. The system may use a segmented MAC architecture which may have a method of re-purposing MAC IP addresses for inside MACs and outside MACs, and leveraging what would normally be the physical signaling for the MAC to feed into the switch.04-11-2013
20130089103METHOD OF MANAGING AN OBJECT BY MEANS OF A MANAGEMENT GATEWAY USING A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method of managing an object (OBJ) through a management gateway (ONG) communicating with a system architecture present on a telecommunications network offering functionalities for registering objects and for routing messages, the method comprising the registering (04-11-2013
20080198858Simple Virtual Private Network For Small Local Area Networks - In one embodiment, a method includes establishing a control channel across a wide area network (WAN) from a first gateway that has a first public internetwork layer (L3) address to a second gateway that has a second public L3 address. Each gateway connects a local area network (LAN) to the WAN. Negotiations over the control channel establish a first set of private L3 addresses for the first LAN and a non-overlapping second set for the second LAN. A different address from the first set is provided for each different node in the first LAN. A discovery packet is received from the first LAN. The discovery packet is encapsulated in a tunnel packet directed to the second public L3 address. The tunnel packet is sent over the WAN to the second gateway which extracts the discovery packet. The second gateway sends the discovery packet over the second LAN.08-21-2008
20090175284GATEWAY UNIT - The invention is to solve the problem in that mutual communication between an IPv6-capable device and an IPv4-capable device has not been carried out in a system wherein the IPv6-capable device and the IPv4-capable device are mixed. An entry of a live list is retrieved when SM Device Annunciation is received from the IPv6-capable device, and a transmission IPv4 address is acquired from an IPv4 address pool if the entry is not found, thereby preparing translation rules so as to be stored in a translation rules storage section, while preparing an entry to be registered in the live list, whereby an IP address in a message is translated with reference to the translation rules. Further, a timestamp of the entry is updated every time when the SM Device Annunciation is received. Even if the address is contained in the message, the mutual communication between the IPv6-capable device and the IPv4-capable device can be carried out, and devices connected to the system can be controlled.07-09-2009
20090041040HYBRID TIME TRIGGERED ARCHITECTURE FOR DUAL LANE CONTROL SYSTEMS - A network for a dual lane control system is provided. The network comprises at least one hub for a first channel and at least one hub for a second channel. A first plurality of end nodes is in a first lane. Each of the first plurality of end nodes is coupled to the first and second channels by being in communication with the hubs for the first and second channels. A second plurality of end nodes in a second lane are each redundant with a respective end node in the first lane. Each of the second plurality of end nodes is coupled to the first and second channels by being in communication with the hubs for the first and second channels.02-12-2009
20100098100Media gateway device - A media gateway device includes a first specific call control unit performing line connection control of one of plural interconnection units and plural second call control units requesting the first specific call control unit to perform the line connection control of one of the plural interconnection units. The first specific call control unit has a management data storage unit storing management data for determining which one of the plural interconnection units controls which line of the public network. Each of the plural second call control units has a control request unit requesting the first specific call control unit to perform line connection control of one of the plural interconnection units.04-22-2010
20100098098Virtual Switching Using a Provisional Identifier to Conceal a User Identifier - This document describes tools useful in relaying a data stream from a data device to a network tunnel, such as by enabling virtual switching using a provisional identifier to conceal a user identifier. These tools, for example, may use an inexpensive switch module to create virtual switch instances. To do so, the tools may assign data packets to a virtual switch instance by mapping the data packets to a particular provisional identifier and then modifying the data packets to include the provisional identifier. The switch module may then forward the data packets based on the provisional identifier rather than on the user identifier. The tools may remove the provisional identifier before forwarding the data packets to a destination.04-22-2010
20130136139Accelerating Service Processing Using Fast Path TCP - A service gateway includes a fast path module for processing data packets without using packet buffers and a normal path module for processing data packets using packet buffers. The fast path module receives a service request data packet from a client side session, determines that the service request data packet cannot be processed by the fast path module, and in response, sends the service request data packet to the normal path module. After receiving the service request data packet, the normal path module retrieves a first proxy session record created by the fast path module, where the first proxy session record is associated with a client session record for the client side session, creates a second proxy session record based on the service request data packet and the client session record, and processes the service request data packet according to the second proxy session record.05-30-2013
20100124233METHOD FOR SENDING MESSAGE, ACCESS ROUTER AND DATA CACHE SYSTEM - The disclosure relates to a method for sending a message, an access router, and a data cache system. The method for sending a message includes: sending a data request received by the access router to a gateway node in the home routing area of the access router; receiving location information from the gateway node, where the location information identifies a data cache node obtained according to the data request, and obtaining information about the cost of routing from the access router to the data cache node according to the location information; and sending a data obtaining request to the data cache node, where the data obtaining request carries the routing cost information. The method for sending a message, the access router, and the data cache system provided herein utilize the radio bandwidth efficiently and improve the network throughput.05-20-2010
20090154480COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND SYSTEM06-18-2009
20080267199Roaming Gateway - A gateway (10-30-2008
20100040074MULTI-SPEED CUT THROUGH OPERATION IN FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCHES - A method and system for routing frames based on a port's speed using a fibre channel switch element is provided. The method includes, receiving a portion of a frame in a receive buffer of a port; determining a frame length threshold; and setting up a status bit based on the port's speed, the frame length threshold and an amount of frame received. The status bit is sent to a transmit segment of the fibre channel switch element and the frame length threshold value is inversely proportional to the port's speed. Also, if the receive buffer is almost full when a frame arrives at the receive port, then a cut status is based on a frames end of frame (“EOF”) value.02-18-2010
20100040073APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING A NETWORK - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a server comprising a controller to capture routing data representative of routing changes associated with a plurality of networks, and compare the routing changes to detect discrepancies in route lists associated with the plurality of networks. Other embodiments are disclosed.02-18-2010
20090135841SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RETRIEVING COMPUTED PATHS FROM A PATH COMPUTATION ELEMENT USING ENCRYPTED OBJECTS - In one embodiment, a path computation client (PCC) generates a path computation request and transmits the path computation request to a path computation element (PCE). The PCC receives from the PCE a response including path segments defining a path, at least one of the path segments being an encrypted path segment that has been encrypted according to an encryption algorithm associated with a remote domain. The PCC then generates a path reservation message that includes the encrypted path segment. This is done without decrypting the encrypted path segment at the PCC. The PCC transmits the path reservation message to one or more nodes along the path, which may be capable of decrypting the encrypted path segment.05-28-2009
20130208727APPARATUS & METHOD - A network switch adaptive routing mechanism is disclosed along with an associated method of data routing. In particular, a mechanism is disclosed that enables adaptive routing selection within a crossbar switch.08-15-2013
20100091781MPLS Virtual Private Network Using Dual Network Cores - A multi-protocol label switching system using multiple cores. In establishing a virtual private network in a MPLS system, more than one core is available. Paths are established over each core separately and weights are assigned to the two routes. Thus, the route which is preferred by manually configuring in advance will be chosen.04-15-2010
20130083803RELAY UNIT - A relay unit includes a main-system switch and a sub-system switch that are connected to each other via an inter-system line, that are connected to a main-system line and a sub-system line, and that relays a frame; and control sections that control a relay operation of the main-system switch and the sub-system switch. The control sections store information on a number of connections of relay units and information on a connection priority, and select a control aspect of the relay operation of at least one of the main-system switch and the sub-system switch according to the number of connections and the connection priority.04-04-2013
20130083801OSPF NONSTOP ROUTING (NSR) SYNCHRONIZATION REDUCTION - A network element is configured to reduce the synchronization costs for implementing Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Nonstop routing (NSR). The reduced synchronization costs are achieved by reducing the number of acknowledgement messages that are needed to be sent though reliable inter-process communication (IPC) between the active OSPF instance and the standby OSPF instance. The number of acknowledgement messages is reduced by tracking the link state advertisements (LSAs) that have been sent by the active OSPF instance to the standby OSPF instance and by the standby OSPF replying with an acknowledgement of only the last LSA in a group of LSAs received from the active OSPF instance, where the group can have a variety of boundaries such as a group of LSAs in an IPC message. This avoids having a significant number of acknowledgement messages sent through the IPC.04-04-2013
20130083800Distributed Proxy for Bi-Directional Network Connectivity Over Point-to-Point Connection - The subject disclosure is directed towards a technology by which computing devices such as a phone and a personal computer may reliably communicate internet protocol (IP)-based network data to one another via an unreliable point-to-point data transfer mechanism such as a USB connection. To this end, each computing device includes a bi-directional proxy component (e.g., a proxy and reliable transfer tunnel), that processes network data into packets for transmission over the point-to-point connection, and processes received packets into internet protocol (IP)-based network data for a network connection. Also described are an acknowledgement and sequence number-based mechanism that ensures reliable point-to-point data transfers, and a flow control mechanism that prevents a recipient from receiving more data than it can handle until ready.04-04-2013
20100329273Dynamic Service Information For The Access Network - A method and an apparatus for providing an access network element in a communication network system with information are disclosed, the information enabling the access network element to perform service based processing on data belonging to an application session.12-30-2010
20130051398REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM, REMOTE CONTROL METHOD AND PROGRAM FOR REMOTE CONTROL - In a switching node, a low-load and high-speed control is performed without using a CPU and a network protocol, such as TCP/IP, which have been conventionally used for control from a remote control server, to realize a high-end and high-speed network service by making use of the high-speed CPU processing capacity of a remote control server. Specifically, a forwarding engine incorporates a PCI express, a PCI express LAN conversion bridge and a circuit which can access to a local bus control interface from the PCI express on the switching node. The external control server incorporates an extended network service interface driver for managing a plurality of switching nodes.02-28-2013
20100002711COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NETWORK APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION RECOVERY METHOD FOR USE THEREIN, AND PROGRAM THEREOF - The network apparatus (switch 01-07-2010
20100002710Vehicle-Mounted lan system, electronic control unit, relay connection unit, and vehicle-mounted lan communication means - A vehicle-mounted LAN system comprises a plurality of vehicle-mounted LANs in each of which an electronic control unit is connected to a communication line to perform the transmission/reception of messages; and a relay connection unit that relays the messages between the vehicle-mounted LANs. Each electronic control unit has a reception port having a function of transmitting a reception confirmation signal to the relay connection unit in response to a received message. The relay connection unit has a relay management means that determines, based on the presence or absence of the reception confirmation signal responsive to the message relayed to each of the vehicle-mounted LANs, whether a relay is required or not and that then updates relay processing information stored in a storing means.01-07-2010
20100135309System and Method for Transferring Non-Compliant Packetized and Streaming Data Into and From a Multimedia Device Coupled to a Network Across Which Compliant Data is Sent - A communication system, network, interface, and port architecture are provided for transporting different types of data across a network. The network can be arranged by connecting the ports in a daisy chain fashion to achieve a ring architecture or topology. The network forwards data according to a specific network protocol, and any incoming data that follows that protocol will be sent onto the network. If the incoming data protocol does not match the network protocol, then the incoming data is not sent immediately to the network, but instead is sent to an input pin of a device upon the network specifically designed to receive that incoming data. The network, therefore, has ports that support both compliant and non-compliant incoming data, and the devices that produce such data. Examples of non-compliant data include any data which does not time-division multiplex different asynchronous, isochronous, and synchronous data in dedicated channels within each frame, and which have a preamble, coding, frequency, or overall protocol different from that which is established for network transfer.06-03-2010
20100265958METHOD FOR EXCHANGING RANGE FORMAT SUPPORT INFORMATION, MEDIA GATEWAY AND MEDIA GATEWAY CONTROLLER - A method for exchanging range format support information is provided. The method includes the following steps. A media gateway (MG) receives a command request sent by a media gateway controller (MGC), in which the command request is adapted to deliver range formats requested to be supported by the MG. The MG determines supported range formats according to the range formats requested to be supported by the MG.10-21-2010
20090116499COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD EXECUTED BY COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORING SOFTWARE FOR EXECUTING METHOD - A communication apparatus which is capable of performing bi-directional communication via a router in a local network including one or more routers is provided. An upper segment determination section (05-07-2009
20100103943METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PROVIDE POWER OVER AN ETHERNET-BASED NETWORK TO A WIDE AREA NETWORK ACCESS DEVICE - Methods and apparatus to provide power over an Ethernet-based network to a wide area network access device are described. In some example systems, a local area network (LAN) access point is configured to provide power to a gateway device, such as an optical network termination (ONT), via a wired Ethernet connection. The example LAN access points provide power via a wide area network (WAN) Ethernet port, through which the LAN access points receive WAN access from a gateway. The example gateway provides WAN access to a LAN access point, and receives power sufficient to operate the gateway via an Ethernet port. The example gateway also includes a WAN port, such as a fiber connection, through which the gateway connects to a service provider. The example systems allow a gateway to be powered without a traditional dedicated power connection.04-29-2010
20100103945Control architecture and implementation for switches with carrier sensing - A scalable switch, a system of switches and methods, configured to sense a carrier at the output of the respective switch. The invention intelligently, and dynamically, controls the connection of a respective switch input to a respective switch output as a function of a carrier being present, or absent, at a selected output. Alternatively, a control plane is adopted to make request to send and acknowledge clearance to send. These control methods operate on a step-by-step manner allowing fast and parallel connectivity to be established to connect a variety of interfaces, including Ethernet, PCI, SCSI, and FibreChannels. The present invention reduces switch cost, energy cost, and switch volume, while allowing scalability of connection requirements, reduction of delay, and promotion of green IT.04-29-2010
20100103944ETHERNET WIDE AREA NETWORKS AND METHODS - Ethernet wide area networks and methods are disclosed. A disclosed example Ethernet wide area network includes a first network Ethernet switch having a first network interface and a first service interface. The first service interface is to communicate with a first local area Ethernet switch. The network also includes a second network Ethernet switch having a second network interface and a second service interface. The second service interface is to communicate with the second local area Ethernet switch. The network also includes a root node network Ethernet switch having a third network interface to communicate with the first network interface with the first network Ethernet switch and a fourth network interface to communicate with the second network interface of the second network Ethernet switch. The first, second, third and fourth network interfaces are to route packets from the first local area Ethernet switch to the second local area Ethernet switch without recognizing subscriber LAN MAC addresses associated with either the first or second local area Ethernet switches.04-29-2010
20090304013NETWORK TUNNELLING - A method and apparatus for broadening of a communication channel already established between remote networks includes detection of an existing communication channel (12-10-2009
20090304012Gateway for use in an electronic communications recording system - A media gateway (12-10-2009
20090304011Network Interface and Router with a Mass Storage Interface Device Emulating a Hard Disk Controller - A network interface device (12-10-2009
20090304010Network element providing an interworking function between plural networks, and system and method including the network element - A network element provides an interworking function between plural networks. The network element includes a first network forwarding function block for forwarding packets in a first network, a first network control function block for controlling the first network forwarding function block, a second network forwarding function block for forwarding frames along a connection-oriented path in a second network, and a second network control function block for controlling the second network forwarding function block.12-10-2009
20120219009Transmission of Data in a Communication System - A node, such as a session node including any network node, located in a first network transmits data to one of a plurality of devices located in a second network. A determination is made that another device connected to the node is located in the second network. The node transmits to the other device located in the second network a message addressed to the one of said plurality of devices via the connection between the node and the other device effective to cause the message to be forwarded from the other device to the one of said plurality of devices via a connection established within the second network.08-30-2012
20120219008NETWORK SYSTEM AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed is a network system and a control method thereof, the network system including a gateway connected to a plurality of home appliances through a home area network, an outdoor apparatus connected to the gateway through a network, and a dynamic domain name system (DDNS) server to manage dynamic internet protocol (IP) address information about an apparatus using a dynamic IP address. A communication connection is achieved through a dynamic IP between a gateway inside the home and an apparatus outside the home in a smart grid network environment, so a user can easily access in-home services based on a dynamic IP. In addition, unauthorized traffic, which may be introduced into the home, is automatically blocked, so that the quality of the home network service is improved.08-30-2012
20120219007ELECTRIC DEVICE, POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - An electric device includes a communication unit to communicate with at least one of a gateway and a plurality of other electric devices, and a controller to broadcast a request signal for searching for a gateway, communicate with the gateway on the basis of a search response signal after transmission of the gateway response signal from at least one of the gateway and the plurality of other electric devices, and transmit a registration request signal to a power management unit through the gateway. Thus, the electric device can be automatically registered/re-registered in the electric device or be deleted from the electric device, a power management system and electric devices can be easily managed. If the user moves the electric device from a current position to another position, the power management system recognizes the movement and informs the user of the recognition result.08-30-2012
20090041045SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING MULTICAST/BROADCAST SERVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for allocating a multicast connection identifier (MCID) to a new multicast/broadcast service (MBS) provided in a wireless network including a plurality of base stations. The method includes: calculating, for a new MBS zone and existing MBS zones, coverage area ratios each based on information regarding the new MBS zone and one of the existing MBS zones, the new MBS zone including a first group of base stations, the one of the existing MBS zones including a second group of base stations; and allocating an MCID to the new MBS based the coverage area ratios; wherein the first group of base stations include ones of the plurality of base stations to transmit data relating to the new MBS, and the second group of base stations include ones of the plurality of base stations to transmit data relating to at least one existing MBS.02-12-2009
20130070774REDUNDANCY SWITCH - A redundancy switch includes at least three data ports and a control input. Each data port includes a data input and a data output. The redundancy switch operates in one of at least three states. In a first state, a first data port is communicatively coupled with a second data port. In a second state, the first data port is communicatively coupled with a third data port. In a third state, the second data port is communicatively coupled with the third data port. The state of the redundancy switch can be controlled based on a signal received at the control input. The redundancy switch can further include transconductance switching elements that convert a voltage input to a current output.03-21-2013
20090092142METHODS, SYSTEMS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR DYNAMIC COMMUNICATION DATA ROUTING BY A MULTI-NETWORK REMOTE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - Methods, systems and computer program products of dynamic communication data routing by a multi-network remote communication terminal across a plurality of networks are provided. The multi-network remote communication terminal is delivered to a locality to receive communication services. The terminal is communicatively connected to a first network, a second network, the second network having a communication characteristic different from the first network, and to a user endpoint device positioned in the locality. Communication data directed to a target device from the user endpoint device is received at the terminal. A characteristic of the received communication data is determined. Routing of received communication data to the target device is allocated across the first network and/or the second network based on the determined characteristic of the received communication data and the communication characteristics of the first and second network. Routing of the received communication data is dynamically re-allocated based on a detected change in the characteristic of the communication data.04-09-2009
20130070775METHOD FOR MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION GROUP SELECTING PACKET DATA NETWORK GATEWAY, AND MOBILE MANAGEMENT NETWORK ELEMENT - The present invention provides a method for a MTC group selecting a Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW) and a mobility management network element. After a MTC UE in the MTC group attaches for the first time, PGW information corresponding to the selected PGW is stored in a subscriber database; and when other MTC UEs in the MTC group attach, the PGW corresponding to the PGW information stored in the subscriber database is directly used as their own PGW. With the method of the present invention, it is guaranteed that the PGWs selected by multiple MTC UEs belonging to the same MTC group are the same PGW, thereby guaranteeing that the maximum flow and charging of each MTC group are effectively limited subsequently.03-21-2013
20130070776INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, AND RELAY PROCESSING METHOD - A disclosed method includes: receiving a packet from a first router of plural routers; identifying a communication type allocated to the first router by using first data representing a communication type for each of the plural routers; and requesting a communication apparatus nearest to the first router among plural communication apparatuses, for which a setting for a tunnel to transfer a packet to each of the plural routers is made and which are subordinate to the plural routers, to output a packet relating to the identified communication type to a tunnel to transfer a packet to the first router.03-21-2013
20110058564NETWORK RELAY DEVICE AND MEMORY CONTROL METHOD - A network relay device includes a packet buffer for temporarily storing a received packet, and a packet buffer control section for changing an effective buffer number depending on the received amount of packet. When a traffic amount is small, the packet buffer control section reduces the power consumption by stopping the feeding of power or the supply of clock to a part of the packet buffers. The network relay device further includes plural table memories storing a table for deciding the transfer destination of packet, and a table memory control section for changing an effective table number according to a required number of table entries. When the required table entry number is small, the table memory control section reduces the power consumption by stopping the feeding of power or the supply of clock to a part of the table memories.03-10-2011
20130058355METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENSURING COMPATIBILITY ON A HIGH PERFORMANCE SERIAL BUS - A data communications system is disclosed having at least one Legacy cloud coupled to at least one Beta cloud. The system further having at least one BOSS node and at least one border node. A method for ensuring compatibility is disclosed comprising determining when the BOSS node is idle, determining whether the last packet transmitted by any border node was an Alpha format packet if the BOSS node is idle, and unlocking the Legacy cloud if the last packet transmitted by the border node was not an Alpha format packet.03-07-2013
20130058354MANAGED SWITCHING ELEMENTS USED AS EXTENDERS - Some embodiments provide a network system that includes a first network and a second network. The first network includes several unmanaged switching elements. The second network includes several managed switching elements. The network system includes a particular managed switching element for communicating network data between the first and second networks.03-07-2013
20130058353CONTROL SYSTEM THAT MANAGES EDGE ONLY SWITCHING ELEMENTS BUT NOT INTERIOR SWITCHES - Some embodiments provide a control system for managing a network that includes several switching elements managed by the control system and several switching elements not managed by the control system. The system includes a network information base (NIB) data structure that stores data for managing the several managed switching elements. The system includes an application interface for receiving data to store in the NIB from at least one application for controlling the managed switching elements. The system includes a switch interface for passing data from the NIB to at least one managed switching element. The managed switching elements include switching elements in an edge of the network.03-07-2013
20120307835DATA OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT APPARATUS, DATA OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT METHOD, RGMII NETWORK SYSTEM AND RGMII NETWORK COMMUNICATION PATH CHANGE METHOD - A data output adjustment apparatus which adjusts an output timing when an outputting data with different transmission speed includes an input part which is provided corresponding to an external device connected with the data output adjustment apparatus, and gets data from the external device, a buffer part which is provided corresponding to the input part, and buffers the data got by the input part, and, an outputting part which instructs the output timing of the data corresponding to the transmission speed to the buffer part, and receives and outputs the data that the buffer part outputted corresponding to the instruction.12-06-2012
20110013641Method and Apparatus for Communication of Data Packets between Local Networks - Method and arrangement for obtaining unambiguous addressing for data packets communicated between devices (E01-20-2011
20090180485METHOD FOR ROUTING IP PACKETS TO AN EXTERNAL CONTROL COMPONENT OF A NETWORK NODE IN AN IP PACKET SWITCHING COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK COMPRISING SEVERAL NETWORK NODES - According to one embodiment, IP-packets are received, identified, evaluated and processed at interfaces of a network node. An IP-tunnel is established from each interface of the network node to the control component. An in-band IP signaling packet, which is received at an interface of the network node and characterized by an entry in the protocol field of the header of the IP-packet, is routed through the IP-tunnel to the control component.07-16-2009
20090268745DISTRIBUTED WIRELESS PACKET ASSEMBLY - Distributed assembly of data packets into messages at a group of interface devices that receive data packets from within a coverage area. Each interface device in the group will take ownership of a sequence of data packets forming a message when a data packet of the message meeting predetermined criteria is received by that interface device. Once an interface device takes ownership of a sequence of data packets, it sends a request to the other interface devices for any missing data packets of the sequence that the ownership claiming interface does not have, and then assembles message upon receiving all the data packets of the sequence.10-29-2009
20090268743Data transmission bridge device and control chip thereof for transmitting data - A data transmission bridge device for transmitting data that adheres to USB specification for transmitting data and includes: a first connecting interface, a second connecting interface, and a control chip. The first connecting interface is used for connecting a first host device, and the second connecting interface is used for connecting a second host device or a slave device. The control chip connects the first connecting interface and the second connecting interface, and further includes two transmission paths. The control chip detects which device is connecting to the second connecting interface, and switch to select one of the two transmission paths for transmitting data between the first connecting interface and the second connecting interface. Therefore, the present invention can achieve the purpose that the host device can bridge and transmit data with any other device conveniently.10-29-2009
20090268744Gateway for Data Transfer Between Serial Buses - A gateway for data transfer between serial buses, including multiple communication modules that are each provided for connection of one serial bus, and that carry out a conversion between data packets and data words, a bus master that, via an internal control bus, controls a word-based transfer of data via an internal data bus between two communication modules, the bus master applying a source address via a source address bus to an internally transmitting first communication module, and a destination address via a separate destination address bus to an internally receiving second communication module, data received in data packets by the first communication module via a first serial bus connected thereto being transferred from the first communication module directly without buffering, in word-based fashion in one or more data words, via the internal data bus to the second communication module, which delivers these transferred data, in data packets, via a second serial bus connected to the second communication module.10-29-2009
20120224587LOCATOR RESOLUTION IN COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A set of globally-reachable attachment registers is provided for objects in an internetwork of interconnected communications networks. “Objects” can be networks, hosts or terminals, or passive objects which themselves do not have a network interface. Each attachment register corresponds to an object in the internetwork. The attachment registers are not located with their respective object. Information is stored in the attachment registers that establishes one or more logical links between the attachment registers. The information is used to perform one or more network communication functions, and in particular to determine a locator by identifying a logical path, along the logical links between attachment registers, from a destination attachment register corresponding to the destination object. Other non-limiting example functions include location registration and update, name to global locator resolution, routing, multi-homing, dynamic ISP selection, and handover.09-06-2012
20130064250REMOTELY ACCESSING AND CONTROLLING USER EQUIPMENT IN A PRIVATE NETWORK - Described embodiments provide a method for enabling a remote terminal outside a private network to remotely access and control at least one user equipment inside the private network by a remote access control device in the private network. A gateway device of the private network may be requested to set up first port forwarding enabling the remote terminal to remotely access the remote access control device, receiving a remote access request message from the remote terminal through the first port forwarding. After setting up the first port forwarding setup, the gateway device may be required to set up second port forwarding enabling the remote terminal to remotely access selected user equipment indicated in the received remote access request message in response to the remote access request message.03-14-2013
20090238195DIFFERENT IP INTERFACES IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM - A control apparatus determines a user plane interface type via which a call is to be processed, indicates the user plane interface type in a termination reservation message and transmits the termination reservation message. A gateway apparatus receives the termination reservation message, determines the user plane interface type from the termination reservation message and performs processing in accordance with the user plane interface type.09-24-2009
20090238194PSTN BYPASS FOR IP MEDIA - A system and method for falling back to a secondary network when there is insufficient quality on a primary network is disclosed. The present invention uses a PSTN as a fallback for the IP media when the IP network cannot pass the media acceptably and while continuing to use the IP network for call control and other features. In one embodiment, a call controller has a media monitoring module, a bypass module and a PSTN control module. Once a call has been established between endpoints using a primary IP network, the media monitoring module monitors for degradation in call quality. If degradation in call quality is detected, the bypass module is activated to transfer the data communication to a secondary network such as a PSTN while the call control continues to be over the primary network. The present invention also includes a variety of methods including a method for falling back to a secondary network and a method for dynamically switching between a primary and a secondary network to ensure call quality.09-24-2009
20090180484Information Processing Apparatus, Information Processing Method, and Computer Program - A configuration is provided in which a device in a home network receives content from a server outside the home network and plays the content. A home IMS gateway maps an external server outside the home network as a virtual home network device, and executes a process of receiving a content providing service provided by the external server by using mapping information. Furthermore, a process of receiving data from the external server as personalized data selected or edited on the basis of a user profile, which is user information registered in advance, is executed.07-16-2009
20090232149COORDINATED MULTI-NETWORK DATA SERVICES - Content and/or services are provided for a session to a user by controlling use of at least two different networks to deliver the content and/or services for the session to the user. The at least two different networks have different data transfer characteristics. Control of use of the at least two different networks is based on the data transfer characteristics of the at least two different networks and characteristics of the content and/or services for the session to the user.09-17-2009
20090232148COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A packet communication system of this invention includes a user access device at a user point for providing a user with connectivity to a plurality of carriers, carrier communication networks linked to the user access device, and a carrier management network which controls and manages the user access device and communication devices. A communication device receives a control frame-inserting command from the carrier management network, and sends a control frame containing therein control frame transfer information that indicates which one of termination and send-back processing is performed at a destination device. In response to receipt of the control frame, a user access device that is the destination of this frame extracts therefrom the control frame transfer information. If this information indicates the termination then perform termination; if send-back, add thereto a header necessary for the send-back and then transfer it.09-17-2009
20090232147Method for Forwarding Signalling Data in an Interworking Unit and in a Control Unit and Coprresponding Devices - The embodiments relates to, among other things, a network interface unit (IM-MGW) in which signaling data is separated from useful data by the values of received data. The signaling data is tunneled to a control unit (MGCF). Two different data transmission networks (CS, IMS) can thus be simply combined, in particular, for video telephony.09-17-2009
20090219940System and Method for Providing Throttling, Prioritization and Traffic Shaping During Request Processing via a Budget Service - A network gateway application is described that provides throttling, prioritization and traffic shaping for incoming requests from client applications. A request is received by a plug-in manager component of the gateway application. The plug-in manager can then invoke the budget service in order to determine a current available budget for the request. The budget can be computed according to a service level agreement for the service provider, application or network node. The requests can be of high or low priority. If the budget is greater than a specified priority threshold value, the low priority requests can be denied, while the high priority requests can be processed as long as there is some available budget left. If the budget for the request has reached the restricted level, the request can be denied and optionally enqueued to a traffic shaping queue to be processed at a later time.09-03-2009
20090028168Modem relay over packed based network - A method of performing a negotiation session on a modem connection. The method includes receiving a plurality of negotiation signals from the source modem, by a first gateway, forwarding at least some of the received negotiation signals from the first gateway to a second gateway, over a packet based network, receiving, by the first gateway, responses to the forwarded negotiation signals from the second gateway, forwarding the responses from the second gateway to the source modem, by the first gateway, and transmitting from the first gateway to the source modem, response signals to at least some of the received negotiation signals, without receiving a response to the at least some of the signals from the second gateway.01-29-2009
20090010271POLICY CONTROL IN THE EVOLVED SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE - The invention relates to a method and system for policy control in a data packet network comprising a user equipment, a gateway and a home policy control node. The method comprises the steps of establishing a session between the user equipment and an application function. Then a session identifier is generated by the user equipment, and the same session identifier is generated by the home policy control node. The user equipment requests bearer establishment from the data packet network and marks bearer establishment packets with said session identifier. The gateway derives a user equipment identifier from the bearer establishment packets and determines policy decisions based on the session identifier and the user equipment identifier. The user equipment marks data packets sent over the established bearer with the session identifier; and the gateway applies policy and charging information for the session to the marked data packets.01-08-2009
20090010270METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA BEARER PATH OPTIMIZATION THROUGH A SUCCESSION OF BORDER GATEWAYS - A method for identifying alternate end-to-end media paths through internet protocol realms using substitute session description protocol parameters is disclosed. The method includes receiving an session description protocol offer, including a list of previously traversed through internet protocol realms. The method continues with determining the next internet protocol realm for a media path based on unspecified signaling criteria. Finally, the method includes that if the next internet protocol realm to be traversed through is on the list of previously traversed through internet protocol realms, bypassing at least one border gateway associated with the current and previously traversed through internet protocol realms. The system implementing a method for identifying optimal end-to-end media paths and internet protocol multimedia subsystems include a list of internet protocol realm instances, an application level gateway configured to receive a session description protocol offer having connection information and port information, and a procedure to determine that if the next internet protocol realm that the media path may traverse through is on the list of instances, the media path connection information and port information is substituted to facilitate border gateway bypassing.01-08-2009
20120113991METHODS AND APPARATUS TO DYNAMICALLY CONTROL CONNECTIVITY WITHIN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus to dynamically control connectivity within VPNs are disclosed. A disclosed example route server to control connectivity within a VPN comprises a memory to implement a database, a border gateway protocol (BGP) engine to process BGP advertisements, a network interface to receive a first BGP advertisement, which a first route target (RT) associated with the first PE router, from a first provider edge (PE) router associated with the VPN, and an intra-VPN connectivity controller to, in response to the first BGP advertisement, query the database to determine whether the first PE router is to be communicatively coupled to a second PE router of the VPN and when the first and second PE routers of the VPN are to be communicatively coupled, direct the BGP engine to form a second BGP advertisement that includes a second RT associated with the second PE router based on the first BGP advertisement.05-10-2012
20100085978METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ACCOUNTING IN AN ACCESS GATEWAY - Methods and systems are disclosed that provide accounting in an access gateway of a communication network. Logic can be implemented in an access gateway to provide accounting in an access gateway when the data is tunneled or encapsulated by a protocol when passing through the access gateway. The access gateway can perform inspections on the data to determine what portions of the data are user payload data and be included in a count and what portions of the data can be ignored, such as control packets and overhead information on the packet. The logic can also be deployed in next generation networks, such as long-term evolution, to provide accounting at the access gateway in some situations.04-08-2010
20080310435Method for Establishing a Unicast Media Session - A method and IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) gateway for establishing a unicast media session between a media receiver and a media source in an IMS network via a Network Address Translation (NAT) function acting on behalf of the media receiver. A media source controller in the IMS sends a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) INVITE message to the media receiver to identify the media source. The media receiver obtains NAT bindings for the unicast media session, and the session is established between the media receiver and the media source.12-18-2008
20080310434Method and apparatus for the creation of TCP segments by simultaneous use of computing device components - A method and apparatus for segmenting data into TCP data segments using a first network communication component, and transmitting TCP data segments over a second network using a second network communication component. TCP data segments may be created by a first network card that may be in a loopback mode while a second network card may be sending TCP data segments onto a network. Both network communication cards may be operating simultaneously and may improve efficiency.12-18-2008
20080310433Fast Re-routing in Distance Vector Routing Protocol Networks - In one embodiment, a method includes sending an adjacency discovery message 12-18-2008
20080304497Methods of route control in communications network - Methods of route control in a communications network are provided. In an example, routing information is received from a first router, the received routing information reporting at least one routing path between a first autonomous system and a second autonomous system. Next, a determination is made as to whether the reported routing path is superior to a previously known routing path. Filter instructions are sent to a given router instructing the given router not to report routing paths between the first autonomous system and the second autonomous system unless a routing path superior to one of the at least one reported routing path is received based on the determining step. In another example, filter instructions are received, from a given router, requesting a blockage of route reporting for routing paths between a first autonomous system and a second autonomous system which are inferior to a first routing path threshold. A determination is made as to whether to report known routes to the given router based on the first filter instructions. Second filter instructions are received, from the given router, the received second filter instructions requesting a modification to the first filter instructions.12-11-2008
20080304496Inferred Discovery Of A Data Communications Device - Methods, apparatus, and products for inferred discovery of a data communications device connected to a router, unreachable by a management module, and characterized by a device address are disclosed that include querying, by the management module, the router for connection data and identifying, by the management module in dependence upon the connection data, the device address.12-11-2008
20080304495SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATING WITH AN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM NETWORK - A system for communicating with an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network is provided. A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, an intermediate node having a controller element to receive from a non IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) compliant node a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message having a calling party number and a called party number, and insert in the SIP message a request that instructs a receiving IMS-compliant node to bypass validation of the calling party number. Additional embodiments are disclosed.12-11-2008
20120236871METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR CONFIGURABLE DIAMETER ADDRESS RESOLUTION - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for configurable Diameter address resolution are disclosed. One method includes, at a Diameter signaling router (DSR), sending Diameter signaling messages to and receiving Diameter signaling messages from Diameter signaling entities in a network. The method further includes providing for configuration of a plurality of routing entity identities and an order for preferentially using the routing entity identities in performing Diameter address resolution. The method further includes routing Diameter signaling messages using Diameter address information determined in the Diameter routing address resolution.09-20-2012
20120236870Stream path selection within convergent networks - Stream path selection within convergent networks. Any one or more different types of metrics (e.g., related to any one or more of delay, packet error rate (PER), wink bit rate stability, etc.) may be attached to/associated with various messages communicated within such a convergent network. Such messages may correspond to talker advertise (TA) messaging session relay protocol data units (MSRPDUs). Messages may be advertised over each of or a number of different respective communication links. A communication path, which may be composed of a number of different respective communication links between respective communication devices such that each respective communication link has an associated at least one metric, maybe characterized using one or more of the metrics associated with those different respective communication links. A metric of the communication path may be associated with a relatively lowest metric of the different respective communication links composing the communication path.09-20-2012
20130163603SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING A COMMUNICATION PATH BASED ON DISASTER INFORMATION - A relay apparatus transfers data sent from a user terminal, to an external network, via any one of paths. A notification apparatus receives first disaster information including area information identifying first areas forecast to be affected by an occurrence of a disaster and prediction information storing, in association with each of the first areas, a predicted intensity value indicating a predicted value of an influence degree of the disaster on the each of the first areas. The notification apparatus generates, based on the first disaster information, second disaster information storing the predicted intensity value in association with each of second areas passed through by the paths. The relay apparatus switches the currently-used path to alternative path when it is determined that the predicted intensity value associated with at least one of third areas passed through by the currently-used path is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value.06-27-2013
20130163604METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FLEXIBLE INTERFACE BYPASS OPTIONS IN SWITCHES - A network apparatus including a central processing unit, first physical layer devices, a second physical layer device, and a network switch. The network switch includes first ports communicating with the first physical layer devices; a second port communicating with the second physical layer device; and third and fourth ports communicating with the central processing unit over first and second media independent interfaces, respectively. The network switch includes a switch core module configured to route data packets between connected ports, including the first and third ports. The network switch includes a bypass switch configured to (i) in response to a first mode being selected, directly connect the second port and the fourth port, bypassing the switch core module, and (ii) in response to a second mode being selected, disconnect the second port from the fourth port and connect the second and fourth ports to the switch core module.06-27-2013
20130188651MOBILITY IN IP WITHOUT MOBILE IP - Not Mobile IP (NMIP) comprises methods for implementing macro-mobility in an IP network, wherein macro-mobility means the ability of an endpoint node to change its network-layer, e.g., IP, address without disturbing existing transport-layer and application-layer sessions, e.g., conversations. When two NMIP endpoint nodes establish a new NMIP session, they exchange pseudo-random numbers, or nonces, and store the nonces in a session table. When a first endpoint node changes its IP address, the first endpoint node sends to the second endpoint node an address-update message that contains the new IP address and the first endpoint node's nonce. If the received nonce matches a nonce in the session table, then the second endpoint node updates its protocol control blocks with the new IP address, and sends an address-update reply message to the first endpoint node. Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) can be used to secure or replace the exchange of nonces.07-25-2013
20110058562Network Gateway with Enhanced Requesting - A gateway and/or software for running on a gateway that communicates data units from a connection based network to a connectionless network, where the gateway uses at least some network protocol data from the connection based network in checking against a set of rules to determine whether some responsive reaction is appropriate. Preferably, the network protocol data from the connection based network is low level network protocol data (that is, physical layer and/or data link layer) that would otherwise be discarded by the gateway as the data was de-encapsulated and sent along to the receiving, connectionless network. Some possible responsive reactions include: selectively blocking data communication; slowing down selected data communications; sending responsive communications back to selected data sending machines; and/or alerting of network administrator(s).03-10-2011
20100046532ROUTING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR L3VPN SERVICE NETWORK - A routing control system comprising a system controller and master and slave routing servers, wherein the master routing server includes a plurality of logical controllers, each of which performs routing control for each of the user networks, the system controller monitors a load state of the master routing server and migrates at least one of the plurality of logical controllers from the master routing server to the slave routing server when the load state has satisfied a predetermined condition, so that the slave routing server inherits routing control for a particular user network associated with the migrated logical controller.02-25-2010
20100014530RTP VIDEO TUNNELING THROUGH H.221 - A system is provided. The system includes a first gateway operable to receive a real-time protocol (RTP) packet including video data from a first endpoint; and a second gateway operable to communicate with a second endpoint. The first gateway is operable to communicate the RTP packet to the second gateway in a sub-channel portion of an frame-based protocol.01-21-2010
20090285226NETWORK COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND IMPULSE NOISE PROTECTION METHOD - A network communication device includes a protection value optimizing module, a rate calculating module, a rate determining module, and a connection module. The protection value optimizing module is configured for optimizing an impulse noise protection (INP) value. The rate calculating module is configured for calculating a first downlink rate based on an initial INP value and calculating a second downlink rate based on an optimized INP value. The rate determining module is configured for determining if the first downlink rate and the second downlink rate are greater than a maximum downlink rate provided by the central office device. The connection module is configured for establishing a communication connection between a terminal device and a central office device according to the second downlink rate and the optimized INP value upon the condition that the second downlink rate is not greater than the maximum downlink rate.11-19-2009
20110075674SCALABLE ARCHITECTURE FOR ENTERPRISE EXTENSION IN A CLOUD TOPOLOGY - Various embodiments relate to a Cloud Data Center, a system comprising the Cloud Data Center, and a related method. The Cloud Data Center may include a logical customer edge router to send packets between addresses in a private enterprise network and addresses in a logical network within a cloud network. The logical network may have resources, known as virtual machines, allocated to the private enterprise network and may share a common IP address space with the private enterprise network. A directory at the Cloud Data Center may correlate the enterprise IP addresses of virtual machines with a cloud IP address and a location IP address within the logical network. The Cloud Data Center may double encapsulate packets with two specified headers, a cloudIP and locIP header, when sending a packet to a destination in the logical network.03-31-2011
20110280253NETWORK WITH SEVERAL SUBNETWORKS - The invention relates to a network with several subnetworks, which are organized either decentrally or centrally and can be connected in each case each by bridge terminals, a proxy terminal for a bridge terminal being set up in at least one of the subnetworks, which proxy terminal during an absence (dictated by frequency, time, code, or other factors) of the bridge terminal accepts all data directed to the bridge terminal or to be forwarded thereby, temporarily stores the data, and forwards said data to the bridge terminal when this is present again.11-17-2011
20110280254METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR UPDATING PACKET DATA NETWORK GATEWAY INFORMATION - A method, an apparatus, and a system for updating packet data network gateway (PDN GW) information are disclosed. The method includes: receiving, by a home subscriber server (HSS), an update request sent by a first network element (NE), where the update request includes a Context-Identifier parameter and an international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI); and updating PDN GW information according to the Context-Identifier parameter and the IMSI. With embodiments of the present invention, the data matching speed is increased in the update process, and the performance of the HSS is improved.11-17-2011
20110280252Managing Virtual Ports in an Information Processing System - A method is provided with which a name of a virtual port is not changed when virtualized storage is moved among switches. Information about a creator and a borrower of name information is added to a table including name information and address information of a virtual port of a name server managing the name information and the address information. The name information is provided to plural switches and managed. In addition, name information, which can be used commonly among name servers managing the name information and the address information is pooled in advance, and the name information of the virtual port is borrowed from there.11-17-2011
20110280251APPARATUS HAVING A FIXTURE WITH AN INTEGRATED GATEWAY AND METHODS THEREOF - Apparatus and method for a fixture with integrated gateway capabilities is provided. In one embodiment, a fixture with integrated gateway may include an output, an input for receiving data formatted in an industry-standard communication protocol, a logic unit configured to selectively distribute received data, and an integrated gateway configured to receive the data formatted in the industry-standard communication protocol and convert the data to a second data format. A user interface, in communication with the integrated gateway, for receiving input commands from a user, may be provided.11-17-2011
20110280250Semiconductor integrated circuit system and packet transmission control method in semiconductor integrated circuit - A semiconductor integrated circuit includes: a plurality of cores connected with each other via an interconnection network; and a plurality of routers arranged on the interconnection network. Each router includes a transfer table, and each entry of the transfer table designates an output destination of a packet matching a match condition. The each router searches the transfer table upon receiving a reception packet, and, when there is a hit entry matching the reception packet in the transfer table, transfers the reception packet to an output destination designated by the hit entry. The path control circuit dynamically determines a transmission path of a packet from a source core to a destination core, and instructs each router on the determined transmission path to set the transfer table so that a packet transmission is carried out along the determined transmission path.11-17-2011
20120189017Method and System for Providing Hitless Switching While Maintaining a Power Equivalent Bandwidth (PEB) Ratio Using Multiple Carriers - A method of hitless switching over a communications link, the method comprising transmitting, by a first modulator to a remote receiver, a first carrier signal having a first center frequency, enabling, by a second modulator to the remote receiver, transmission of a second carrier signal having a second center frequency while the first modulator is transmitting the first carrier signal, increasing, through the second modulator, a power level of the second carrier signal while the first carrier signal is transmitting, simultaneously decreasing, through the first modulator, a power level of the first carrier signal while the power level of the second carrier signal is increasing, and disabling transmission of the first carrier signal to the remote receiver when the power level of the second carrier signal reaches a predetermined level.07-26-2012
20080267196Adaptive Bandwidth Management System For Capacitor Tunnels Of A Time-Variable Communication Matrix - In one aspect, a communications network, wherein capacitor tunnels for particular services, for example for a quality of service are arranged on the link paths between the network nodes is provided. For preventing the capacity blocking or underused, the tunnel capacities are adapted according to a time-variable communication matrix. In a particular embodiment, a stock of transmission capacity common for a number of link paths is maintained, wherein a capacitor tunnel takes the data transmission capacity from the stock, when a top traffic threshold is exceeded or returns the data transmission capacity in the stock when the lower traffic threshold is under permissible level, respectively.10-30-2008
20110299547METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING ENERGY COSTS UTILIZING A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for managing energy costs utilizing a broadband gateway are provided. In this regard, a broadband gateway may determine usage patterns for one or more electronic devices communicatively coupled to the broadband gateway. The broadband gateway may control tasks performed and/or to be performed based on the patterns of use and based on a pricing structure for energy supplied to the broadband gateway and/or the one or more electronic devices. Controlling tasks to be performed may comprise, for example, scheduling performance of the tasks. Exemplary tasks may comprise downloading multimedia content and configuring a state of operation of the one or more electronic devices. In an exemplary embodiment of the invention, a state of operation of the electronic device(s) may be configurable between a plurality of states comprising: a powered-off state, a standby state, and a powered-on state.12-08-2011
20110128966SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONVERTING AND DELIVERING NONDESTRUCTIVE EVALUATION IMAGES TO MOBILE DEVICES AND REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - A method for automated conversion and delivery of nondestructive evaluation (NDE) images, comprising: storing a plurality of NDE images, metadata associated with the plurality of NDE images, converted NDE images, a plurality of standardized format specifications for a plurality of destination devices and services, and a plurality of message templates; receiving a NDE image file via a communications interface; determining whether the NDE data includes NDE image data; determining an output destination type; correlating the output destination type with one or more of the plurality of standardized format specifications and with one or more of the plurality of message templates; converting the NDE data format associated with the NDE data based on the standardized format specifications that correlate with the output destination type; and assembling at least one output message that includes the converted NDE data based on the message templates that correlate with the output destination type.06-02-2011
20110128965Hosted IPTV System Incorporating A Gateway Adapter For Processing In A Shared IPTV Environment - A shared (or “hosted”) IPTV system including intermediate IPTV facilities controlled by a host operator and accessible to one or more hosted operators pursuant to a shared service arrangement includes a gateway adapter for intercepting and manipulating operator transactions with the intermediate IPTV facilities. The gateway adapter is operable to modify operator calls directed to the intermediate IPTV facilities to include indicia of data uniquely available to the operator initiating the calls, the data having been logically partitioned into respective subscriber groups; and to forward the adapted calls to the intermediate IPTV facilities to invoke the operator transactions. Advantageously, execution of the adapted call provides the sourcing operator access to account information of its corresponding subscriber group while restricting access to account information of other subscriber groups.06-02-2011
20090073995Devices and methods for local breakout in a gateway of an access service network - In an embodiment, an apparatus is configured to receive traffic of different traffic types, and to route the different traffic types to different paths or networks, the different traffic types comprising internet service domain traffic and operator's service domain traffic. The apparatus may for example be a gateway of an access services network e.g. of worldwide interoperability of microwave access, WiMAX.03-19-2009
20110286466NUMBER AUTOMATIC ROUTING METHOD, UPDATING METHOD, WITHDRAWING METHOD, ROUTER AND DEVICE - A number automatic routing method, an updating method, a withdrawing method, a router and a device is provided wherein the number automatic routing method includes: converting to-be-distributed number into number routing information to add to dynamic routing protocol; generating a dynamic routing protocol message according to the number routing information; transmitting the dynamic routing protocol message through an Internet Protocol (IP) network and distributing the number through the dynamic routing protocol message and the IP network. The method supports automatic routing of numbers such as E.164 and E.214 and SP through expanding current Multi-Protocol Border Gateway Protocol (MP-BGP) that optimizes network structure and improves efficiency.11-24-2011
20090086741UNCOVERING THE DIFFERENCES IN BACKBONE NETWORKS - The claimed subject matter provides systems and/or methods that uncovers detailed differences in the performance of different Internet Service Provider ISP) networks. The system can include components, devices, and/or processes that utilize a list of target Internet Service Provider (ISP) networks to create a list of Internet Protocol (IP) addresses to interrogate, distribute the list of addresses to measurement nodes and obtains in return probing results from the measurement nodes, the probing results employed thereafter to provide comparative performance metrics associated with the target Internet Service Provider (ISP) networks.04-02-2009
20120099602END-TO-END VIRTUALIZATION - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system that facilitates end-to-end virtualization. During operation, a network interface residing on an end host sets up a tunnel. The network interface then encapsulates a packet destined to a virtual machine based on a tunneling protocol. By establishing a tunnel that allows a source host to address a remote virtual machine, embodiments of the present invention facilitate end-to-end virtualization.04-26-2012
20120099601CONTROLLING IP FLOWS TO BYPASS A PACKET DATA NETWORK GATEWAY USING MULTI-PATH TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL CONNECTIONS - A network element can include a proxy element that is configured to receive a request from a source node to establish a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) connection from a first network address of the source node through a Packet Data Network Gateway (PDN GW) to a destination node for an IP flow. The proxy element applies an IP flow offloading policy function to determine that the requested TCP connection for the IP flow should bypass the PDN GW. The proxy element responds to the determination by communicating to the destination node a request for TCP connection with a second network address substituted for the first network address of the source node to establish the TCP connection for the IP flow from the source node to the destination node through a broadband network without passing through the PDN GW.04-26-2012
20110299549METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENERGY EFFICIENT BASED SERVICE OPTIMIZATION BY A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway may provide energy efficient management of services delivered to a home network. The energy efficient service management may enable reducing and/or enhancing energy consumption within access networks utilized during the managed services. The energy management service may comprise determining energy-related costs associated with providing services, based on use of external physical layer connections. The services may then be provisioned based on energy-related costs associated with the services. The service provisioning may comprise controlling and/or adjusting bitrate selection, physical (PHY) layer selection, and/or service level agreement (SLA) parameters. The broadband gateway may negotiate with the network access service providers during the provisioning of the services. This may comprise negotiating and/or configuring micro-leases for use in providing the services. A dedicated energy messaging protocol may be utilized for communicating by the broadband gateway, and/or by network access service and/or content providers during the energy efficient service management.12-08-2011
20110299551Method and Apparatus for Transferring Data Packets Between a First Network and a Second Network - There is provided method and apparatus for transferring data packets between a first network and a second network using a node arrangement. The node arrangement has at least two primary nodes connected to the second network. Each primary node is connected to the first network using a respective first port and to a secondary node coupled to the second network using respective second ports. The second ports are arranged into respective link aggregation groups. The primary nodes are connected by respective inter-node ports. The method comprises the step of determining a service identifier associated with a packet received at a said primary node from the first network. The method comprises the further step of switching the packet to the second network using the respective second ports or to the other primary node using the inter-node port dependent on a service identifier associated with said packet.12-08-2011
20110299550UTILIZING A GATEWAY FOR BROKERING AND/OR ARBITRATING SERVICE CONSUMPTION OPTIONS - A broadband gateway may provision services requested in a home network managed and/or serviced by the broadband gateway by a user associated with the broadband gateway, based on determination of criteria related to the requested service. The requested service may comprise obtaining and/or delivering content for consumption by one or more of a plurality of devices serviced by the broadband gateway in the home network. The criteria may comprise device related data, user preference related information, service performance related parameters, payment related information, and/or energy use related information. The broadband gateway may store information associated with the determined criteria. Provisioning requested services may comprise negotiating with at least one remote resource that may support at least a portion of the requested service. The negotiation may comprise brokering and/or arbitrating a plurality of options of remote resources utilized for providing the at least a portion of the requested service.12-08-2011
20110299548METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PORTING GATEWAY FUNCTIONALITY ASSOCIATED WITH A USER FROM A FIRST GATEWAY TO ONE OR MORE OTHER GATEWAYS - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices, handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. The broadband gateway may operate as a home gateway to negotiate with one or more visited gateways, a common authorized service area or domain (ASD) for providing services to the visited gateways. The home gateway may establish one or more corresponding communication links with the visited gateways based on the negotiated common ASD. The home gateway communicates corresponding content for the services to the visited gateways via the established corresponding communication links. The home gateway communicates information about gateway functionalities required for the services to the visited gateways. The visited gateways may port gateway functionalities forwarded by the home gateway, or may perform gateway functionality conversion to support the services, which may be acquired via the home gateway and/or the visited gateways from networks.12-08-2011
20110299544METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING BANDWIDTH BY A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for managing bandwidth by a broadband gateway are provided. In this regard, broadband gateway may, upon receiving a request for content from a user of the communication device, present, via a graphical user interface, a message that offers a benefit to the user in exchange for deferring consumption of the content until a later time. The gateway may then deliver the content to the communication device at a time determined by a response to the message received from the communication device. The message may provide several times at which the content may be delivered and a corresponding benefit available for each of the times. The times may correspond to times at which it is expected there will be less traffic in the network over which the content is to be delivered.12-08-2011
20110299546Method and System for Optimizing Communication in a Home Network Via a Gateway - A method and system are provided in which a content request may be received by a broadband gateway from a device connected to the broadband gateway through a home network. The broadband gateway may select content that corresponds to the request from content that is available through a network access service provider and/or from other devices in the home network. The selection of the content corresponding to the request may be based on capability information of the device. The capability information may comprise display, audio reproduction, encoding, decoding, and/or storage capabilities, for example. The selection may be based on an optimization associated with a bandwidth to transfer the content within the home network and/or a power consumed to process the content. The content that is selected may be received and processed by the broadband gateway, and/or by another device in the home network, before being communicated to the device.12-08-2011
20110299545CUSTOMIZED ACQUISITION OF CONTENT BY A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for customized acquisition of content by a broadband gateway are provided. A broadband gateway may be operable to determine options for acquiring particular content. The broadband gateway may be operable to rank the determined options. The ranking may be based on one or more characteristics of the options and based on user-specified criteria. The broadband gateway may be operable to select one of the options for acquiring the content based on results of the ranking. One or more of the options may be available via a first physical layer connection and one or more of the options may be available via a second physical layer connection. The gateway may rank the determined options based on attributes of one or more devices via which the particular content will be consumed.12-08-2011
20110299543Method and System for Providing Virtual Gateway Services - A broadband gateway configured to operate as a virtual broadband gateway may comprise a network portion and a local portion. The network portion is communicatively coupled to the local portion via a plurality of physical layer connections to one or more network access service providers. The virtual broadband gateway may acquire content from one or more providers, process the content for delivery to one or more local devices, and deliver the content to the one or more local devices. The remote portion may be implemented in one or more network devices. The network devices may be owned and/or operated by one or more content providers, one or more network access service providers, and/or one or more independent entities. Gateway functions performed by the network portion may comprise, for example, content downloading, content streaming, content authentication, data format conversion, service negotiation, service selection, data encryption, data decryption and/or data storage.12-08-2011
20110299542Method and System for Providing Directory Services by a Gateway for Peer-to-Peer Communications - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices and handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider, may be operable to identify one or more individuals with whom a user desires to engage in peer-to-peer communications. The user is associated with one or more of the plurality of devices. A directory may be generated by the broadband gateway for the peer-to-peer communications based on the identified one or more individuals. The directory may comprise name information, location information, contact information, communication device information, and/or content sharing information. The broadband gateway may communicate the directory to one or more network access service providers and/or one or more content providers. Peer-to-peer exchanges and/or network resource allocations for the peer-to-peer communications may be controlled and/or monitored by the network access services providers and/or the content providers based on information in the directory.12-08-2011
20110299541Method and System for Recognizing Energy Efficient Certified Devices Through a Gateway - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices, may be operable to identify an energy efficient certified device from the plurality of devices. The broadband gateway may handle at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. Information related to the identified energy efficient certified device, including usage information of the device, may be communicated to one or more entities. The broadband gateway may acquire the usage information of the energy efficient certified device by monitoring whether the device is operating in an energy efficient mode. The broadband gateway may obtain a credit and/or a reward from the one or more entities based on the usage information of the energy efficient certified device. The broadband gateway may deposit the credit and/or the reward to an account associated with the energy efficient certified device.12-08-2011
20110299540METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTI-TRANSPORT AND MULTI-PROTOCOL PROCESSING IN A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices, handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. The broadband gateway may receive a packet from a network access service provider over a physical layer connection. The broadband gateway may determine which one of a set of possible transport protocols is utilized for the received packet. The determined transport protocol is utilized to identify or search for content of the received packet. The set of possible transport protocols are selected based on, for example, a channel type identified for the physical layer connection. The selected set of possible transport protocols may be utilized, sequentially or concurrently, to determine the transport protocol for the received packet. The identified content is marked utilizing the determined transport protocol for content distribution to devices for content consumption.12-08-2011
20090028166ALLOCATION OF ROUTE TARGETS BASED ON SERVICE OFFERED - A network controller to allocate route targets for communication services provided on one or more corresponding virtual private networks, the route targets identifying service providers associated with the virtual private networks and the communication services provided by the corresponding virtual private networks.01-29-2009
20110280249Service Gateways for Providing Broadband Communication - Systems, methods, and apparatus for providing broadband communication are described. A service gateway may be situated outside of one or more households. The service gateway may include a termination component and a broadband modem. The termination component may be configured to connect to a source of a broadband data signal and receive the signal from the source. The broadband modem may be configured to receive the signal from the termination component and output at least a portion of the signal for receipt by a remote device situated within a household. Additionally, the service gateway may optionally include a router in communication with the broadband modem. The router may be configured to function as an intermediary between the modem and the remote device.11-17-2011
20110280248Hierarchical Isolated Learning and Flooding for Metro Ethernet Bridging Domains - In one embodiment, a switch includes a processor coupled to a memory, one or more forwarding tables residing within the memory, and one or more ports. The one or more ports are associated with a plurality of virtual local area networks. The one or more ports are associated with a plurality of bridge domains. Each of the bridge domains is associated with one of the forwarding tables, and each of the forwarding tables is associated with one of the bridge domains. The processor is configured to assign a first tag to a received packet, the first tag comprising an identification of an active bridge domain, assign a second tag to the received packet, look up the destination address of the received packet in one of the forwarding tables, and if the destination address is not found in the forwarding table, and selectively flood the one or more ports of the active bridge domain with a copy of the received packet. The active bridge domain includes one of the plurality of bridge domains. The active bridge domain is associated with the ingress port of the received packet. The second tag includes an identification of one of the plurality of virtual local area networks.11-17-2011
20110280247SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCING LATENCY VIA MULTIPLE NETWORK CONNECTIONS - A system and method is provided whereby more requests than are necessary to obtain a network resource may be adaptively determined and preemptively transmitted from a client device to a server device in order to reduce latency caused by the delay or loss of a request. In one aspect, the system and method includes transmitting multiple connection requests from the client to the server, where the number of the connection requests transmitted to the server is greater than the number necessary to obtain a resource hosted by the server.11-17-2011
20110286467 PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE FOR COMMUNICATING MESSAGES TO AND FROM WIRELESS DEVICES - Systems, methods and computer program products for facilitating the communication of business-related (SMS) messages between PBXs and wireless devices are disclosed. In an aspect of the present invention, a service provider offers a web, cloud-based service that enables an operator within an organization to have a high volume of two-way communications with an unlimited number of individuals—through SMS texting, instant messaging, pager, web browser, email and voice—all controlled from a single intuitive browser interface tool. Additionally, a complete history of all communications and real time statistics are available to either the operator or an administrator of the organization.11-24-2011
20110286465MULTI-TIERED PAGING SUPPORT USING PAGING PRIORITY - Prioritization of data traffic is a common technique for providing enhanced quality of service (QoS), allowing some traffic to reach its destination on an expedited basis without being obstructed or delayed by other lower-priority traffic. A mechanism is disclosed using the bearer architecture of the evolved packet core (EPC) to provide prioritization of traffic from specific packet data networks (PDNs), as well as over specific bearers. The priority information is requested by the mobile management entity (MME), which is commonly overloaded with traffic to and from multiple users and PDNs. In addition, a mechanism is provided for reducing the frequency of unwanted paging notifications for MMEs that are overloaded.11-24-2011
20080205416Flight control computers with ethernet based cross channel data links - According to an example embodiment, a method includes communicating between redundant Flight Control Computers (FCCs) using Cross-Channel Data Links (CCDLs) that operate in accordance with an IEEE standard Ethernet protocol.08-28-2008
20090201938ACCESS POINT AND METHOD FOR OPERATING THE ACCESS POINT - An access point is connectable to a first network and a second network different from the first network. The access point includes: a communication control device configured to connect one or more first terminals on the first network to the second network; and a communication stop device configured to deactivate at least a part of the communication control device when a condition on a time length or a time is fulfilled, such that at least one target terminal of the one or more first terminals is disconnected from the second network.08-13-2009
20090279557METHOD OF ROUTE CONVERGENCE, ROUTING DEVICE, AND MAIN CONTROL BOARD IN ROUTING DEVICE . - A method of route convergence, a routing device, and a main control board in the routing device are provided herein. The method includes receiving route information from multiple neighbor routing devices; selecting a route among the received route information, and applying the selected route to update an FIB of the main control board; and delivering the selected route to an interface board after confirming that the route information from the multiple neighbor routing devices is received and the route selection is completed.11-12-2009
20110134929LINK PATH DISCOVERY - A method includes identifying, by a first router, a number of label switched paths from the first router to a destination router, wherein each of the label switched paths includes less than a predetermined number of routers. The method may also include storing, for each of the label switched paths, information identifying each router in the label switched path. The method may further include identifying a least cost label switched path based on the stored information.06-09-2011
20110134930PACKET-BASED NETWORKING SYSTEM - One embodiment of the present invention is directed to a networking system comprising a sending device, a receiving device, electronic communications components and transmission media through which the sending device and receiving device exchange data packets, and a networking protocol implemented in executable routines, firmware, hardware, or a combination of two or more of executable routines, firmware, hardware that provides for transmission of data in an ordered set of data packets through a sequence established between the sending device and receiving device as a result of transmitting a first data packet from the sending device to the receiving device and returning an acknowledgement by the receiving device to the sending device.06-09-2011
20090041039METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ROUTING MESH NETWORK TRAFFIC - A method and device for routing to a non-mesh network a first data flow received at a first mesh gateway via a wireless link as provided improves network efficiency. According to one aspect, the method includes determining that available bandwidth of a backhaul link to the non-mesh network through the first mesh gateway is below a threshold value. The first data flow is then determined to have a higher priority than a second data flow that is currently routed through the first mesh gateway to the non-mesh network. The second data flow is then forwarded to a second mesh gateway, whereby the second mesh gateway routes the second data flow to the non-mesh network. The first data flow is then routed to the non-mesh network through the first mesh gateway after forwarding the second data flow to the second mesh gateway.02-12-2009
20090003365Method And Apparatus For Implementing Media Gateway Internal Connection - A method and apparatus to implement media gateway internal connection. The MGC obtains the MG's capability of supporting an internal connection via audit or configuration. Based on the obtained capability, the MGC determines and controls the implementation of the internal connection, or the MG determines and controls the implementation of the internal connection itself. If the MG determines and controls the implementation of the internal connection itself, the MG informs the MGC to modify the call mode in the MGC into the same as in the MG, or maps between the respective operations for the MGC and the MG to their respective call models after the MG implements the internal connection. The MGC can also control the MG's capability of determining and realizing the internal connection by itself based on the service characteristics.01-01-2009
20090003364Open platform architecture for integrating multiple heterogeneous network functions - A platform for seamlessly hosts a plurality of disparate types of packet processing applications. One or more applications are loaded onto a service card on the platform. A programmable path structure is included that maps a logical path for processing of the packets through one or more of the plurality of service cards according to characteristics of the packets. Multiple path structures may be programmed into the platform to offer different service paths for different types of packets.01-01-2009
20090003363System and methods for providing service-specific support for multimedia traffic in wireless networks - A system for providing service-specific support for multimedia traffic in a telecommunications system comprises a subscriber terminal, a base station operatively coupled to the subscriber terminal, a mobile switching center (MSC) operatively coupled to the base station, a media gateway control function (MGCF) and a media gateway (MGW), each coupled to the MSC. The subscriber terminal is adapted to generate multimedia traffic of at least one service category, wherein the multimedia traffic may be any of several distinct types defined within the service category. The subscriber terminal is further adapted to identify, when establishing a connection to the MSC to carry multimedia traffic, the type of that traffic in a connection request message. The MSC is adapted to further identify, when establishing a connection between the MSC and the MGCF/MGW to carry multimedia traffic, the type of that traffic in a message, responsive to the identification of the traffic type in the connection request message. The MGCF/MGW are adapted to identify, when converting, reformatting, or encapsulating multimedia traffic into a form to be carried over a packet network (for example, in TCP segments), the type of traffic being carried. The MGCF, MGW, or MSC may optionally perform service-specific processing on the multimedia traffic responsive to the traffic type indicator. When multimedia traffic is delivered to a destination network for ultimate delivery to a destination endpoint, an MGCF/MGW may reverse the effects of prior service-specific processing.01-01-2009
20100098095ROUTING METHOD IN IN-VEHICLE GATEWAY DEVICE - A routing method and an in-vehicle gateway device having a plurality of interfaces for communication, automatic setting of routing function is enabled to perform, in consideration of characteristics of data which a connecting network handles. A network is classified to an information-system, a control-system and a safety-system, based on characteristics thereof, and which one of the systems includes a network connecting to the in-vehicle gateway device, is judged from equipments connecting to the network, or traffic of the network. Still more processing in data exchange among different classifications is set in advance.04-22-2010
20110007748METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING ROUTES - A method for optimizing routes includes: receiving a route optimization request that includes a network address reallocation indication, wherein the route optimization request is sent by a User Equipment (UE) when a first Packet Data Network (PDN) connection exists between the UE and an old gateway; and triggering establishment of a second PDN connection between the UE and a new gateway according to the network address reallocation indication. Computer program products and computer-readable storage media corresponding to the method for optimizing routes, an MME, a system for optimizing routes, and a UE are also disclosed herein. Through the embodiments of the present invention, an after-route-optimization PDN connection is established in the process of route optimization, and two PDN connections can be established for one access point at the same time.01-13-2011
20080240131Teredo connectivity between clients behind symmetric NATs - Methods and systems for communicating between Teredo clients behind UPnP-enabled symmetric or restricted Network Address Translators.10-02-2008
20110206056METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN NETWORK ELEMENTS THAT OPERATE AT DIFFERENT BIT RATES - A method for enabling network elements (NEs) operating at a bit rate R08-25-2011
20100034208Buffered Crossbar Switch With a Linear Buffer to Port Relationship that Supports Cells and Packets of Variable Size - A buffered crossbar switch is provided with a buffer to port relationship that supports cells and packets of variable size. A novel scheduler is provided that allows for an efficient crossbar switch, where the relationship between the number of internal buffers is less than the number of ports squared. This allows for a switch that can be implemented that requires less buffer memory.02-11-2010
20090196302Indication Of Service Availability For A User Terminal - Disclosed herein is a method for providing a user with an indication of availability of a service at a user terminal, the user terminal being connected to a gateway via a first communications link, and the gateway being connected to a service provider via a second communications link. The method includes determining a service bandwidth demand, a bandwidth availability, and a service priority; determining a service availability based on the service bandwidth demand, the bandwidth availability, and the service priority; and providing the user with an indication of the service availability.08-06-2009
20100014534MULTIPLE NODE APPLICATIONS COOPERATIVELY MANAGING A PLURALITY OF PACKET SWITCHED NETWORK PATHWAYS - End-point devices, access points and other types of network nodes each employ multi-path management software to manage communication via multiple possible paths to the Internet backbone from communication applications that run on an end-point device. Although the multi-path management software on an end-point device may operate independently, it may also cooperate with the local communication applications and the multi-path management software located on the access points or other network nodes to select one or more pathways for the local communication applications. Alternatively, the multi-path management software of an end-point device may pass all or a portion of such management responsibility to a local communication application and/or to multi-path management software of another network node. In addition to managing the selection of one or more pathways, the multi-path management software seamlessly switches pathways as may become necessary to meet changing network conditions or bandwidth demands.01-21-2010
20100014533OVERLAY NETWORK NODE - There is disclosed a technology which improves scalability in an overlay network system and which efficiently supplies a service with respect to a user, and according to the technology, for example, in a case where a mobile node (01-21-2010
20100014531ESTABLISHING PSEUDOWIRES IN PACKET SWITCHING NETWORKS - Embodiments of the invention enable a pseudowire to be dynamically established over a PSN tunnel when the tunnel includes both statically configured segments and dynamically configured segments. Advantageously, these embodiments enable a network node that supports only static tunnel and pseudowire configuration to be included in dynamically configured pseudowires.01-21-2010
20100034207ENFORCING THE PRINCIPLE OF LEAST PRIVILEGE FOR LARGE TUNNEL-LESS VPNs - Techniques for secure communication in a tunnel-less VPN are provided. A key server generates and provides, to each VPN gateway, different, yet mathematically-related keying material. A VPN gateway receives distinct keying material for each designated address block (e.g., subnet) behind the VPN gateway. In response to receiving a packet from one a source host whose address falls within one of the designated address blocks, the VPN gateway identifies the appropriate keying material. The VPN gateway determines an identifier for the address block that includes the destination address. The identifier and the identified keying material are used to generate a key. The VPN gateway encrypts the packet with the key and forwards the encrypted packet to the destination host.02-11-2010
20100265962Media Routing - A method and system for routing media from a source resource on a source appliance across a network to a destination resource on a destination appliance. The particular destination resource on a destination appliance can be specified. Alternatively, the particular destination appliance is specified but the particular resource on the destination appliance is not specified. An intermediate appliance having a resource for converting the media from a source media-type to a destination media-type can be further specified. A user interface is provided to allow a user to specify the source and destination of the media. A discovery process is provided to allow appliances to discover the other appliances and resources available on the network.10-21-2010
20090285224SERVICE ADAPTATION MACHINE - A system may include a gateway that is configured to intercept messages being exchanged between multiple services, a message repository that is logically coupled to the gateway and that is configured to store the intercepted messages, a service description repository that is configured to store multiple service descriptions, where each of the service descriptions corresponds to one of the services, a rules repository that is configured to store mapping rules and an adaptation engine that is configured to generate a sequence of firing rules using the service descriptions and the mapping rules responsive to the intercepted messages, to generate one or more outgoing messages in response to the intercepted messages using the sequence of firing rules, and to detect at runtime an occurrence of a termination anomaly.11-19-2009
20090086740Customer Premises Gateway providing User Devices with Access to Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Services and Non-IMS Services - A customer premises gateway includes a connection manager, a registration manager and data storage. The registration manager registers the user devices connected to the gateway at the customer premises and stores information for the registered user devices, including identities for the user devices, at the gateway. The connection manager is operable to provide Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) services and non-IMS services via a broadband network to the user devices connected to the gateway. The connection manager is also operable to provide the IMS services and non-IMS services to the registered devices based on the information stored for the registered user devices.04-02-2009
20100272115GATEWAY-BASED MANAGEMENT IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Systems and methods for providing operations and management functions at a gateway in a communications network are disclosed. These management abilities allow the gateway to perform functions that improve resource distribution, allow for maintenance and upgrades, and provide session management and policy enforcement at the gateway. In some embodiments, a serving gateway (SGW) initiates a bearer or session change and subsequently sends a bearer request message to a mobility management entity (MME). In other embodiments, an SGW may exchange information with an MME, a second SGW or a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) using a private extension to an echo message. In other embodiments, an SGW may feature a command line interface that can be used to instruct the SGW to not accept new calls or sessions, or to take itself out of service.10-28-2010
20110122881HOME GATEWAY - A home gateway is disclosed. The home gateway includes: a digital enhanced cordless telecommunications (DECT) module, configured to communicate with a DECT terminal in a local area network (LAN) covered by the home gateway and provide the DECT terminal with voice services; a digital subscriber loop (xDSL) module, configured to communicate with a data service terminal in the LAN covered by the home gateway and provide the data service terminal with data services; a power module, configured to supply power to the DECT module and/or the xDSL module; a selecting module, connected to the power module and configured to connect the power module to the DECT module and/or the xDSL module selectively. By using the home gateway of the present invention, the electricity of the power supply provided for the home gateway may be controlled and saved.05-26-2011
20080267202MEDIA GATEWAY AND METHOD FOR REPORTING TERMINATION STATISTIC PARAMETER VALUE - A media gateway (MG) and method for reporting the termination statistic parameter value, the media gateway controller (MGC) may obtain the statistic parameter value of the termination in real-time with the little performance expense in the frame of media gateway control protocol. The present invention extends one event whose parameters contain the statistic parameter identifier using the event mechanism of media gateway control protocol, reporting the current value of the corresponding statistic parameter according to the statistic parameter identifier in the parameters when the event is triggered. Various optional trigger conditions may be set in the event parameters, including the duration for reporting, the period for reporting, the specific statistic exceeding certain extremum etc. as well as any combination thereof. While the statistic parameter in the event parameters is reported, maintains the statistic parameter value to prevent from reporting affect, or resets the statistic parameter value.10-30-2008
20090147795TCP Traversal Through Network Address Translators (NATS) - A network address translator (NAT) can be provided as part of a gateway between a private network and a public network. In situations where an entity in a private network requires establishment of a TCP connection to another entity in a separate private network, it is often the case that two NATs must be traversed one for each private network. In addition, these NATs may have associated one-way firewalls which block unsolicited incoming connections but allow outgoing connections. In this type of situation it is difficult to establish a TCP connection directly between the two entities in a simple and effective manner. We describe a method for achieving this which makes use of a redirection server in the public network to establish the connection but not to carry traffic during the communication session. We exploit features of the TCP simultaneous open process to establish a TCP connection directly between the entities.06-11-2009
20090147793PACKET COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD - A packet communication network is connected between a first external network and a second external network. The packet communication network includes a classifier, a parallel network that includes a plurality of physically or logically independent networks, and a multiplexing router. The classifier classifies a packet input from the first external network to one of the networks in the parallel network. Each of the networks in the parallel network transmits the packet to the multiplexing router. The multiplexing router multiplexes a packet received from the networks in the parallel network and outputs the multiplexed packet to the second external network.06-11-2009
20110261830PARALLEL COMPUTATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD AND PROGRAM THEREFOR - A parallel calculation system includes a plurality of functional nodes and a plurality of network switches, which serve as part of a communication path for communication between the functional nodes and function as communication channels. As for the functional nodes, a functional node group made up of part or all of a plurality of the functional nodes that the parallel calculation system includes is managed as one group. The network switches include a plurality of input/output ports, which are ports for inputting and outputting the communication request, and a switch, which outputs the communication request that the input/output port inputs to the input/output port. The network switches manage a communication bandwidth for each of the communication channels between the functional nodes and control the switch.10-27-2011
20100265961METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING THE PACKET SIZE FOR MEDIA TRANSMISSION - A method, device and system for controlling the packet size for media transmission are provided. The method includes the following steps: a media gateway (MG) receives a command request sent by a media gateway controller (MGC), where the command request carries a property that triggers the MG to determine a media block size; and the MG determines the media block size and transmits media according to the property.10-21-2010
20080304501TUNNELING SERVICE METHOD AND SYSTEM - A tunneling service method and system enabling data communication between different networks, in which an address of a tunneling service server used in a client node can be easily designated, the tunneling service method includes: transmitting an information request message, which requests information required for connection to the network, to a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) server selected by the client node; receiving an acknowledgement message, which contains an address of the tunnel router, from the DHCP server selected by the client node; and the client node detecting the address of the tunnel router contained in the acknowledgement message and generating a packet for a tunneling service using the detected address of the tunnel router.12-11-2008
20090168788NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION FOR TUNNEL MOBILITY - An access terminal identity based mobility is provided in which a first network tunnel is established between an access gateway and a first access router that provides a first access point for access terminals, and a second network tunnel is established between the access gateway and a second access router that provides a second access point for access terminals. A public address is assigned to the access terminal having a local address assigned by the first or second access router. At the access gateway, source addresses of packets sent from an access terminal to a remote correspondent node are translated by replacing the local address of the access terminal with the public address of the access terminal. The access terminal continuously maintain a communication session with the correspondent node as the access terminal moves from a first location to a second location and switches from accessing the first access router to accessing the second access router. A mapping between the local address and the public address is updated as the access terminal switches from the first access router to the second access router.07-02-2009
20080291929Providing connectivity between subnets of a wireless network - A method of providing connectivity between subnets of a wireless network is disclosed. The method includes each gateway of each subnet selecting less than all gateways of each other subnet of the wireless network. An adjacency is formed between each gateway and each of the less than all selected gateways of each other subnet.11-27-2008
20080291928Processing Packets of a Virtual Interface Associated with Tunnels - Packet switch operating methods and packet switches assign a packet to a virtual interface. The virtual interface is associated with a plurality of tunnels. One of the plurality is designated a primary tunnel configured to accept packets. Other tunnels of the plurality are designated as backup tunnels and are configured to reject packets. The methods and packet switches also determine which of the plurality of tunnels is the primary tunnel and determine a packet switch port associated with the primary tunnel. The methods and packet switches egress the packet via the primary tunnel on the packet switch port associated with the primary tunnel.11-27-2008
20110170554METHOD AND A GATEWAY FOR PROVIDING MULTIPLE INTERNET ACCESS - The present invention concerns a gateway and a method at a gateway for providing multiple accesses to an IP based network, the gateway comprising an interface to a first network, an interface to a second network, the gateway being connected to the IP based network with a first network provider on a first connection through the second network. The method comprises the steps of detecting a request from a device located on the first network to connect to the IP based network with a second network provider, setting up a second connection to the IP based network through the second network with a second network provider, and connecting the device to the IP based network with the second connection.07-14-2011
20080267201SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING DYNAMIC NETWORK SESSIONS - For an Internet Access Gateway operative between an area network and a public network, managing dynamic network sessions therebetween whereby a primary server on the public network in a primary session with a client of the area network initiates an additional session with an additional server on the public network, for which an unexpected data packet received at the gateway from the additional server is associated with the primary session, and accordingly allowed access to the area network through the gateway, provided the gateway received the data packet at an input port exceeding 1023, the additional session comprises a pre-defined Session Triggering Event, and at least one internal network component of the area network indicates willingness to receive the data packet. Wherefore, a preferred Application Level Gateway is thereby provided for firewall and NAT implementations to enhance network security.10-30-2008
20100124231SUMMARIZATION AND LONGEST-PREFIX MATCH WITHIN MPLS NETWORKS - In general, techniques are described for summarizing label mappings and thereby enabling longest-prefix match within Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) networks. More specifically, a first router included within a first area of a network comprises a control unit that maintains a label space defining labels available for mapping to a plurality of addresses assigned to network devices within the network. The control unit reserves a contiguous set of the labels of the label space and maps the contiguous set of labels to first area addresses. The first area addresses include those addresses of the plurality of addresses available for assignment to network devices within the first area. The first router also includes an interface card that transmits, to a second router of a second area of the network, an advertisement that advertises a summarized version of the mapping between the contiguous set of labels and the first area addresses.05-20-2010
20080247403NETWORK BRIDGE APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A network bridge apparatus and a communication method using the network bridge apparatus are provided. In the network bridge apparatus, a storage stores first attribute information which is provided by a first device of a first cluster for communication, an external communicator transmits the stored first attribute information to a second cluster and receives second attribute information which is provided by a second device of the second cluster for communication, from the second cluster, and a controller recognizes a service provided by the second device from the received second attribute information, creates a virtual device corresponding to the second device by changing the received second attribute information, and maps the changed second attribute information to the received second attribute information.10-09-2008
20080247402COMMUNICATION RELAYING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION RELAY, AND CONTROLLING METHOD - A wide area network is constructed by connecting a plurality of bases to a multipoint switching apparatus. Each base has a certain contracted communication band. If a packet is received from a first base having a higher contracted communication band and the packet is directed to a second base having a lower contracted communication band, the traffic from the first base is limited to the contracted communication band of the second base.10-09-2008
20100098094Mechanism for Protecting a Pseudo-Wire - A method is provided for setting up at least two pseudo-wires able to broadcast a stream of data, wherein a first pseudo-wire is set up between an input router of a packet-switched network and first output router of the packet-switched network, and a second pseudo-wire is set up between the input router and a second output router of the packet-switched network. A first link of the first pseudo-wire is set up between the first output router and an intermediate router of the packet-switched network. A second link of the second pseudo-wire is set up between the second output router and the intermediate router. A third link of both pseudo-wires is set up between the intermediate router and the input router.04-22-2010
20090310616SWITCH FABRIC PRIMITIVES - Techniques are described for optimizing broadcast and collect primitives in switch fabrics.12-17-2009
20100118880METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NETWORK SWITCH ELEMENT - Method and system for a network switch element is provided. The switch element includes a plurality of megaports, each megaport uniquely identified by a unique megaport address identifier for network addressing. Each megaport includes a plurality of operational ports, each operational port identified by a unique operational port address identifier. The switch element also includes a local crossbar for communication between the plurality of operational ports, and a shared logic module configured to provide common control of the plurality of operational ports within a megaport to allow operational ports to share resource of a single megaport to route network packets there between. The switch element also includes a global crossbar configured to allow communication between the megaports05-13-2010
20100118879SESSION CONTINUITY FOR SUPPORT OF SIMULTANEOUS TERMINAL ACCESSES - Methods and nodes are provided for supporting session continuity for terminals capable of having simultaneous accesses while served by a plurality of gateways. Distinct binding cache entries (BCE) are stored for a terminal, each BCE being related to one of the gateways serving the terminal. The BCEs identify the terminal, provide an address allocated thereto for getting access at a gateway, and identify the gateway providing the access. When detection is made that two of more BCEs relate to the same terminal for distinct gateways, address information is sent to each other gateway.05-13-2010
20100265956Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Grouped Route Withdrawals - An apparatus comprising: a first Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) device configured to communicate with a second BGP device and implement grouped route withdrawals with the second BGP device. A method comprising: announcing, by a BGP speaker, a plurality of grouped routes, and withdrawing, by the BGP speaker, a plurality of previously announced grouped routes.10-21-2010
20090290591RELIABILITY PROCESSING METHODS AND SYSTEMS IN THE NETWORKING OF METRO ETHERNET NETWORK PROVIDING MULTI-SERVICE - A reliability processing method and system in networking of Metro Ethernet Network providing multi-service are provided. The method includes: establishing a Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) group with at least two service control gateways, establishing network connections between an access device (UPE) and the service control gateways in the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol group by a Virtual Private LAN Service (VPLS); establishing Layer 11-26-2009
20120033675Dictation / audio processing system - An audio handling system comprising audio file handling means for at least one of converting, compressing, encrypting, E-mailing, and pushing audio files to at least one of a file transfer protocol (FTP) site and at least one E-mail address.02-09-2012
20100080240Routing Device and Method of Translating Addresses in Cascade in a Network - A routing device includes means for executing a function of translation between at least one address of a first network and at least one address of a second network; means for receiving an association request from a terminal of said first network; means for generating a second request by substituting a source address in the association request by an address of the routing device in the second network; means for sending the second request to an address translation server of the second network; and means for sending said terminal, in response to said association request, a response received from said address translation server in response to sending said second request.04-01-2010
20100080239TECHNIQUE FOR COMBATING LOOPS IN COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Technology for combating loops in multi-domain networks, by assigning to network domains categories, at least such as “high/trusted” and “low/less trusted”, and by making a decision about relearning Forwarding Information Base FIB of any edge node interconnecting different network domains, utilizing the assigned categories.04-01-2010
20090086742PROVIDING VIRTUAL SERVICES WITH AN ENTERPRISE ACCESS GATEWAY - Systems and methods to virtually and securely extend voice, data, and video services as well as applications on communication networks is provided. An access gateway device is used to provide interworking and extension of services from an enterprise network or a hosted enterprise network to a public network such as an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network. The access gateway device can also enable handoffs between an enterprise access point and the service provider's radio network while maintain the user's session. The access gateway can also extend services from the enterprise network to the service providers network and vice versa.04-02-2009
20090086744METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SELECTING EDGE CONNECTION LINK ACROSS DIFFERENT MANAGEMENT DOMAIN NETWORKS - A method, system and device for selecting an edge connection link across different management domain networks. A plurality of links is provided between a first management domain network and a second management domain network. The method includes: determining, by a first resource management and control function entity in the first management domain network, a link to the second management domain network, and sending identifier information of the determined link to a second resource management and control function entity in the second management domain network; and determining, by the second resource management and control function entity, the link to the first management domain network, in accordance with the received identifier information of the determined link. The invention can implement selecting of an edge connection link across different management domain networks.04-02-2009
20090086743Method for the organization of network nodes in a packet-switched network - There is described a method to organize a network, wherein if for a first router set up as the default gateway an inaccessibility of an assigned network element is detected at an interface of the first router a second router is set up as the logical default gateway. In this case a provision is made such that in the course of setting up the second router as the default gateway a check on the interface metric is performed at the first and/or second router and that in consequence of the inaccessibility detected for the interface an adaptation of the interface metric is carried out. The interface metric is propagated for example by way of the routing protocol OSPF and/or EIGRP and/or IS-IS to other routers. When using the method it is possible in a failure scenario with divided Layer-2 networks to avoid an occurrence of “black holes”, in other words gaps in communication. Moreover asymmetric routing, which is caused by a changeover of the logical gateway from the first router to the second router, can be eliminated. The danger of an excessive exchange of unicast messages, which can result in a high failure level of all participating network nodes and network node elements, is thus also excluded.04-02-2009
20090046730Network switching apparatus for redundancy gateway system - A network switching apparatus which is provided between a redundancy gateway system and a packet network and enables an uninterruptible changeover in a system changeover to be performed. The apparatus includes an up-direction transfer unit and a down-direction transfer unit. The down-direction transfer unit receives a changeover notification packet accompanied with designation information of a new active system gateway apparatus which has newly been set in place of an active system gateway apparatus. After the reception of the changeover notification packet, only in the case where a down-direction packet which is newly transmitted by the packet network is accompanied with designation information of the active system gateway apparatus before the changeover, the down-direction transfer unit changes the designation information to the designation information of the new active system gateway apparatus, thereby transferring the down-direction packet to the new active system gateway apparatus.02-19-2009
20090046729ROUTING CONTROL METHOD AND SYSTEM - A VPN server encapsulates a packet P02-19-2009
20110200054METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PROVIDING LOCAL APPLICATION ROUTING AT A DIAMETER NODE - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for providing local application routing at a Diameter node are disclosed. One method includes receiving, at an ingress Diameter message processor associated with a Diameter signaling router (DSR), a Diameter message from a peer Diameter element. At the ingress Diameter message processor, application routing data is accessed to determine whether processing of the Diameter message by a Diameter application is required. In response to determining that Diameter application processing is required, the Diameter message is forwarded to a Diameter message processor hosting a Diameter application identified by the application routing data for processing. In response to determining that Diameter application processing is not required, the Diameter message is forwarded to an egress Diameter message processor associated with the DSR.08-18-2011
20110200052MACHINE TO MACHINE ARCHITECTURE - A machine-to-machine communication platform provides a flexible system for device control and solution hosting. In particular, the communication platform hosts and manages third party vertical solutions that interact with external devices. A third party gateway provides the third parties with access to the communication platform so that the third parties may define, configure, and monitor custom vertical solutions that are locally hosted in the communication platform. The communication platform provides a communication manager that implements a device independent communication facility for communicating with the external devices. As a result, the communication platform connects to, communicates with, and controls virtually any external device.08-18-2011
20120106560INTER-DOMAIN ROUTING IN AN N-ARY-TREE AND SOURCE-ROUTING BASED COMMUNICATION FRAMEWORK - Systems and techniques for processing and forwarding packets are described. Specifically, some embodiments can include a receiving mechanism, a determining mechanism, a generating mechanism, and a sending mechanism. The receiving mechanism can be configured to receive a first packet that is to be routed from a first node in a first Autonomous System (AS) to a second node in a second AS. The determining mechanism can be configured to determine a set of bits that encodes a route in an n-ary tree that includes the first node and a root node in the first AS. The generating mechanism can be configured to generate, based on the first packet, a second packet that includes the set of bits and an identifier associated with the second AS. The sending mechanism can be configured to send the second packet.05-03-2012
20120106564METHOD FOR SWITCHING DATA AND STRUCTURE FOR SWITCHING DATA - A method and structure for switching data is provided. An output port scheduler obtains state information of VOQs and available state information of input port data channels and output port buffers. The output port scheduler sends scheduling request information to a FIC of an input port whose input port data channel is ready in input ports corresponding to non-empty VOQs pointing to an output port. After receiving the scheduling request information sent by the output port schedulers, the FIC of the selected input port selects to respond to a scheduling request of one output port scheduler, and sends the VOQ pointing to the output port in the selected input port to the output port buffer. The output port scheduler schedules the VOQ received by the output port buffer out of a switch chip. Buffer resources are saved and the switching performance is improved.05-03-2012
20120106563Method of Performing a Service Group Discovery Procedure in a Communication System and Related Communication Device - A method of performing a Service Group (SG) Discovery procedure in a communication system is disclosed. The method comprises transmitting a Request message from a first personal network element (PNE) to a personal network (PN) gateway (GW) or the PN GW to a Converged Personal Network Service (CPNS) Server; and transmitting a Response message from the PN GW to the first PNE or the CPNS Server to the PN GW according to the Request message. The Request message comprises at least one of an OriginEntityID, and a first SGInfo which comprises a keyword, or the Response message comprises a second SGInfo.05-03-2012
20120106562ROUTER AND SWITCH ARCHITECTURE - A packet switching system for a packet transfer network, the system having an architecture including a plurality of line cards, each including an ingress path pipeline, with processing elements, and an egress buffer, and an electro-optical In/Out (IO) interconnect coupling the line cards to one another in a full mesh connectivity, in the absence of a switch fabric, wherein the ingress path pipeline of each line card is coupled by means of the electro-optical IO interconnect to the egress buffer of each of the plurality of line cards.05-03-2012
20120106561COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL STATION THEREOF AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A plurality of control stations supervise respective ones of different networks and multiple nodes belonging to each network perform redundant transmission of data. The number of communication paths for which the qualities of communication links between the nodes belonging to the network are greater than a threshold value are calculated as the number of active paths of each of the nodes belonging to each network, and it is determined whether the calculated number of active paths of each node in each network is equal to or greater than a predetermined redundancy. In case of existence of a node for which the number of active paths is less than the predetermined redundancy, then the node is moved between the network in which the node exists and another network.05-03-2012
20120106559METHOD OF NETWORK-BASED COMMUNICATION IN VIRTUAL NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - In a plurality of virtual tunnel routers including a first virtual tunnel router and a second virtual tunnel router, the first virtual tunnel router and the second virtual tunnel router request virtual network prefix information from a tunnel mapping controller. When the tunnel mapping controller generates virtual network prefix information of the first virtual tunnel router and the second virtual tunnel router, respectively, and transmits the same along with information of a list of adjacent virtual tunnel routers, the first virtual tunnel router and the second virtual tunnel router create a tunnel. With the tunnel established, the virtual network prefix information received by the first virtual tunnel router and second virtual tunnel router, respectively, is linked so that direct communication can be performed between the first virtual tunnel router and the second virtual tunnel router.05-03-2012
20120106558BRIDGE FOR IMPLEMENTING A CONVERGED NETWORK PROTOCOL TO FACILITATE COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DIFFERENT COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL NETWORKS - Provided are a computer program product, system, and method for a bridge for implementing a converged network protocol to facilitate communication between different communication protocol networks. A first adaptor implements a first communication protocol and a second adaptor implementing a converged network protocol, wherein the converged network protocol facilitates communication of packets encoded with a second communication protocol with a third communication protocol network. Parameters are configured in a memory for communication between the first adaptor and the second adaptor in the converged network protocol to indicate to the second adaptor that the converged network protocol is supported, wherein the first adaptor does not support the converged network protocol. A packet is received at the first adaptor encoded in the second communication protocol directed to the third communication protocol network. The packet is forwarded to the second adaptor to forward to the third communication protocol network. A command is received at the second adaptor, directed to the first adaptor, to implement a function in the converged network protocol for communication between the first and second adaptors. Operations are performed to implement the function using the parameters in the memory to support transmission of packets between the first and the second adaptors.05-03-2012
20090274159METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADVERTISING BORDER CONNECTION INFORMATION OF AUTONOMOUS SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for advertising border connection information of autonomous system are disclosed. Moreover, the method includes: establishing and maintaining, by a border node of the autonomous system, the border connection information of the autonomous system; flooding the border connection information within the autonomous system; and receiving, by nodes of the autonomous system, the border connection information. The method and the apparatus for advertising border connection information of autonomous system of embodiments of the present invention may adapt to dynamic change of network topology, and dynamically advertise the border connection information of the autonomous system within the system in time, so as to optimize networks and improve quality of service of the networks.11-05-2009
20090201936Time synchronizing device and process and associated products - The present invention concerns a time synchronizing device and process, and a local gateway comprising that device. The time synchronizing device synchronizes a router arranged between two communication networks. It comprises intercepting means of a message coming from an apparatus of a source network for that message, having a specific time clock, and directed to a target network for that message, preparing means of a time request able to be executed in that apparatus so as to cause synchronizing data based on that specific clock to be obtained from that apparatus and to be transmitted back to the synchronizing device, sending means of the time request to the apparatus, forwarding means of the intercepted message to the target network after the preparing means have prepared the time request, receiving means of the synchronizing data, and exploiting means of those data to synchronize a local time clock used by the router with respect to that specific time clock. Application to home networks.08-13-2009
20090279556System and Method for Providing a Pluggable Architecture for State Management in a Telecommunication Service Access Gateway - A network service access gateway is described that provides a pluggable state management architecture for storing state information. The gateway typically processes requests between entities such as external applications and subscriber mobile devices. In processing data, the gateway can implement multiple storage providers which are selected according to the data access requirements of the specific request. Each storage provider can implement a different caching or data management technique in order to provide access to the required information. Examples of the storage providers include in-memory only caches, write-through disk based storage provider, write-behind disk based storage provider and non-cached disk-based storage provider. The particular storage provider can be selected based on a configuration file and according to the traffic path associated with the request.11-12-2009
20100124232COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - GW apparatuses send messages including data being sent from ECUs to a distribution apparatus without sending to an ECU. The distribution apparatus stores the messages on a database, and sends the messages to an ECU, and an ECU. In a case, the distribution apparatus sends the messages in a message sending order and the GW apparatuses relays the messages being sent from the distribution apparatus to the ECUs. The message sending order may be an order in which the distribution apparatus receives the messages an ascending (descending) order of values corresponding to message IDs applied to the messages, or an ascending order of message received time of the messages.05-20-2010
20100098099PPP TERMINATING EQUIPMENT, NETWORK EQUIPMENT AND METHOD OF RESPONDING TO LCP ECHO REQUIREMENT - In a PPP terminating equipment 04-22-2010
20110170551Stackable Network Processing Device with Top Mounted IO Port Connectors - A network processing device, such as a router, is implemented in a thin form factor chassis that encloses a primary printed circuit board. The router chassis has elongated openings on its top surface that permit access to connectors mounted on the printed circuit board. The printed circuit board includes all of the necessary electronic components that operate to receive, process, and transmit information over the network.07-14-2011
20090279555Method and apparatus for a fast installation of an ip user connection over a 3gpp nb interface under application of the bicc "delayed backward bearer establishment" and avoidance of failure - An IP user data transport connection is established between a Media Gateway O and a Media Gateway T according to the BICC “Delayed Backward Bearer Establishment”. The Media Gateway O sends an IPBCP Accepted message towards the Media Gateway T upon receipt of an IPBCP Request message from Media Gateway T. The Media Gateway O sends data within the user data transport connection towards the Media Gateway T. The user data may arrive at the Media Gateway T before the IPBCP accepted message. The Media Gateway T retrieves the source IP address and Port number from a user data transport connection IP packet received the Media Gateway O, and sends the first user data transport connection IP packet (s) towards the Media Gateway O upon receipt of a user data transport connection IP packet from the Media Gateway O, using the retrieved IP Address and Port number as destination.11-12-2009
20090262746ROUTER AND ROUTING METHOD FOR PORTABLE INTERNET SERVICE - The present invention relates to a router (for example, ACR) which provides a mobility function and a delivery function with a portable Internet core network while controlling RAS, which is a base station, as a basis network element of an access network in a portable Internet (for example, WiBro) service, and particularly, provides a new paging algorithm in order to overcome the limit of a paging in a conventional routing scheme, and to effectively process the buffering function for seamless connection maintenance and the paging function for a destination terminal with respect to the terminated call of a terminal in a non-active mode. A router of the present invention includes a control plane that buffers a data packet for a non-active mode, and performs a paging for a corresponding non-active mode terminal.10-22-2009
20090135842METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONNECTING A MEDIA STREAM, AND METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTING A CONNECTIVITY - This invention discloses a method for connecting a media stream, which includes: transmitting, by a media gateway in a private network, a connecting message to an external network device through a network address translation device; the connecting message is used for generating a new address mapping, which is used for a subsequent media stream to pass through the network address translation device, in the network address translation device when there is no address mapping available in the network address translation device; and the connecting message is used for keeping alive an address mapping when the address mapping is already available in the network address translation device. The invention further discloses a system for connecting a media stream, two methods for detecting connectivity, and a system for detecting connectivity.05-28-2009
20090290590FORWARDING PACKETS IN A GATEWAY PERFORMING NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION (NAT) - A gateway device providing a search utility to determine both NAT information and forwarding information (“both pieces of information”) in a single search operation. The single search operation may be implemented using a single table storing both pieces of information necessary for processing a packet. As a result, both pieces of information can be potentially retrieved in a single memory access. Due to the single (or few) memory access, the throughput performance of a gateway may be enhanced. In an embodiment, the gateway is implemented as a service selection gateway which provides connectivity between multiple remote systems and service domains. The NAT/forwarding information is partitioned according to service domains such that the information needed to process packets from/to the same service domain is contained in the same table.11-26-2009
20090109986SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RESELECTION OF A PACKET DATA NETWORK GATEWAY WHEN ESTABLISHING CONNECTIVITY - A network control module includes an access module that determines whether a first packet data network gateway communicating with a first packet data network also communicates with a second packet data network. The network control module also includes a selection control module in communication with a mobile wireless terminal. The mobile wireless terminal attempts to access the second packet data network by establishing a connection with a second packet data network gateway that communicates with the second packet data network. In response to the access module determining that the first packet data network gateway also communicates with the second packet data network, the selection control module commands the mobile wireless terminal to access the second packet data network through the first packet data network gateway.04-30-2009
20110170555PACKET FORWARDING APPARATUS HAVING GATEWAY LOAD DISTRIBUTION FUNCTION - A packet forwarding apparatus comprises a plurality of line interfaces each for communicating with one of user terminals or one of redundant gateways, and a protocol processing unit for controlling packet forwarding among the line interfaces. The protocol processing unit forwards a connection initiation request packet received from a user terminal to the plurality of redundant gateways and forwards to the user terminal only one response packet which is selected according to connection load status information of each gateway stored in a load distribution management table from among a plurality of response packets received from the gateways within a predetermined period of time.07-14-2011
20110170556GATEWAY APPARATUS, METHOD, SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM - A gateway apparatus receives an image signal, which includes a moving image signal or a still image signal, from a first terminal connected to a first network, performs conversion that enhances resolution and image quality of the image signal, and transmits the converted image signal to a second terminal connected to a second network.07-14-2011
20090285227TRANSPARENT MODE - A method, system, apparatus, and signal-bearing media for provided discovering a target device via one port of a plurality of virtual ports, creating a target data structure associated with the target device, and allocating a second port of the plurality of virtual ports to a host if the second port is available. In an embodiment, an initiator identifier for the host may be created based on a port number of the second port and a media access control address and sent to the target device to identify the host.11-19-2009
20090285225PROVIDING TRIGGER BASED TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT - Systems and methods for providing trigger based dynamic changes to a packet flow in a communication network are described. The trigger based dynamic changes can include upgrading and downgrading quality of service (QoS), processing the packet flow, and providing services to the packet flow. These changes can be provided by inspecting packets at a gateway for trigger conditions and setting up a proxy instance for the packet flows. The proxy can coordinate QoS changes and management of packet flows. The triggers can be based on the destination of the packet, for example, the uniform resource locator (URL) and/or by the services (e.g., email, video, messaging) that the subscriber is accessing. The triggers can also be based on the identity of the user or agreements a provider might have with an operator of network equipment for users accessing the provider's website.11-19-2009
20110200053METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PROVIDING PRIORITY ROUTING AT A DIAMETER NODE - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for providing priority routing at a Diameter node are disclosed. One exemplary method includes receiving, at a Diameter message processor associated with a DSR, a Diameter message from a first Diameter node. The method further includes assigning, at the Diameter message processor, a priority level indicator to the Diameter message. The method also includes routing the Diameter message with the priority level indicator to a second Diameter node. A second exemplary method includes receiving, at a Diameter message processor associated with a DSR, a Diameter message that includes a priority level indicator from a first Diameter node. The second method further includes applying, at the Diameter message processor, a routing action to the Diameter message based at least in part on the priority level indicator contained in the Diameter message.08-18-2011
20110170553METHOD OF DATA DELIVERY ACROSS A NETWORK FABRIC IN A ROUTER OR ETHERNET BRIDGE - The invention provides an Ethernet bridge or router comprising a network fabric adapted to provide interconnectivity to a plurality of Ethernet ports, each of the Ethernet ports being adapted to receive and/or transmit Ethernet frames, and wherein the Ethernet bridge or router further comprises an encapsulator connected to receive Ethernet Protocol Data Units from the Ethernet ports, wherein the encapsulator is operable to generate a Fabric Protocol Data Unit from a received Ethernet Protocol Data Unit, the Fabric Protocol Data Unit comprising a header portion, and a payload portion which comprises the Ethernet Protocol Data Unit concerned, and wherein the encapsulator is operable to transform Ethernet destination address information from the Ethernet Protocol Data Unit into a routing definition for the network fabric, and to include this routing definition in the header portion of the Fabric Protocol Data Unit. Also provided is a method of data delivery across a network.07-14-2011
20090290589METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING METAZONES ACROSS DISSIMILAR NETWORKS - A system and method for creating and enforcing meta-zones that cross the interface between different network protocols are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method of enforcing meta-zones comprises: (a) receiving an Infiniband (IB) packet destined for a Fibre Channel (FC) target device; (b) comparing a partition key in the IB packet to a partition key associated with the FC target device; and (c) converting the IB packet to a FC frame only if the partition keys match. The method may further comprise receiving FC frames destined for an IB target device and converting the FC frame into an IB packet having a partition key associated with the source of the FC frame. Also disclosed are a gateway configured to create and enforce meta-zones, and computer networks having such a gateway.11-26-2009
20090296723Multi-computer switch with function of transmitting data between computers - A multi-computer switch with a function of transmitting data between computers includes a multiple of hub units, at least one data transmission control unit and a switching interface control unit. Each hub unit includes an upstream port and a multiple of downstream ports. The upstream port is connected to a computer system, and each downstream port further includes at least one first downstream port and at least one second downstream port. The data transmission control unit is bridged to a first downstream port of any two hub units for transmitting data between computer systems connected to the two hub units according to a data exchange signal. The switching interface control unit switches and connects at least one first common peripheral to the second downstream port of one of the hub units to achieve the effect of timely transmitting data in different computers.12-03-2009
20090296725Router device for efficient routing with congestion minimized - In a router, a receiver receives a communication packet meant for a communication destination other than this router device. A calculator calculates a cost value for forwarding a communication packet to a destination by each of neighboring routers adjacent to the router. A next-router determiner selects a neighboring router as a next router based on the cost value calculated to supply the determined information and the communication packet to a transmitter, which transmits the communication packet to the destination based on the determined information. The calculator calculates the cost value based on the node degree of the neighboring routers and the number of hops of the communication packet from the neighboring routers to the destination.12-03-2009
20090296721METHOD FOR MANAGING IP TUNNELS - A method for managing Internet Protocol (IP) tunnels is provided. The method is executed by a local host. There is at least one IP tunnel planned between the local host and a remote host. The method comprises the following steps. If the local addresses of the tunnels include dynamic IP addresses, acquire the dynamic IP addresses. All tunnels with known remote addresses are built. If there are known remote addresses and the local addresses include dynamic IP addresses, send a notification to the remote host, wherein the notification includes all local dynamic IP addresses. If any local address changes, all tunnels with changed local addresses and known remote addresses are rebuilt. A message is received from the remote host and classified. If the message is a notification, the tunnels are updated according to the remote addresses included in the message, and an acknowledgement is sent back to the remote host.12-03-2009
20090296724Gateway apparatus - A gateway apparatus relays a data packet only when a network that is connected to the gateway apparatus itself is identical to a network that is connected to a node associated with a sender's address. The sender's address is carried in the data packet received. Even if there are accesses from a plurality of nodes to a certain node (e.g., sensor node), the gateway apparatus can relay the data packet such that data retrieval takes place appropriately and/or such that node control takes place appropriately.12-03-2009
20090252177Edge Side Assembler - Methods, systems, and apparatuses are disclosed for enabling a virtual personalized network. Communications are established with a personal digital gateway to control access, sharing, security, and/or management of up-to-date personalized data exchanged between or among a plurality of associated communications devices and/or communications networks. The associated communications devices are owned, operated, and/or accessed by a common user.10-08-2009
20090041036Maintaining A Content Category Cache At A Gateway On A Data Path - Maintaining a content category cache includes storing the content category cache at a gateway. The content category cache includes content category mappings, where a content category mapping associates content with one or more categories describing the content. A request requesting content for a user is received. One or more categories associated with the requested content are determined from a content category mapping of the content category cache. The requested content is filtered in accordance with the categories.02-12-2009
20100111093METHODS AND APPARATUS TO DYNAMICALLY CONTROL CONNECTIVITY WITHIN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus to dynamically control connectivity within VPNs are disclosed. A disclosed example route server to control connectivity within a VPN comprises a memory to implement a database, a border gateway protocol (BGP) engine to process BGP advertisements, a network interface to receive a first BGP advertisement, which a first route target (RT) associated with the first PE router, from a first provider edge (PE) router associated with the VPN, and an intra-VPN connectivity controller to, in response to the first BGP advertisement, query the database to determine whether the first PE router is to be communicatively coupled to a second PE router of the VPN and when the first and second PE routers of the VPN are to be communicatively coupled, direct the BGP engine to form a second BGP advertisement that includes a second RT associated with the second PE router based on the first BGP advertisement.05-06-2010
20080212594Optimized Interworking Between Different Communication Protocols - Methods and systems for optimizing interworking between various communication protocols are provided. The method comprises establishing a communication connection between a first endpoint and a second endpoint, wherein the first endpoint communicates over a first communication protocol and wherein the second endpoint communicates over a second communication protocol; and monitoring communication between the first and second endpoints such that communication messages that are transmitted by the first endpoint over the first communication protocol can be mapped to counterpart messages to be received by the second endpoint over the second communication protocol, and communication messages that are transmitted by the second endpoint over the second communication protocol can be mapped to counterpart messages received by the first endpoint over the first communication protocol.09-04-2008
20120294312PIPELINE METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SWITCHING PACKETS - A switching device comprising one or more processors coupled to a media access control (MAC) interface and a memory structure for switching packets rapidly between one or more source devices and one or more destination devices. Packets are pipelined through a series of first processing segments to perform a plurality of first sub-operations involving the initial processing of packets received from source devices to be buffered in the memory structure. Packets are pipelined through a series of second processing segments to perform a plurality of second sub-operations involved in retrieving packets from the memory structure and preparing packets for transmission. Packets are pipelined through a series of third processing segments to perform a plurality of third sub-operations involved in scheduling transmission of packets to the MAC interface for transmission to one or more destination devices.11-22-2012
20120294313NETWORK RELAY DEVICE AND DIAGNOSTIC METHOD - In a network relay device, a routing table stores information of a transfer destination of a packet. A forwarding unit determines the transfer destination of a packet based on information of the routing table. A switch unit switches output destinations of the packet to the forwarding unit based on the determination of a transfer destination by the forwarding unit. A diagnostic packet generator generates a diagnostic packet that circulates through an active path within the device based on the information of the routing table. A diagnostic packet transmitter sends out a diagnostic packet generated by the diagnostic packet generator to the forwarding unit via the switch unit.11-22-2012
20110206055METHOD AND PACKET SWITCH APPLIANCE FOR PERFORMING PACKET DEDUPLICATION - A packet switch appliance and method for performing packet deduplication are described. In one embodiment, the packet switch appliance comprises a first network switch chip to receive packets from the network and a processor coupled to the first network switch chip and operable to perform a method comprising receiving the packets, identifying a packet as a duplicate packet if at least a portion of the packet is identical to a corresponding portion of another packet received within a predetermined period of time, and discarding the packet if the packet is the duplicate packet.08-25-2011
20100061386Method and Arrangement Relating to Communications Network Services Request Activation - The present invention relates to an arrangement and method of services request in a packet switched telecommunications network. The network comprises a first server (03-11-2010
20100061385METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING A ROUTING ARCHITECTURE FOR OVERLAY NETWORKS - A link state overlay routing protocol that is capable of routing based on flat identifiers is proposed. The very fundamental problem that exists with 5 routing based on flat identifiers is that the identifier space can not be aggregated. All existing routing is based on hierarchy and aggregations of IP-addresses to network addresses, so called subnetting. The proposed routing protocol is capable of deciding the best path to a destination taking into account different possible parameters (e.g., round trip time). The scalability of the 10 protocol is solved by not taking decisions based upon a single end-node identifier; instead the routing decisions are taken based on a network identifier.03-11-2010
20100061383Combined FCOE Network Device - Embodiments of the present invention are related to a device and a method for more efficiently processing Ethernet communications that include FCOE communications. In some embodiments the device is a single device including a combination of an aggregator, a filter and a gateway. Such a combination can be more practical, affordable and efficient than the usual arrangement of a several separate devices. In other embodiments, the device of the present invention can be a combination of a switch and a gateway. In yet other embodiments other types of devices can be used. More generally, embodiments of the present invention can apply to a device or method for processing communications involving a set of two network protocols (first and second protocols) as well as a third protocol, the third protocol being compatible with the first protocol and used to define how to tunnel the second protocol over the first protocol.03-11-2010
20100284415BRIDGES AND COMPUTING DEVICES WITH BRIDGES - The present invention may be related to a bridge for communications in a data communication system. The bridge may include a first interface, a second interface, a memory and a micro control unit. The first interface may be adapted to couple with a first computing device in the data communication system. The second interface may be adapted to couple with a second computing device in the data communication system. The memory may be adapted to store a set of codes sent from the first computing device via the first interface, wherein the set of codes is related to one of at least one function device of the first computing device. Moreover, the micro control unit may be configured to execute the set of codes for generating device information in a format consistent with a protocol type of the second interface. The device information may include parameters related to the one function device.11-11-2010
20080247400SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INCREASING THE EFFICIENCY IN THE DELIVERY OF MEDIA WITHIN A NETWORK - The present invention is directed to providing a system and method for using pre-established sub-networks within a larger network to improve the efficiency of transmitting media. Specifically, the current invention eliminates the need to re transmit a particular medium from its source to a sub-network. In using pre-established sub-networks, the present invention avoids the capital outlay that would be necessary to set up an infrastructure for new sub-networks.10-09-2008
20090003361Multi-protocol controller that supports PCle, SAS and enhanced ethernet - SAS over Enhanced Ethernet (SOE) controllers that integrate SAS and Enhanced Ethernet to perform a conversion between SAS and Enhanced Ethernet are disclosed. A central intelligence block can be employed to perform the mapping between SAS and Enhanced Ethernet. The SOE controller can include one or more Enhanced Ethernet Interfaces, one or more SAS interfaces, and a PCIe interface. The SOE controller can direct the I/O requests presented on one interface to another interface after performing some basic operations on the I/O requests, including protocol conversion. The SOE controller can include an intelligence mechanism for identifying the appropriate output ports for routing the I/O requests and redirecting them accordingly. In the case of routing I/O requests over Enhanced Ethernet, the SOE controller can perform SAS protocol conversion to map outgoing I/O requests into Enhanced Ethernet frames suitable for transmission over the Enhanced Ethernet network.01-01-2009
20090003359Selecting a Visited Bearer Manager (VBM) - In one embodiment, a method includes, generating a first value at an Internet Protocol gateway (IPGW) corresponding to an identifier (ID) of an access terminal (AT). The method further includes identifying a first one of a plurality of visited bearer managers (VBMs) based on a correlation between the first value and a first Internet Protocol (IP) address of the first VBM and determining usability of the first VBM for the AT, the determination of the usability of the first VBM taking into account dynamic conditions at the first VBM. If the first VBM is usable for the AT, connection is allowed between the AT and the first VBM. If the first VBM is unusable for the AT, a second value corresponding to a modification of the ID is generated and a second one of the VBMs is identified.01-01-2009
20100128734POLYPHASE ROTATING-ACCESS SWITCH - A polyphase rotating-access switch consists of a set of latent space switches connecting a set of ingress switch modules to a set of egress switch modules. Each latent space switch has a primary rotator connecting each ingress switch module to each transit memory device of a bank of transit memory devices during a rotation period and a secondary rotator connecting each transit memory device to each egress switch module during the rotation period. Each latent space switch provides paths from each ingress switch module to all egress switch modules characterized by switching delays having values between zero and a rotation period. For each pair of ingress and egress switch modules, the set of latent space switches provides paths of different delays having values between zero and a rotation period. Thus, a connection from an ingress switch module to egress switch module may select an available path of least switching delay.05-27-2010
20080240132Teredo connectivity between clients behind symmetric NATs - Methods and systems for communicating between Teredo clients behind symmetric or restricted Network Address Translators.10-02-2008
20090168787Method and Apparatus for Rapid Session Routing - A gateway device at a user premises edge of a wide area network implements a method for rapidly routing a media session. for an application layer service. The gateway device receivers a request from a first endpoint device to create the media session with a second device. The request includes an application layer identifier for the second device. The method involves accessing a routing table within the gateway device using the application layer identifier and obtaining, from the internal routing table a network layer address for communication with the second device. The gateway device then creates a route for the media session for the application layer service via bi-directional network layer communications through at least one of its interfaces using the network layer address.07-02-2009
20080279201METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR SOURCE-AWARE IP ROUTING AT A MEDIA GATEWAY - The subject matter described herein includes methods, systems, and computer program products for source-aware IP routing at a media gateway. According to one aspect, a method for source-aware IP routing at a media gateway is provided. The method includes providing a packet including a layer 11-13-2008
20080279200User Sensitive Filtering of Network Application Layer Resources - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving authorization data at a local node of a network. The authorization data indicates a particular network address of a different node in the network and an authenticated user ID of a user of the different node. Resource profile data is retrieved based on the user ID. The resource profile data indicates all application layer resources on the network that the user is allowed to access. The particular network address is associated at the local node with the resource profile data for the user. A request from the particular network address for a requested application layer resource on the network is blocked based on the resource profile data associated with the particular network address.11-13-2008
20080285574METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROXY A/V BRIDGING ON AN ETHERNET SWITCH - Aspects of a system for proxy AN bridging on an Ethernet switch may include an AV switch enables reception of incoming PDUs from a legacy device via an AV block network, wherein each incoming PDU contains an AV stream identifier (which consists of a destination address and may also consist of a traffic class designation and/or higher level protocol identifiers). The destination address may identify a destination AV device within the AV block network. The AV switch may enable generation of outgoing PDUs by inserting or modifying a corresponding traffic class designation within each of the incoming PDUs. The AV switch may enable transmission using a specific traffic shaping process of each of the outgoing PDUs to a destination AV device within the AV block network based on the AV stream identifier and corresponding QoS parameters.11-20-2008
20080285572SINGLE DEVICE FOR HANDLING CLIENT SIDE AND SERVER SIDE OPERATIONS FOR A/V BRIDGING AND A/V BRIDGING EXTENSIONS - Aspects of a single device for handling server side operations for A/V bridging and A/V bridging extensions may include a single IC device that is configured to enable encapsulation of generated digital video data within an encapsulating PDU. The single IC device may enable determination of a traffic class designation associated with the encapsulating PDU. The single IC device may enable transmission of the encapsulating PDU via a network based on the traffic class designation. Aspects of a single device for handling client side operations may include a single IC device that is configured to enable extraction of received digital video that is encapsulated within an encapsulating PDU. The encapsulating PDU may be received via a network at a destination device. The single IC device may enable transmission of the received digital video data to a multimedia monitor coupled to the destination device via an interface connector.11-20-2008
20080291930Handling Quality of Service in a Communication System - A method of ensuring an end-to-end Quality of Service for calls traversing an IP Multimedia Subsystem. The method comprises interposing a Home IP Multimedia Subsystem Gateway at the control plane between the IP Multimedia Subsystem and at least one non-SIP client. At the Home IP Multimedia Subsystem Gateway, SIP signalling is exchanged with a remote client on behalf of said non-SIP client, the Gateway performing a mapping between a media type identified within the SDP part of one or more SIP messages and a Quality of Service type specified for a protocol used to control the Quality of Service in the call leg between the non-SIP client and a Residential Gateway. The call leg is configured in accordance with the mapped Quality of Service type.11-27-2008
20080291931SYSTEM FOR BROADCASTING BETWEEN SUBNETWORKS CONNECTED VIA A ROUTER - The present invention allows the contents of network-wide broadcast in a first subnetwork to be passed to a second subnetwork even if a router is set to prevent the network-wide broadcast in the first subnetwork from going out of the first subnetwork. In response to the network-wide broadcast in the first subnetwork, a first broadcast relay generates a packet in which a destination address of the network-wide broadcast packet is changed to an address of a second broadcast relay belonging to a second subnetwork, and outputs the address changed packet to the first subnetwork. The second broadcast relay generates, in response to the packet addressed thereto, a second subnetwork-only broadcast as a local broadcast, and outputs it to the second subnetwork. A server of the second subnetwork performs a predetermined process on the broadcast outputted by the second broadcast relay.11-27-2008
20100034209COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND HOME GATEWAY - Even when a site of the Internet is used, switching is automatically performed to a connection via NGN, and a service via the NGN is provided to a user terminal. A HGW transmits a request from the user terminal in accordance with a destination address to a redirect server and a service provider server through one of an IP network and an NGN network. The redirect server redirects access to the service provider server via the IP network to access via the NGN network. The user terminal accesses one of communication devices of the service provider server through the IP network, and communication with the service provider server is performed through the NGN network based on address information of a redirect destination from the redirect server.02-11-2010
20080304500Architecture of Gateway Between a Home Network and an External Network - A Home Gateway (HGW) interconnects a Home Network (HN) and an External Network (EN), and is adapted to communicate with the HN and EN at a Network layer. HGW is provided with a Service Application Programming Interface Layer (SAPI Layer) capable of performing, at an Application layer, mediator functions for supporting communication and services between the HN and EN. Devices of the HN are able to communicate with devices of EN via the HGW, and to actualize services via the HGW.12-11-2008
20080310431METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC DISCOVERY OF A TRANSACTION GATEWAY DAEMON OF SPECIFIED TYPE - A method is provided in a system wherein a transaction gateway daemon of a specified type is connected between first and second spatially separated servers, in order to integrate applications running on the first server with operation of the second server. The method automatically determines whether a detected address space is or is not a transaction gateway daemon of the specified type, such as a CICS transaction gateway, and includes the step of verifying that the detected address space is an Open multiple virtual storage (MVS) type of address space. The method further comprises carrying out a first set of tests pertaining to specified additional characteristics of the detected address space, and verifying that a program of the detected address space is running in a Language Environment. A second set of tests are also carried out, that are respectively associated with dubbing a task on the address space to Open MVS.12-18-2008
20080205414CALL REROUTING - A device and method for rerouting a communication from a first communication device to a second communication device includes a rerouting circuit. The rerouting circuit is operative to reroute a communication intended for the first communication device to the second communication device. Rerouting of the communication may be initiated by sending a rerouting request from the device not intended to receive the communication.08-28-2008
20090323706Dynamic Networking of Virtual Machines - The invention is directed to the use of Provider Backbone Bridging (PBB) technology with Shortest Path Bridging, also called Provider Link State Bridging (PLSB) technology in the context of data centers and virtualized physical servers infrastructures. Virtual servers can be located anywhere inside the data center, or across different data centers, and still act as though they are physically adjacent and share the same Ethernet connectivity. Ethernet virtual machine VLan memberships are mapped to PBB Service Identifiers (I-SIDs). PBB I-SIDs extend the connectivity model to every Ethernet switches in the local, metropolitan or wide area networks. PLSB complements the connectivity by providing dynamic distribution and mapping of I-SID endpoints in the PBB domain. Virtual servers can then be added, removed or transferred to another point in the network and PLSB adjusts the VLan/I-SID specific connectivity pattern to match the physical distribution of the servers.12-31-2009
20080298379FULL MESH STATUS MONITOR - A method for verifying full mesh status in a network is disclosed. The network includes endpoint entities in full mesh configuration. The method includes a step of maintaining a first value in the endpoint entities. The first value is related to counting of network endpoint entities. Another step in the method is maintaining a second value in the endpoint entities. The second value is related to counting non-operational transmission paths before a point in time. An additional step in the method is discovering an additional value related to counting non-operational transmission paths after the point in time. Yet another step in the method is comparing the additional value with the first value and the second value.12-04-2008
20080240128VoIP Security - A network switch automatically detects Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) traffic and mirrors the VoIP traffic to a security management device. The security management device measures a rate of call setup packets in the VoIP traffic. The security management device detects an attack based on a comparison of the measured rate of call setup packets to a threshold rate. Detected attacks are mitigated.10-02-2008
20080310432AUTONEGOTIATION OVER AN INTERFACE FOR WHICH NO AUTONEGOTIATION STANDARD EXISTS - A method for enabling autonegotiation over an interface for which no autonegotiation standard exists comprises establishing network communication between a first network device and a second network device over a communication link. The first network device includes a first media access controller (MAC) associated with a communication port coupled to the communication link and a second MAC positioned between the first MAC and the communication port, and the second MAC operates as a proxy MAC for the first MAC. The first MAC outputs an outbound data communication to the communication port at a first communication rate. The proxy MAC intercepts the outbound data communication. The proxy MAC then outputs the outbound data communication to the communication port at a second communication rate different from the first communication rate.12-18-2008
20080247404TELEPHONE SYSTEM AND GATEWAY DEVICE - According to one embodiment, a gateway connects a plurality of telephones to a packet network including a server processes calls using address information, includes a registration processor requires registrations of a plurality of items of address information to be used for call origination to packet network, a table records the plurality of items of address information and results of registrations for each item of address information in packet network, a selection processor confirms the results of the registrations of the address information included in the notified request message from a transmitting origin telephone by referring to the table and selects another item of address information if the relevant address information has not been registered, and a call controller sends a message including address information if the address information included in the request message has been registered, and otherwise, including another information selected from the selection processor to the server.10-09-2008
20110007747Internet Protocol Trace Back Using Dynamic Reconfigurable Logic Hardware - Implementations of a dynamic reconfigurable hardware in an IP Trace Back system are described.01-13-2011
20110007750SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATING WITH A SINGLE MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE HAVING MULTIPLE MS-ISDN IDENTIFIERS - A communication system (01-13-2011
20110007749Method and Apparatus for Advertising Border Connection Information of Autonomous System - A method and an apparatus for advertising border connection information of autonomous system are disclosed. Moreover, the method includes: establishing and maintaining, by a border node of the autonomous system, the border connection information of the autonomous system; flooding the border connection information within the autonomous system; and receiving, by nodes of the autonomous system, the border connection information. The method and the apparatus for advertising border connection information of autonomous system of embodiments of the present invention may adapt to dynamic change of network topology, and dynamically advertise the border connection information of the autonomous system within the system in time, so as to optimize networks and improve quality of service of the networks.01-13-2011
20090190602METHOD FOR DETECTING GATEWAY IN PRIVATE NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR EXECUTING THE METHOD - Disclosed are a method and apparatus for detecting a gateway in a private network. A gateway detection method includes verifying whether a connectable state exists with respect to at least two Internet environments and detecting a driving of a gateway for connection between a private network and an external network in response to verifying the connectable state with respect to the at least two Internet environments.07-30-2009
20080247405APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SWITCH ZONING - An apparatus for assigning a device to a network zone comprises a switch component operable to receive an attachment request, port and device name data and device operating characteristics data from the device; and a rules engine operable to acquire the device operating characteristics data from the switch component; the rules engine being operable to apply rules logic to the device operating characteristics data to select a zone for the device. The rules engine may be further operable to apply the rules logic to the port and device name data. The network zone may be a network zone of a fibre channel network.10-09-2008
20130215903DUAL COMMUNICATION-INTERFACE FACILITY MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD - A dual communication-interface facility monitoring and management system, the system including a multiplicity of facility monitoring\management devices, the devices including at least one of at least one facility monitoring sensor and at least one facility management device, the facility monitoring sensors being operative to monitor at least a part of a facility, the facility management devices being operative to manage at last part of the facility, a facility communication gateway operative to facilitate electronic communication between a local area network (LAN) associated with the facility and an a wide area network (WAN) external to the facility, and a dual communication-interface facility monitoring and management subsystem operative to communicate with each of the multiplicity of devices via at least one of a first multiplicity of communication protocols and to communicate with the facility communication gateway via at least one of a second multiplicity of communication protocols.08-22-2013
20090310617Data Distribution by Proxy - A communication device communicates with an originating device during an originating session and receives originating data from the originating device over a wireless communication link and then communicates with a receiving device during a receiving session and sends the originating data to the receiving device over a wireless communication link, such that the originating session and the receiving session occur at different times, and at least one of the sessions is an ad hoc communication session.12-17-2009
20100142543METHODS AND APPARATUS TO ANALYZE AUTONOMOUS SYSTEM PEERING POLICIES - Methods and apparatus to analyze autonomous system (AS) peering policies are disclosed. A disclosed example method comprises obtaining routing information from two or more border routers of a first AS, wherein the routing information identifies two or more routes to a prefix associated with a second AS, and wherein the second AS is a peer of the first AS, identifying one of the two or more routes as an inferior route advertised by the second AS based on the routing information, and determining whether a routing impact is present within the first AS due to the advertised inferior route.06-10-2010
20100142544DATA CENTER NETWORK DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus (“utility”) for facilitating connection of rack-mounted data devices (06-10-2010
20080267195Network Systems and Methods for Providing Guest Access - The present disclosure generally pertains to routers for providing guest access to networks. An integrated router in one exemplary embodiment comprises at least one local area network (LAN) interface, memory, and routing logic. The memory is configured to store security data. The routing logic is configured to enable a first LAN and to authenticate a user for accessing the first LAN based on the security data. The routing logic is configured to enable a second LAN in response to user input and to automatically disable the second LAN upon expiration of a specified time period. The routing logic is further configured to route messages communicated between a device of the second LAN and a wide area network (WAN) and to route messages through the first LAN.10-30-2008
20090154479APPARATUS FOR MATCHING GIGABIT ETHERNET (GbE) SIGNALS WITH OPTICAL TRANSPORT HIERARCHY (OTH) - Provided is an apparatus for matching Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) signals to an Optical Transport Hierarchy (OTH). The apparatus real-time records a source address and input port information of GbE Ethernet frames in a memory, compares a destination address of the Ethernet frame which is a payload of a GFP frame with memory table information, searches an output port location of the GbE, and interreceives GbE frames and Generic Frame Procedure (GFP) frames by multiplexing/demultiplexing.06-18-2009
20090190603IMS Service Proxy In HIGA - The present invention relates to a communication system (SYS), a gateway apparatus (HiGA) and a method for allowing services of a first type provided by a communication server (IMS-S) to be provided to terminal devices (T07-30-2009
20090190601VIRTUAL WEB SERVICE - An improved solution for Web services is provided. In an embodiment of the invention, a method for providing a virtual Web service includes: providing a Web service gatekeeper, where the gatekeeper acts as an access point to multiple private internal enterprise environments; and then the gatekeeper receives a request for access to one, or more, of these private internal enterprise environments.07-30-2009
20080240124SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DEPLOYING COMMUNICATION SERVICES - A system and method for deploying communication services is disclosed. A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a cross-connect system having an Ethernet switch coupled to a central office and coupled to a plurality of buildings by way of a plurality of digital subscriber line (DSL) ports, and a worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) transceiver coupled to a high speed port of the Ethernet switch. The WiMAX transceiver can be used to augment a limited capacity of at least one of the plurality of DSL ports by distributing a portion of services carried by the at least one DSL port to the WiMAX transceiver. Accordingly, the cross-connect system can supply dual-mode communications. Additional embodiments are disclosed.10-02-2008
20080240121Method for Fast Converging End-to End Services and Provider Edge Equipment Thereof - A method for fast converging an end-to-end service and a Provider Edge (PE) includes: setting routing information of at least two tunnels in a double-ascription PE of a remote Customer Edge (CE), wherein, the two tunnels are from the double-ascription PE of the remote CE to the PE connected with the remote CE; detecting tunnel states to obtain state information of the tunnels; the double-ascription PE obtaining available routing information and routing information of the at least two tunnels, and forwarding the service according to the available routing information. The double-ascription PE of the remote CE can directly forward the service according to the pre-configured routing information of other tunnels when the current tunnel is unavailable, such as a terminal node of the current tunnel is abnormal, thereby avoids the procedure of re-selecting the route, and increases the end-to-end service convergence speed and improves the service reliability.10-02-2008
20080240123METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATING H.263 MACROBLOCK BOUNDARIES USING H.221 BAS FOR RFC2190-COMPLIANT FRAGMENTATION - A method includes receiving a Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) packet at a first gateway and translating the RTP packet into a H.221 frame. The H.221 frame includes a H.263-compressed video bitstream. The H.221 frame may also include a H.221 Bit-Rate Allocation Signal (BAS) message to communicate RFC2190-compliant fragmentation boundary information containing Macroblock (MB) boundary to a second gateway, if there is no picture start code (PSC) or Group of Block start code (GBSC) at a start portion of the RTP packet. The method further includes transmitting the H.221 frame from the first gateway to the second gateway; and fragmenting the H.263 video bitstream contained in the H.221 frame at a PSC, a GBSC, or a Macroblock (MB) boundary contained in the H.221 BAS fragmentation message.10-02-2008
20080240127METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BUFFER LINKING IN BRIDGED NETWORKS - A computer implemented method and apparatus are provided for transferring data in a logical partitioned data processing system. A receiving adapter receives data from a network. The receiving adapter transfers the data to a pre-mapped buffer if the data is to be sent to a target adapter. A virtual bridge receives the pre-mapped buffer from the receiving adapter and transfers the pre-mapped buffer to the target adapter. The target adapter receives the pre-mapped buffer from the virtual bridge and determines that the received buffer is pre-mapped. The target adapter accesses the pre-mapped buffer using pre-mapped mapping, and transmits the data contained therein.10-02-2008
20090154478Scalable Ethernet OAM Connectivity Check in an Access Network - An access node (e.g., Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer) and a method are described herein that proactively monitor the connectivity of one or more end devices (e.g., residential gateways). In one embodiment, the access node performs the following: (a) receives continuity check messages from at least one of the end devices; (b) polls the received continuity check messages to ascertain the connectivity of each end device; and (c) if at least one continuity check message is detected as missing from one of the end devices during the polling step, then an alarm message is sent indicating a loss of connectivity to the one end device. Thereafter, an edge router (e.g., Broadband Network Gateway) would receive the alarm message and know there is no longer a connection to the one end device.06-18-2009
20090041037Border Router with Selective Filtering of Link State Advertisements - An example embodiment of the present invention provides a process relating to the selective filtering of an LSA at a not-so-stubby-sub-area (NSSSA) border router. In one embodiment, the border router receives an LSA from another router inside the NSSSA, which might be in the access layer of the hierarchical network design model and which might use OSPF as its IGP. If the LSA is Type 1 and includes a subnet route or forwarder address, the border router floods it to its neighboring routers, regardless of whether they are inside the NSSSA. If the LSA is Type 7 and includes a host address, the border router floods it to a neighboring router if the neighboring router is inside the NSSSA, but filters the LSA if the neighboring router is outside the NSSSA, for example, in an OSPF area in the distribution layer of the hierarchical network design model.02-12-2009
20090161683Communication method in a network comprising a primary network and a secondary network - Communication method between a primary network (06-25-2009
20090161681SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR CONNECTIONS USING AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHED OPTICAL NETWORK CONTROL PLANES - Systems and methods for connections on an Automatically Switched Optical Network (ASON) network including an ASON database and path computation algorithm, mechanisms for Ethernet connections over ASON, and mechanisms for label negotiation for SNCs are provided. Advantageously, the present invention provides mechanisms for ASON path computation and virtual topology management, Ethernet connection establishment, modification, and deletion in ASON networks, and label negotiation without requiring binding and releasing of connections before label negotiation.06-25-2009
20090161682Managing Bandwidth during a Contention Free Period in a LAN - Bandwidth for a contention free period in a LAN is managed using an access control list. A request for bandwidth during the contention free period is received. A determination is made as to whether to grant the request for bandwidth based on the access control list.06-25-2009
20110268127Unsolicited FIP Packet Injection by Proxy and Spoofing and Autoconfiguring Intermediate Bridges using FIP Snooping - Methods and apparatus are provided for injecting Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) discovery packets, such as FCoE Initialization Protocol (FIP) or Data Center Bridge Exchange (DCBX) Protocol packets, by proxy or by spoofing into data center networks supporting FCoE in certain switchover, In-Service Software Upgrade (ISSU), and error scenarios. The transmission by proxy or by spoofing may occur at an intermediate FIP snooping bridge for communicating between FCoE devices. In this manner, the robustness of an FCoE path from one end of the data center network to another may be increased.11-03-2011
20090129398STACKABLE ROUTERS EMPLOYING A ROUTING PROTOCOL - A stack of network routers is composed of at least one (elected) master unit and one or more slave units each capable of running a routing protocol. Only the master unit runs the entire routing protocol at a given time. It forwards direct update messages via a transmission control protocol to each of the slave units. These direct update messages may include specific packet formats for the protocol state machinery where such machinery is required by the routing protocol, e.g., the interface state machine and the neighbor state machine for the OSPF protocol, and for the net databases, e.g. the link state databases for the OSPF protocol, in each of the slave units. Each slave unit may run its protocol state machinery (where provided) based purely on the direct update messages received from the master. The synchronisation of the net databases may be based on snooping net update packets and a comparison of the information received thereby with verification data messages sent from the master unit. The synchronization allows the running of the routing protocol on multiple physical routers in a stack without requiring the overhead of a back-up unit that would not perform routing unless a master router unit became unavailable.05-21-2009
20120069851Methods and apparatus for enabling communication between network elements that operate at different bit rates - An apparatus and method for transmitting electronic data between two networks communicating at different bit rates, where the bit rate of the faster network divided by the bit rate of the slower network is a non-integer. The two networks communicate with each other through a set of lanes each communicating at a bit rate that is a common denominator of the bit rates for the two networks. The lanes communicate with two sets of transceivers, one set of the transceivers communicates with the faster network at the faster bit rate and the other (larger) set of transceivers communicates with the slower network at the slower bit rate. Each transceiver is structured so that the total bit rate of the lanes communicating with that transceiver is equal to the bit rate of the network on which the transceiver operates.03-22-2012
20090147794METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SERVING MULTI-MEDIA DATA BETWEEN HETERO UPnP NETWORKS - Provided is a method and system for streaming multimedia data between hetero UPnP networks configured of a private network. The method comprises establishing a communication channel with a relay peer; establishing a virtual communication channel with a specific extensible home connector selected from a plurality of extensible home connectors connected with the relay peer; searching multimedia data to play from multimedia data in the specific extensible home connector which exists on the UPnP network through the virtual communication channel; establishing a communication environment through the UPnP internet gateway of the specific extensible home connector in case of demanding play of the searched multimedia data; and receiving multimedia data from the specific extensible home connector through the communication environment.06-11-2009
20090185572RELAY APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR NOTIFYING INFORMATION - A relay apparatus connected to a first network and configured to construct a connection between the first network and another network so that a communication packet can be transmitted between the first network and the another network includes a relay unit configured to relay communication data received from a communication apparatus on the first network to a communication apparatus on the another network via the connection, an acquisition unit configured to acquire information corresponding to a data length of a communication packet that can be transmitted via the connection without being divided according to a change of connection status of the another network, and a notification unit configured to notify the information acquired by the acquisition unit to the communication apparatus on the first network.07-23-2009
20080317053LOAD-BALANCED NSAPI ALLOCATION FOR iWLAN - In one embodiment, a load balancer receives a message from a tunnel termination gateway (TTG) associated with a mobile device. The load balancer may receive messages from a plurality of TTGs. A gateway node in a plurality of gateway nodes in which to send the message is determined. The load balancer then assigns a NSAPI for use by the gateway node. For example, the NSAPI may be associated with a tunnel that is generated between the TTG and GGSN. The load balancer ensures that the assigned NSAPI is not currently in use at the gateway node. Thus, no overlapping of NSAPIs may occur even though the load balancer is processing messages from multiple TTGs for multiple gateway nodes.12-25-2008
20080317054SERVICE GATEWAY, SERVING SYSTEM, QoS NEGOTIATION METHOD AND SERVING RECOURSE RELEASE METHOD - Embodiments of the present invention provide a service gateway, comprising a service session detection unit adapted to detect a service session request and the end of a service session. The service gateway further comprises a QoS negotiation unit, adapted to acquire quality of service (QoS) information of a service session after the service session request is detected by the service session detection unit, request corresponding service serving network resource according to the QoS information, and trigger to release the service serving network resource when the end of the service session is detected by the service session detection unit. In addition, the embodiments of the present invention also disclose a corresponding service serving system, QoS negotiation and service serving network resource release method. The present invention could implement a QoS request process without the participation of a terminal. Embodiments of the present invention are conveniently to be deployed and implemented, and the peer-to-peer QoS can be quickly deployed and implemented without changing the current network service server.12-25-2008
20080317049Method and System for Assigning Routers to Hosts - A system and method in an IP-based network for defining a specific router for a host to utilize as a default router. The host is configured with a plurality of preferred correlation values, each of which has a different corresponding preference level. Routers send Router Advertisement (RA) messages to the host and include at least one router correlation value and at least one corresponding priority value. The host compares the received router correlation values with its preferred correlation values and identifies the router that sent the router correlation value that matched the preferred correlation value having the highest corresponding preference level. The identified router is selected as the host's default router. If more than one router matches the preferred correlation value having the highest corresponding preference level, the router that sent the highest priority value is selected.12-25-2008
20080317048METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING OF NETWORK ADDRESSES - Methods and apparatuses for a management console to configure a router and one or more servers to route and bind network addresses respectively are described herein. In various embodiments, the management console may configure one or more servers of one or more local area networks, each of the one or more servers coupled to the management console, to route one or more network addresses to a router remotely disposed from the one or more servers, the routing to be through one or more networking tunnels through one or more networks correspondingly coupling the one or more servers to the router communicatively. Also, in some embodiments, the management console may configure the router to route the one or more network addresses to at least one recipient server coupled to the router for binding to the at least one recipient server, the at least one recipient server being also remotely disposed from the one or more servers.12-25-2008
20080317047METHOD FOR DISCOVERING A ROUTE TO A PEER NODE IN A MULTI-HOP WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A method is provided for a particular multi-radio meshed node to discover a route to a peer multi-radio meshed node in a wireless multi-hop network including a plurality of multi-radio meshed nodes. Each of the multi-radio meshed nodes each includes a plurality of radio modules, and each radio module comprises an interface. The particular multi-radio meshed node transmits route request (RREQ) messages from each interface of a particular multi-radio meshed node. When a particular recipient multi-radio meshed node receives at least one of the route request (RREQ) messages, it generates a reverse route to the particular multi-radio meshed node. A peer-to-peer route is established when the particular multi-radio meshed node receives a route reply (RREP) message and can then be used to forward traffic to and from the destination node.12-25-2008
20080317050Hybrid Tree/Mesh Overlay for Data Delivery - Hybrid tree/mesh overlays for data delivery involve using a tree overlay network and a mesh overlay network to delivery a data stream via a push mechanism and a pull mechanism, respectively. In an example embodiment, a network node enters a mesh overlay network and attaches to a tree overlay network. In operation, the network node receives data blocks of a data stream over the tree overlay network via a push mechanism. The network node ascertains if a data block is not received over the tree overlay network. If a data block is missing, the network node retrieves the missing data block over the mesh overlay network via a pull mechanism. In another example embodiment, the tree overlay network includes a subset of nodes forming a tree-based backbone. Network nodes that are identified as being stable may join the backbone and provide the data stream to other nodes.12-25-2008
20080317055SHARED RISK GROUP HANDLING WITHIN A MEDIA GATEWAY - A media gateway controller (MGC) is described herein that implements a shared risk group package to control and prevent a media gateway (MG) from establishing redundant links like a primary link and a secondary link that use resources that share the same risk of failure. Essentially, the MGC uses the shared risk group package to control which resources like ephemeral terminations are used by the MG to establish the primary link and the secondary link such that if any of the resources associated with the primary link fail then the secondary link remains operational within the MG and if any of the resources associated with the secondary link fail then the primary link remains operational within the MG.12-25-2008
20080317051Methods and System for Highly Ordered Transaction Processing - Improved techniques are disclosed for processing transactions or requests in a data processing system. For example, a method for processing requests in a system including a plurality of nodes includes the following steps. At least two nodes of the plurality of nodes receive a plurality of requests. The two nodes exchange information to determine an order for processing requests. The two nodes process the requests in accordance with the order. The order may include a total order or a partial order.12-25-2008
20090052460METHOD OF UPDATING CORE DOMAIN INFORMATION FOR ROUTING A SERVICE, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - A method of updating core domain information for use by a communication device (02-26-2009
20090141729MULTIPLEX METHOD OF VLAN SWITCHING TUNNEL AND VLAN SWITCHING SYSTEM - A multiplex method of a virtual local area network (VLAN) switching (VS) tunnel includes the following steps. An ingress edge node of the VS tunnel maps a received customer data unit onto one virtual channel (VC) borne by the VS tunnel, and encapsulates the customer data unit into a VS tunnel Ethernet frame including a VS tag, a VC tag, and the customer data unit. The VC tag identifies the different VCs borne by the VS tunnel. An intermediate node of the VS tunnel switches the VS tunnel Ethernet frame according to the VS tag, and transports the customer data unit and the VC tag transparently in the VS tunnel. An egress edge node of the VS tunnel terminates the VS tunnel and the VC, recovers the customer data unit, and forwards the data according to the VC tag.06-04-2009
20110222551METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSPARENT LAN SERVICES IN A PACKET NETWORK - A network apparatus includes a customer network portion having a customer premises equipment (CPE) bridge configured to connect to internal network entities of the customer network portion and to edge bridges of a provider network portion interconnecting separate customer network portions. The CPE bridge is configured to determine a transparent local area network service (TLS) for a packet received from one of the internal network entities based on a media access control (MAC) address of a destination of the packet in a different separate customer network portion. The CPE bridge is also configured to modify the packet to indicate the determined TLS, for the provider network portion to utilize to transmit the packet based on the determined TLS to a second CPE bridge associated with the destination, without the provider network utilizing the destination MAC address.09-15-2011
20090080446Mechanism for efficient endpoint discriminator allocation for APS protected MLPPP bundles on distributed routing systems - A mechanism and method for efficient endpoint discriminator allocation for APS protected MLPPP bundles on distributed routing systems, including one or more of the following: specifying working and protection MLPPP bundles; retrieving an endpoint discriminator for the working bundle and updating an endpoint discriminator of the protection bundle based on same; specifying MLPPP operating parameters for the bundles; associating the bundles with an APS circuit; adding links and corresponding discriminators in an LCP between a near end bundle and a far end bundle; bringing up an MLPPP session; and adding links between bundles upon an APS switchover.03-26-2009
20090080443SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REMOTELY ADMINISTERING AND SYNCHRONIZING A CLUSTERED GROUP OF ACCESS CONTROL PANELS - The present invention advantageously provides a system and method for remotely administering and synchronizing a clustered group of access control nodes using a gateway node. A device, such as a network browser, submits an update for one node of the cluster of nodes to a web server in the gateway node. The web server transmits, via a communication interface in the gateway node, the submitted update to the node configuration database of the appropriate node while the gateway updates its configuration database in accordance with the submitted update. In another embodiment, the device is a dedicated host computer. The data can be transmitted in accordance with a binary access protocol.03-26-2009
20080304499GATEWAY DEVICE, NETWORK SYSTEM AND DATA CONVERTING METHOD APPLIED TO VEHICLE USING PLURALITY OF NETWORK PROTOCOL DIFFERENT FROM EACH OTHER - The present invention relates to a gateway device, a network system and a data converting method using a plurality of network protocols different from each other. A gateway device includes a first communication controller connected to first device via a first bus in accordance with a first network protocol to exchange data with the first device in accordance with the first network protocol, a second communication controller connected to second device via a second bus in accordance with a second network protocol different from the first network protocol to exchange the data with the second device in accordance with the second network protocol, and a control unit interconverting the data in accordance with the first network protocol and the data in accordance with the second network protocol into each other so that the data is exchanged between the first device and the second device.12-11-2008
20090041044 METHOD OR APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING ROUTING INFORMATION IN NETWORKS - A method and apparatus is disclosed for distributing routing information between nodes in networks in which routing parameters from subnets are carried in the internal gateway protocol for use in routing decisions in an external gateway protocol.02-12-2009
20110142062iSCSI to FCoE Gateway - Transparent communication between iSCSI and FCoE end nodes is provided by a gateway device having iSCSI and FCoE network interfaces. The gateway allows end nodes of one protocol to communicate with end nodes of another protocol as if they were communicating with end nodes of the same protocol. The gateway accomplishes this by creating “ghost” end nodes for each protocol. For example, the gateway creates ghost iSCSI nodes corresponding to physical FCoE nodes, and ghost FCoE nodes corresponding to physical iSCSI nodes. A ghost end node of a particular protocol is able to communicate with native end nodes of that protocol as if it were a native end node, because the gateway translates packets sent from end nodes in their native protocol into the other protocol for receipt by corresponding ghost nodes, and vice versa.06-16-2011
20110142059REMOTE CONTROL VIA LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method and system for remote control of multimedia content using a multimedia content distribution network (MCDN) is configured to establish a connection between a customer premises equipment (CPE) gateway and a local area network (LAN) device that is a personal user device. A user of the LAN device may be authenticated. Responsive to user input, the LAN device may send remote control messages corresponding to remote control functions for an MCDN terminal device. The CPE gateway may determine a network address for the MCDN terminal device, and forward the remote control messages to the addressed MCDN terminal device. The LAN device may so remotely control the addressed MCDN terminal device.06-16-2011
20110222549Home Gateway Expansion - As described herein, a gateway device may include one or more expansion ports to add functionality. The added functionality can be of any desired type, such as adding telephone call routing capabilities, or high-definition radio capabilities. The added functionality can include new wireless communication abilities, such as adding Bluetooth capability, and the combination may allow greater networked communication.09-15-2011
20090080448MEDIA STREAMING DEVICE WITH GATEWAY FUNCTIONALITY - Various methods and devices provide place shifting of a media stream to a remote device while also providing network functionality for a local area network (LAN) and/or a wide area network (WAN). The gateway includes a media interface for receiving audio/visual (A/V) signals from the media source, as well as interfaces to the LAN and/or the WAN. A media streaming module receives the A/V signals from the media interface and processes the received A/V signals to thereby create the media stream. A modem module receives the media stream from the media streaming module via a dedicated connection, network switch and/or other connection, and transmits the media stream to the remote device via at least one of the first and second network interfaces.03-26-2009
20090080445SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MESSAGE RETRY IN A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A system and method for message retry in a broadband gateway comprising a receiver to receive one or more messages, a module to create an interface watch in the event one or more communications for processing the one or more messages cannot be established with one or more interfacing systems, and a terminator to terminate the processing of the one or more messages as a message processing safeguard during provisioning and activation of broadband DSL service to customers.03-26-2009
20090080444SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MESSAGE PROCESSING IN A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A system and method for message processing in a broadband gateway comprising at least one receiver to receive one or more inbound messages, wherein the one or more inbound messages correspond to one or more senders, at least one module to process the one or more messages and to provide broadband network service to the one or more senders, and at least one transmitter to transmit one or more outbound messages to the one or more senders, where the system provides a decoupled processing architecture.03-26-2009
20110228790Conditional Execution of Commands - Method for controlling terminations of a media gateway, wherein a command from a media gateway controller is received containing a condition under which the command is executed. After having identified the terminations addressed by the command, it is verified whether the condition is met, and if the condition is met, the command is executed.09-22-2011
20130121339SPLITTING AND SHARING ROUTING INFORMATION AMONG SEVERAL ROUTERS ACTING AS A SINGLE BORDER ROUTER - Routers split and share routing information among several routers within a group of routers acting as a single border router in an Internet protocol (IP) network, each router comprising a routing table. A router of the group selects routes in the routing table of the router; requests other routers of the group to replace, in their routing tables, each selected route with the router as next hop; associates parts of-non selected routes, each one with another router of the group; and removes and replaces, in the routing table, each-non selected route associated with a router of the group by the associated router as next hop.05-16-2013
20110142057Interfacing Real and Virtual Networks in Hardware-in-the-Loop (HITL) Simulations - Real and simulated (virtual) networks are interfaced with one another for carrying out hardware-in-the-loop (HITL) testing and evaluations. A simulated network is modeled at a workstation by running a network simulation or discrete event modeling tool on the workstation. A virtual gateway node is defined in the simulated network, and the gateway node is linked with a network adapter on the workstation. An external real network operating with Internet protocol (IP) is also linked with the adapter. The adapter and the gateway node are configured to (i) translate simulated data packets sent from nodes of the simulated network and designated for the real network, into IP data packets for routing or processing by the real network, and (ii) translate IP data packets sent from nodes of the real network and designated for the simulated network, into simulated data packets for routing or processing by the simulated network.06-16-2011
20110142063MULTI-LINK TRANSPORT PROTOCOL TRANSLATION - A device may receive a packet at a network device, and may retrieve from a table, by using information in a header of the packet as keys, records that include communication performance statistics associated with transport protocols. In addition, the device may select, based on the records, a transport protocol with an optimum communication performance statistics among the transport protocols and send the packet in accordance with the selected transport protocol from the network device.06-16-2011
20110142061Method and System for Harmonizing QoS in Home Networks - Packet in a multimedia stream has and associated standard priority level specified by standard protocols. The standard priority level in input packets received by a home gateway is converted to a harmonized priority level. Then, the input packets are processed in the home gateway according to the harmonized priority level, and converted from the harmonized priority level to the standard priority level in corresponding output packets after the processing.06-16-2011
20110142060Optimized Power Usage For Data Networks - A solution for optimized power usage for a data network includes, at a network device coupled to a network, examining traffic usage information of the network and power usage information of a plurality of routers in the network, and calculating a path from a first router of the network to a second router of the network based at least in part on the traffic usage information and the power usage information. The calculated path has relatively low aggregate power usage for routers comprising the path. The solution also includes storing an indication of whether one or more of the plurality of network routers may be placed in a power conservation mode based at least in part on the calculating.06-16-2011
20110142058BRIDGE PROTOCOL FOR FLOW-SPECIFIC MESSAGES - A bridge protocol for controlled information transfer between encrypted and unencrypted networks—and vice versa—by utilizing successive packets of a flow wherein messages are spread across multiple packets and may therefore collectively convey far greater information than is possible in individual per-packet DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs), as practiced in the current art. In a first preferred embodiment the bridge protocol utilizes IPv6 DSCPs in successive packets to provide messages having a length of up to 6n bits in length where n is the number of DSCPs comprising the IPv6 bridge protocol message. In an alternative embodiment, the bridge protocol utilizes DSCPs in successive packets of an IPv4 flow to provide messages having a length of up to 5n bits in length where n is the number of DSCPs comprising the IPv4 bridge protocol message. It further utilizes the DSCP in the last packet of the IPv4 flow to mark the end of the flow. For security purposes, both embodiments include multiple safeguards to prohibit passage of unauthorized information across encryption boundaries.06-16-2011
20090201939DATA COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD FOR ITS NETWORK CONFIGURATION, AND COMPUTER READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM STORING ITS PROGRAM - A transmission apparatus for participating in a virtual network constructed on a physical IP network, said transmission apparatus including: a node link monitoring unit configured to search an in-subnetwork node, which is a virtual network node existing within a first IP subnetwork that the transmission apparatus belongs to; a gatenode link monitoring unit configured to search an in-subnetwork gatenode, which is a virtual network gatenode existing within the IP subnetwork, wherein the in-subnetwork gatenode is linked to an out-subnetwork node that exists within a second IP subnetwork different from the first IP subnetwork; a detecting unit configured to detect a number of in-subnetwork gatenodes that exist within the first IP subnetwork; and a node link processing unit configured to determine whether a node linked to the transmission apparatus is an out-subnetwork gatenode based on the number of in-subnetwork gatenodes existing within the first IP subnetwork.08-13-2009
20090201937RESILIENT PROVIDER LINK STATE BRIDGING (PLSB) VIRTUAL PRIVATE LAN SERVICE (VPLS) INTERWORKING - A method of peer interfacing a Link-State controlled network domain with an Ethernet Bridging controlled network domain. A pair of peer attachment points are provided between the Link-State controlled network domain and the Ethernet Bridging domain. The peer attachment points are respective endpoints of a set of one or more LAN segments defined within the Ethernet Bridging domain. The set of LAN segments are represented as a virtual node in the Link-State controlled network domain. The virtual node is represented in the Link-State controlled network domain as connected to each of the peer attachment points via a respective virtual link. The virtual links are configured such that frames to or from an address in the Link-State controlled network domain are forwarded over a tree passing through only one of the peer attachments points.08-13-2009
20090201941METHOD, SYSTEM, AND NETWORK ENTITY FOR OBTAINING SESSION DESCRIPTION PROTOCOL CAPABILITY INFORMATION - A method, system, network entity for obtaining Session Description Protocol capability information are disclosed. The method, system and network entity are used to solve the problem that a communication party is unable to acquire the Session Description Protocol capability information of the other party with the existing technology. The technical solutions according to the present invention allow a communication party to obtain the Session Description Protocol capability information of the other party from the other party by interacting messages between the two communication parties. Especially, in the case of H. 248 protocol, by extending the corresponding property parameters, a media gateway controller can obtain the Session Description Protocol capability information of the media gateway from the media gateway easily.08-13-2009
20090201940METHOD, SYSTEM AND GATEWAY FOR NEGOTIATING THE CAPABILITY OF DATA SIGNAL DETECTOR - Methods and systems for negotiating the capability of a data signal detector include a sender gateway sending a first signaling containing data signal detector support capability message during voice band data transmission (08-13-2009
20100002712PATH CONTROL METHOD ADAPTED TO AUTONOMOUS SYSTEM ROUTING PROTOCOL FOR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A path control method includes a procedure for developing a path control message including regional information in transmission on the network. The regional information designates a path and/or a path length for transmitting the path control message. The path control message includes a regional property for instructing each node as to how to process the regional information either in a strict manner or in a flexible manner. With reference to the regional information and/or the regional property, each node is capable of selecting a destination node to which the path control message is to be transmitted, stopping the further transmission of the path control message, or discarding the path control message.01-07-2010
20090097491Network connection service providing device - The present invention aims to provide a network connection service providing device capable of making not only a connection to the Internet, but also, if necessary, a connection to a private network, by a so-called hotspot service for providing a network connection service wirelessly at a station, an airport, a shop, or the like, and a control unit 04-16-2009
20090097492SUPPORT OF TRIPLE PLAY SERVICES IN USER DEVICES - Several services offered by distinct service providers can be accessed from a single user device, through one or more gateways. To ensure quality of service control, each service provider allocates a distinct address to the user device. Distinct forwarding information bases and service mappings are defined at the user device, comprising one such forwarding information base for each service provider and one service mapping for each service type offered by a given service provider. The separate addresses allocated to the user device are related to the separate service mappings. Distinct virtual local area networks (VLANs) are defined, each containing one of the forwarding information base and one of the service mappings. Tags added to packets by the gateways and arriving at the user device are used to link the packets to the proper service provider and to the proper service type.04-16-2009
20110228789CONTENTION FREE PIPELINED BROADCASTING WITHIN A CONSTANT BISECTION BANDWIDTH NETWORK TOPOLOGY - In an interconnection network, multiple nodes are connected to one of a first layer of switches. The first layer of switches is connected to one another through a second layer of switches, wherein each of the nodes is connected through one of multiple shared links connecting the first layer switches and the second layer of switches. A pipelined broadcast manager schedules a hierarchical pipelined broadcast through at least one switch of the first layer switches comprising a multiple non-root nodes by selecting two nodes of multiple non-root nodes connected to the at least one switch and scheduling each of multiple broadcast steps for the pipelined broadcast with at least one of an inter-switch broadcast phase and an intra-switch broadcast phase. The inter-switch broadcast phase is scheduled with a first node of the two nodes receiving a first data packet from another switch from among the first layer of switches and a second node of the two nodes sending a second data packet previously received from another switch to one other switch from among the first layer switches. The intra-switch broadcast phase is scheduled with the first node acting as a source for sending a previously received data packet to at least one other non-root node and the second node acting as a sink for receiving the previously received data packet, wherein each of the non-root nodes sends and receives the previously received data packet once throughout the broadcast steps and the sink receives the previously received data packet last. In scheduling the hierarchical pipelined broadcast, the first node and the second node alternate roles each broadcast step.09-22-2011
20100002713PACKET ROUTING APPARATUS - A packet routing apparatus has a plurality of routing units, connected by a first connecting mechanism. The plurality of routing units comprise a first routing unit, connected to at least one port, and a second routing unit, connected to an extended function processor. The first routing unit transmits a packet, received from the port, to another first routing unit and/or a second routing unit. The second routing unit transmits the packet, received from the first connecting mechanism, to the extended function processor.01-07-2010
20090103553METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR INSTRUCTING MEDIA GATEWAY TO SET UP TERMINATION CONNECTIONS - A method for instructing a media gateway to set up termination connections is disclosed in embodiments of the present invention. The method comprises: acquiring by a media gateway controller, MGC, information on connection capability, of a media gateway, MG, for various types of terminations; and when a calling connection is required, transmits from the MGC to the MG the connection indication carrying termination connection information that the MG has connection capability, according to the information on the MG's connection capability for various types of terminations. Embodiments of the present invention can ensure that the MG can effectively implement termination connection operation, so as to ensure a smooth progress of a calling connection process and greatly improve quality of service.04-23-2009
20090103552METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR A MEDIA GATEWAY CONTROLLER TO DELIVER A RESOURCE PROVISION DECISION TO A MEDIA GATEWAY - A method for a media gateway controller (MGC) to deliver a resource provision decision to a media gateway (MG) includes: the MGC receives a decision request from the MG and makes a resource provision decision according to service requirement information and/or resource status information, and delivers the resource provision decision to the MG. The present invention also discloses an MGC, an MG and a system comprising the MGC and MG In the invention, the MGC does not deliver the resource provision decision already made according to service requirement information and/or resource status information until reception of a decision request from the MG so that the MGC delivers a resource provision decision passively upon request of the MG. The Pull mode for delivery of the resource provision decision is thus supported.04-23-2009
20090245266UNIVERSAL PLUG AND PLAY DEVICE AND METHOD OF RESOLVING NETWORK ADDRESS CONFLICT BY CONSIDERING REMOTE ACCESS - A Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) device and method of resolving a network address conflict by considering remote access. In the method, a UPnP remote access server (RAS) in a home network selects a virtual network address in the home network that is accessible by a remote device on a remote network and that does not conflict with a network address in the remote network, and converts an address of a packet transmitted from the home network to the remote network based on the virtual network address.10-01-2009
20090245264METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UPDATING A VIRTUAL LOCAL AREA NETWORK (VLAN) STATUS OF A NODE IN A MESH NETWORK - A method for updating at a bridge node a virtual local area network (VLAN) status of a first node in a mesh network as provided enables improved network connectivity. The method includes processing a first VLAN status message that associates a first VLAN identifier with the first node, wherein the first VLAN status message was generated in response to a first bind request (BREQ) message (step 10-01-2009
20090257439METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ADVERTISING ROUTING INFORMATION AND METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING PACKET ROUTING - The present disclosure discloses a method and device for advertising routing information and a method and system for implementing packet routing. The method for advertising routing information includes a routing information advertising device that obtains its address information; the routing information advertising device adds the address information to routing information to advertise; and the routing information advertising device advertises the routing information that carries the address information. With the technical solution of the present disclosure, the number of routing tables in a backbone network may be greatly reduced. This minimizes the rise of router costs and effectively avoids slower route convergence. In addition, a router in the backbone network can dynamically obtain address information of a core router that advertises an aggregate prefix, such that it may be easier to implement registration, update and query the mapping between a more detailed address prefix and a border router.10-15-2009
20090245268Video Router and Method of Automatic Configuring Thereof - A video router comprises a multiple port Ethernet switch that may used to connect at least one Internet Protocol (IP) camera; a power over Ethernet unit that supplies power to the at least one connected IP camera; at least one network interface; and a central processing unit (CPU) capable of running a routing software that automatically discovers and configures the at least one connected IP camera.10-01-2009
20090245269METHOD AND CORE ROUTER FOR DELAYING BURST - A method and a core router for implementing forward delay for bursts are disclosed. The core router configured with an FDL performs proactive delay processing for the burst to be overlapped after predicting that the burst will be overlapped on the link to be protected, thus reducing the probability of burst conflict on the downstream link to be protected. After finding that burst conflict will occur on the output port of the core router at a future moment, the core router sends a burst delay request to the upstream core router, requesting the upstream core router that has an FDL and the delay capability to delay the burst. Therefore, the FDL configured in the network is brought into full play, and the probability of burst conflict is reduced.10-01-2009
20090245267GATEWAY DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A gateway device compatible with a synchronous transaction network and an asynchronous transaction network includes a communicating means communicating with a synchronous transaction network-compatible device and an asynchronous transaction network, and a holding means holding a transaction request received from the synchronous transaction network-compatible device, and, when an event is received from the asynchronous transaction network-compatible device, transmits a message including the event to the synchronous transaction network-compatible device via the communicating means as a response to the transaction request held in the holding means.10-01-2009
20090245265COMMUNICATION GATEWAY DEVICE AND RELAY METHOD OF THE SAME - To continue communication of a client even if an SIP server falls into a congestion state. Each of a communication gateway device and a relay method of the present invention couples to a client device and to an SIP server device for managing coupling information of the client device via a network; stores SIP-URI and a contact address of the client device that are included in a REGISTER request from the client device to the SIP server device as setup information; and when receiving an INVITE request from the client device to another client device, that is an SIP method for beginning a session, refers to the setup information, and forwards the INVITE request to the other client device.10-01-2009
20090238193Access Router, Service Control System, and Service Control Method - A service is transparently provided to a mobile terminal device without the mobile terminal device knowing an address of a service providing device or a device which relays a packet in a network. A packet between the service providing device which provides a service and a mobile terminal device 09-24-2009
20100265960MEDIA GATEWAY, MEDIA GATEWAY CONTROLLER, AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING MEDIA RESOURCES - A method for identifying media resources, a media gateway (MG), and a media gateway controller (MGC) are disclosed. The method for identifying media resources includes the following steps: the MG operates a media resource according to a command request sent from the MGC, and associates the operated media resource with a media resource identifier (MRI); the MG returns the information of the media resource that is already associated with the MRI to the MGC through a command reply. With the present invention, the MGC and the MG can manage and control a media resource for a media service by using a unique MRI.10-21-2010
20080259941SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING IP ADDRESSES - A system and apparatus for managing IP addresses is disclosed. A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a gateway having a controller element to receive a block of IP addresses from a dynamic host configuration protocol server. Additional embodiments are disclosed.10-23-2008
20090252176Gateway Device - Provided is a gateway device for interconnecting an IEEE1394 network and an IP network, which automatically detects and operates an AV device connected to the IEEE1394 network from a player device connected to the IP network, thereby enabling the player device to watch and hear contents stored in the AV device. The gateway device interconnects a network, to which an AV/C installed IEEE1394 device is connected, and a network, to which a player device compliant with a UPnP is connected, and includes: a conversion unit for converting Plug-and-Play processing of the IEEE1394 device to each step of Plug-and-Play of the UPnP; a conversion unit for converting an action of a UPnP AV to an AV/C command of the IEEE1394 device; and a stream transfer unit for transferring stream data transmitted from the IEEE1394 device to the IP network.10-08-2009
20090257440METHOD, SYSTEM AND ROUTER FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN IP DEVICES - A method for communication between IP devices is provided. The method includes: receiving a dynamic routing protocol control packet sent by each of actual physical routers in a virtual router; obtaining a virtual IP address according to the dynamic routing protocol control packet; and using the virtual IP address as a next hop address and sending information to be sent to an external network to the virtual router. Further, a system and a router for communication between IP devices are also provided. Through the technical solutions of the present invention, when the master router is transited, the conversion of the internal dynamic routing protocol matches with the transiting of the master router performed by the virtual. Thus, it is ensured that the transited master router can receive the information sent by the internal router in a short time.10-15-2009
20120195319SEPARATE ETHERNET FORWARDING AND CONTROL PLANE SYSTEMS AND METHODS WITH INTERIOR GATEWAY ROUTE REFLECTOR FOR A LINK STATE ROUTING SYSTEM - The present disclosure provides a separate Ethernet forwarding and control plane system, method, network, and architecture with a Link State Interior Gateway route reflector for the control plan system and a layer two network architecture for the forwarding system. The present invention optionally utilizes a cloud implementation for the Designated Router (DR) or designated peering node reducing peering requirements and distributing the functionality. Through the architecture of the present invention, the Provider router is obviated by the application of layer two switches and servers. Such an architecture provides improved scaling, performance, and cost reduction.08-02-2012
20100158026Transparent Interaction with multi-layer protocols via Selective Bridging and Proxying - The current invention defines a device and a method of logically inserting the device between two other network devices, for example, in a 3GPP Radio Access Network. The device transparently monitors and interacts with one or more control protocol layers in the two neighboring devices. The invention defines methods by which the intercepting node selectively passes through or proxies (selectively modifying portions of the protocols content) in such as way that the neighbor nodes are un-aware of the intercepting device. The proxy operation implies that the intercepting node is capable of terminating some protocol elements, injecting some protocol elements, or modifying protocol elements before forwarding them in such a way that the operation is transparent to neighboring nodes. These selective insertion/modifications facilitate identifying signaling connections for specific mobile clients, and enhancing and modifying service features for dataplane accesses for those client devices, while transparently passing other protocol messages.06-24-2010
20100265957CORE-BASED SATELLITE NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - Systems and methods for implementing a satellite network, are described. The system includes satellite gateways in communication with subscribers over a satellite communication network. The satellite gateways send network communications to the subscribers and receive network communications from the subscribers. The system further includes a first core node in communication with at least one of the satellite gateways. The first core node provides networking services, at L2, to a first subset of subscribers. The system further includes a second core node in communication, at L2, with one of the satellite gateways and the first core node. The second core node provides the networking services, at layer-2 of the OSI model, to a second subset of the subscribers. In response to failure of at least one of the networking services in the first core node, the second core node providing the at least one of the services to the first subset of the subscribers.10-21-2010
20100014532Gateway - A gateway for interconnecting different networks includes a network access means for interconnecting a first network that provides a wireless access function to a mobile station with a second network that provides a network access function to the mobile station. The gateway further includes a first tunnel establishment means for establishing, in the first network, a first tunnel between the gateway and a base station accessing one or more mobile stations via wireless communications, for transmission of different packets to the respective mobile stations. The gateway further includes a second tunnel establishment means for establishing a second tunnel between the gateway and the second network, for packet transmission, a tunnel-mobile station connecting means for connecting the first tunnel with the mobile station, and a tunnel-to-tunnel interworking means for interworking the second tunnel with the first tunnel.01-21-2010
20120195320DATA SHARING METHOD AND SYSTEM - A method is provided for sharing data between a plurality of nodes in a communication network. The communication network includes a first sharing router and a second sharing router. The first sharing router and second sharing router each have a memory, the memory including a record table for storing at least one record, wherein each record includes at least a reference describing the data to share and, at least one of the data to share or the address of at least a data node associated with the data to share, so that a collecting node may further collect the data.08-02-2012
20100158030Routing Apparatus - A routing apparatus couples to another routing apparatus using a trunk formed by a plurality of channels, and has a plurality of input and output cards to input and output frames. Each input and output card includes a management table registering a transmitting source address, destination information, and a trunk attribute indicating whether a channel used for a transmission has a trunk structure, a learning request part searching the management table using a transmitting source address within a frame that is transmitted via the channel, and generating and supplying learning request information having information that is obtained by searching the management table to another input and output card, if the channel used for the transmission has the trunk structure, and a registering part registering learning request information supplied thereto in the management table.06-24-2010
20100189120METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A CENTRALIZED VEHICULAR ELECTRONICS SYSTEM UTILIZING ETHERNET IN AN AIRCRAFT - Aspects of a method and system for a centralized vehicular electronics system utilizing Ethernet optimized for use in an aircraft are provided. In this regard, one or more processors and/or circuits in an aircraft may be operable to receive one or more Ethernet packets over one or more Ethernet links, generate a plurality of signals based on the received packets, wherein the plurality of signals comprise a plurality of signal formats suitable for conveyance to a plurality of electronic components in the aircraft, and output the plurality of signals to a plurality of electronic components in the aircraft. The electronic component(s) may comprise a display and/or audio output. The signals may be formatted in accordance with video and/or audio standards. The electronic component(s) may comprise an Ethernet port and the circuit(s) and/or processor(s) may be operable to communicate packets between the Ethernet port and the one or more Ethernet links.07-29-2010
20100166001Boundary Routers Providing Redistribution and Related Backbone Networks, Computer Program Products, and Methods - A backbone network may include first and second border routers and a route reflector. The first border router may provide data connectivity between the backbone network and a first regional network. The first border router may be configured to receive a notification of a change in status of an edge router of the first regional network, and the notification may be received according to a first routing protocol. The first border router may be further configured to redistribute the notification of the change in status of the edge router from the first routing protocol to a second routing protocol with the first and second routing protocols being different. The second border router may provide data connectivity between the backbone network and a second regional network. The route reflector may be coupled between the first and second border routers, and the route reflector may be configured to transfer the redistributed notification from the first border router to the second border router. Related routers, methods, and computer program products are also discussed.07-01-2010
20100158027Methods and apparatus for data communications through packet networks - An improved data communication technique may be employed with modems through a packet network. The disclosed technique facilitates a virtual end-to-end connection between two modems such that the two modems can effectively behave as if directly connected to each other, unaware of any modifications to the data being transferred or to the protocols configured within the communication connection. Preferably, a data communication system for carrying out the communication technique demodulates data coming from a first modem, transports the demodulated data in packets between two gateways, and then remodulates the data before delivering to a second modem at the other end. In accordance with various aspects of the present invention, various alternatives for calling and quality of service set-up mechanisms, the establishment of a communication session, the transport of data during a communication session, the flow control between all system components involved, and the mechanisms for the termination of communications are also provided.06-24-2010
20100158028NETWORK SWITCH WITH MUTUALLY COUPLED LOOK-UP ENGINE AND NETWORK PROCESSOR - A network switch includes a look-up engine for obtaining associated data in response to a header portion of a packet and an interlinked network processor such as a RISC for performing a processing function on the header portion or the associated data. Both look-up engine and the network processor may modify a destination port bitmask. The network processor may implement additional packet header processing required for replication or server load balancing.06-24-2010
20100158023System-On-a-Chip and Multi-Chip Systems Supporting Advanced Telecommunication Functions - A system-on-chip integrated circuit (and multi-chip systems based thereon) that includes a bridge interface that employs data scrambling and error correction on data communicated between integrated circuits.06-24-2010
20100183020POLICY DECISION FUNCTION ADDRESSING METHOD, NETWORK ELEMENT AND NETWORK SYSTEM - A policy decision function (PDF) addressing method includes: receiving a PDF allocation request that contains a user equipment identifier (UE ID) from a second network element (NE); obtaining ID information of a PDF associated with the UE ID according to pre-registered addressing information of the PDF, where the addressing information of the PDF is an association between the UE ID and the ID information of the PDF, and the PDF associated with the UE ID is accessed by a first NE; and sending the obtained ID information of the PDF to the second NE.07-22-2010
20090116500APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING AN ACTIVE CALL BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - An active voice call with an access terminal is transferred from an originating wireless network to a destination wireless network in response to a call continuation message transmitted by the access terminal to a destination network switch of the destination wireless network. The call continuation message includes a connected number indicator identifying the voice call and a call continuation indicator indicating the voice call should be routed through the destination network switch. In some circumstances, an originating network switch of the originating wireless network identifies the voice call to the network switch of the first wireless network to facilitate the transfer.05-07-2009
20100260194METHOD, MEDIA GATEWAY CONTROLLER AND MEDIA GATEWAY FOR MEDIA RESOURCE IDENTIFICATION CAPABILITY INTERACTING - A method, a media gateway controller (MGC), and a media gateway (MG) for media resource identification capability interacting provide a mechanism for media resource identification capability interacting between the MGC and the MG. Thus, the media resource identification schemes respectively supported by a user and an MG can be exchanged between the MGC and the MG, so as to realize media resource identification capability negotiation between the user and the media provider.10-14-2010
20100260195METHOD FOR ADJUSTING SIGNAL DELIVERY BANDWIDTH, MEDIA GATEWAY AND MEDIA GATEWAY CONTROLLER - A method for adjusting a signal delivery bandwidth is provided. The method includes the following steps: A media gateway (MG) receives a command request carrying signal delivery bandwidth adjusting information, and the MG adjusts the signal delivery bandwidth according to the signal delivery bandwidth adjusting information. An MG and a media gateway controller (MGC) are also provided. By extending the media gateway control protocol (H.248 or MGCP), the delivery bandwidth adjusting information of a signal is transferred while the signal is transferred, the signal is adjusted according to the signal delivery bandwidth adjusting information, a signal and/or signal list corresponding to the signal delivery bandwidth adjusting information is transferred simultaneously, and the executing process of the signal remains uninterrupted.10-14-2010
20100189121Scalable Router-Switch - A scalable router-switch comprises a plurality of switch units each having consolidation means for data disassembling and reassembling. The switch units are arranged into switch modules and the switch units of each switch module are interconnected through a dual rotator to form a contention-free temporal mesh.07-29-2010
20100183018Routing In A Network - A network comprises a plurality of Access Routers arranged in one or more NetLMM domains. A domain comprises distributed routing information in the form of one or more Bloom filters or Bloom filter equivalents. In one embodiment, each Access Router may have an associated Local Bloom filter or Bloom filter equivalent that provides information as to which mobile nodes are currently behind the respective Access Router. Each Access Router sends its associated Local Bloom filter or Bloom filter equivalent to every other Access Router of the domain. An Access Router uses the Bloom filters or Bloom filter equivalents received from every other Access Router of the domain to determine to which Access Router to send a packet destined to a specified Mobile Node. Another embodiment uses partly-distributed routing information.07-22-2010
20100189119SWITCH APPARATUS, CARD, AND MANAGEMENT METHOD OF FDB INFORMATION - The switch apparatus includes at least one first card having a switch installed therein or more, and a second card, wherein the first card includes an update unit that, in the case of having detected FDB information that is not present in its own switch, transmits it to the second card, and updates the FDB information of its own switch with the FDB information being transmitted from the second card; and wherein the second card includes a manager that collects the FDB information being transmitted from each first card, updates the FDB information of the switch apparatus, and transmits the updated FDB information to each card.07-29-2010
20100189118PACKET TRANSFER METHOD AND NODE APPARATUS - In a L2VPN, where Ethernet frames are encapsulated and transferred, when an edge node disposed at an entrance of the L2VPN encapsulates an Ethernet frame, the data type of the payload of the Ethernet frame is checked. If the payload data type includes time-to-live (TTL) information, whether to encapsulate or discard the frame is judged according to the TTL value. One material for judging whether to discard the frame is a condition that the TTL value is larger than ‘1’ and smaller than a predetermined threshold.07-29-2010
20100260193Signal-type dependent real-time fax relay - Signal-type dependent real-time fax Relay. For example, a system for delivering substantially in real-time a fax call from a gateway to an Internet Protocol (IP) network; wherein the fax call comprises: (a) analog signals of fax negotiation and control belonging to a first type of fax signals, and (b) half-duplex analog signals modulated according to a modulation scheme selected by fax terminals for fax image transfer belonging to a second type of fax signals; wherein the system comprises: a module for distinguishing between the first type of signals which are received at the gateway and the second type of signals which are received at the gateway; a module for demodulation and transferring signals belonging to said first type from said gateway to said IP network, and a module for transferring signals of said second type from said gateway to said IP network either after being demodulated or after being Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) encoded based on a predetermined condition; wherein the system is to determine, on per-signal basis, how to process sampled input of fax signals; wherein the system is to select, on per-fax-call basis, whether to transfer fax signals belonging to said second type after being demodulated or after being PCM encoded; wherein, if PCM encoding is used in the delivering of a fax signal, then the system is to initiate the PCM encoding; wherein the system is to switch, within a fax relay session, from or to utilizing a PCM-encoded signal stream, to or from, respectively, utilizing a demodulated data stream.10-14-2010
20100177780NETWORK INTEROPERABILITY BETWEEN IP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS OR SUB-NETWORKS - Gateway apparatus for interworking between source and destination communication networks, to solve issues of absence of mutual recognition between the source and destination networks when communication within the networks uses internet protocol (IP). The apparatus comprises a source network front end emulator for emulating front end IP server components of the source network to the destination network; and a destination network front end emulator for emulating front end IP server components of the destination network to the source network. The apparatus, by virtue of the emulators, mediates communications between the source and destination networks.07-15-2010
20100177779GATEWAY APPARATUS, INFORMATION COMMUNICATION METHOD, INFORMATION COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, AND INFORMATION COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is provided a gateway apparatus connected to at least one or more terminal devices in the same network, including a signaling module that relays transmission and reception of information until a communication session between a terminal device in the same network and a terminal device in another network has been established, a communication capability database in which capability information including at least information relating to communication capability of a plurality of terminal devices is registered, and a communication-capability determining module that caches the information relayed by the signaling module until the communication session between the terminal device in the same network and the terminal device in the another network has been established, and registers and manages, in the communication capability database, the capability information of the terminal device in the another network.07-15-2010
20100158029METHOD OF OPERATING INTERNET PROTOCOL ADDRESS AND SUBNET SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A method of operating an Internet protocol (IP) address allocates, creates, and processes an interface identifier (ID) of an IP address area. In the allocation, the IP address area includes a subnet prefix area and an Interface ID area, and certain bits of the Interface ID area are used as an index area of a subnet gateway. The allocation is implemented in order from the higher layer to the lower layer so that the Interface ID area is sequentially allocated from the higher bits for the index areas of the respective layers. The combination of the certain bits of the allocated Interface ID and the subnet prefix area of the IP address area is used as the subnet ID of the subnet layers. The lowest subnet gateway allocates the Interface ID to terminating equipment to access the IP network based on a format of the IP address.06-24-2010
20090116501METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REALIZING UNICAST REVERSE PATH FOR FORWARDING - A method and device for realizing a unicast reverse path forwarding is disclosed. Information about that a unicast reverse path forwarding (URPF) needs to be implemented is set in a route table item of a network device's route table, the network device implements the URPF on the corresponding message according to the route table item which carries the information about that the URPF needs to be implemented. The information about that URPF needs to be implemented in the network device's route table may be set in a dynamic or static manner, and so on. Therefore, the implementing process of URPF is simplified and the forwarding performance of the network device is improved.05-07-2009
20090116498TESTING DATA SERVICE USING MOCA-TO-ETHERNET BRIDGE - A terminal apparatus includes an ethernet channel that transfers ethernet traffic between an ethernet port and an external network port during a normal operation mode of the apparatus, and a Multimedia over Cable Alliance (MoCA) channel that transfers MoCA traffic between a MoCA port and the external network port during the normal operation mode. The terminal apparatus also includes a test system that bridges the ethernet channel and the MoCA channel during a test mode of the apparatus. Ethernet traffic received by the ethernet port is converted to MoCA traffic and transferred to the MoCA port, and MoCA traffic received by the MoCA port is converted to ethernet traffic and transferred to the ethernet port.05-07-2009
20090316710ADDRESS PROTOCOL RESOLUTION OF ROUTER DEVICE - An address resolution protocol method of a router device comprising steps of: (a) Proving an Internet domain to connect a plurality of computers and a router device. (b) Accepting an address resolution protocol due to the router device, and the address resolution protocol has a sender Internet protocol address (SIPA) and a target Internet protocol address (TIPA). (c) Comparing the SIPA to have the internal domain. (d) Sending to an Internet resolution protocol (IRP) within the Domain Name of Internet network, and to send the IRP to compare with the internal control protocol address. (e) Corresponding with the SIPA of the internet address; renewing the one of the data of the location of the address due to the router device; the SIPA not to correspond with the data of the internet address; the router device to save the SIPA.12-24-2009
20090316709DEVICES AND METHODS FOR A VIRTUAL INTERNET PROTOCOL TELEVISION (VIPTV) - A communication system according to various exemplary embodiments can include a broadcast station. At least one encoder can be coupled to the broadcast station, wherein the at least one encoder is configured to encode in real-time signals generated from the broadcast station and to convert the signals into Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) data packets. At least one server can be coupled to the at least one encoder for transmitting the TCP/IP data packets over a virtual connection between the at least one server to a content distribution network.12-24-2009
20090316708TECHNIQUES TO MANAGE A RELAY SERVER AND A NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATOR - Techniques to manage a relay server and a network address translator are described. A system may include a relay server having a first private network interface operative to communicate with a private client, a second private network interface operative to communicate with a network address translator, and an enhanced relay manager module operative to receive a message from the private client over the first private network interface or a remote client over the second private network interface and through the network address translator, the enhanced relay manager module further operative to retrieve a public transport address and a mapped port for the network address translator from a mapped address attribute stored by the relay server, and send a response to the message with the public transport address and the mapped port to the private client or the remote client. Other embodiments are described and claimed.12-24-2009
20110235647COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND CONTROL METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - When connecting a plurality of packet processing parts each having a packet processing function as an added function of a virtual network for each user, there was a problem that the number of packet processing units that were connectable, a function of analyzing a communication packet, etc. were dependent on a transport technology of a core network of a virtual network. A communication system including the packet processing unit for performing an information processing of the communication packet on the virtual network has a virtual network system for the packet processing unit in addition to a wide area core network in a wide area network service.09-29-2011
20100220735STORAGE UNIT FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM NODE, METHOD FOR DATA STORAGE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM NODE - The present invention relates to a data storage unit for a communication system node, a method for data storage and a communication system node. More particularly it relates to storing buffering data and control data in a unit located outside of a Communication Controller on system or host-controller level, wherein a time-triggered protocol runs on the node. By locating control and buffering related data, including format and behaviour, outside the Communication Controller it becomes far more flexible, extendable, and re-configurable as data buffering related restrictions, e.g. buffer sizes and number of buffers, are moved from Communication Controller level to system level.09-02-2010
20100150163ETHERNET SWITCHING APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION OF THE SAME - A method for reducing power consumption in an Ethernet switch is provided. The method includes: checking a state of packet data input through each of connection ports; detecting a connection port which has a packet rate lower than a predetermined reference value based on a result of the checking; and generating a data transfer control frame with respect to the connection port having the low packet rate and transmitting the generated data transfer control frame to an Ethernet apparatus connected to the corresponding connection port. Accordingly, a transmission line between the Ethernet switch and an Ethernet apparatus having the low to transmission rate is maintained in a low-power state, thereby reducing energy consumption in both Ethernet apparatuses.06-17-2010
20100177781CONTENTS PROVIDING SYSTEM, SERVER DEVICE AND CONTENTS TRANSMISSION DEVICE - A user management server device (a) registers a contents transmission request when receiving the contents transmission request to an electronic device from a terminal device, (b) determines whether the contents transmission request to the electronic device is registered when there is an inquiry from the electronic device, and (c) transmits the contents transmission request to the electronic device as a response to the inquiry when the contents transmission request to the electronic device is registered. The electronic device makes an inquiry to the user management server device of whether the contents transmission request to the device itself is registered, and when receiving the contents transmission request as the response to the inquiry, transmits the contents specified by the contents transmission request.07-15-2010
20100238943COMMUNICATION CHANNEL SWITCH - The URLs and priority levels of a plurality of frequently accessed sites are stored beforehand in a user registration table in a communication channel switch. The communication channel switch stores the start time and end time of the latest access and the elapsed time at the site, in an access history table. The communication channel switch changes the priority levels in the user registration table in accordance with the length of the elapsed time. The communication channel switch collects video data from the sites prior to the time recorded as the latest access start time in the access history table, in accordance with the priority level in the user registration table, and stores the video data in a storage unit in the switch. When the user accesses a site included in the user registration table, the communication channel switch provides the site information in the storage unit quickly.09-23-2010
20100226383Inline Intrusion Detection - A method for inline intrusion detection includes receiving a packet at a network gateway, storing the packet, and assigning an identifier to the packet. The method also includes transmitting a copy of the packet and the identifier from the network gateway to an intrusion detection system and analyzing the copy of the packet by the intrusion detection system to determine whether the packet includes an attack signature and communicating a reply message from the intrusion detection system to the network gateway. The reply message includes the identifier and is indicative of the results of the analysis. The size of the reply message is less than the size of the packet.09-09-2010
20130215902METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REGISTERING REMOTE NETWORK DEVICES WITH A CONTROL DEVICE - A method and apparatus for registering a remote network device with a control device is disclosed. In one embodiment, a registration information message is received by a bridge device from an unregistered remote network device using a first communication protocol. Identification information within the registration information message is stored in a record in a memory. A second registration information message is transmitted to the control device using the second communication protocol, the second registration information message comprising at least some of the identification information. In response, an acknowledgement message is received from the control device, the acknowledgement message comprising an identification code. When subsequent messages are received by the bridge device addressed to the remote network device using the identification code, the bridge re-transmits these messages to the remote network device, addressing it using at least some of the identification information.08-22-2013
20100226382LDP IGP Synchronization for Broadcast Networks - A network element that has a broadcast interface to a broadcast network becoming operational determines whether at least one alternate path exists to the broadcast network. The broadcast interface is to carry traffic on a label switched path. If an alternate path exists, the broadcast interface will not be advertised to the broadcast network until label distribution protocol (LDP) is operational with all neighbors on the broadcast interface.09-09-2010
20100226381ROUTING FRAMES IN A TRILL NETWORK USING SERVICE VLAN IDENTIFIERS - Methods, apparatus, and products are disclosed for routing frames in a TRILL network using service VLAN identifiers by: receiving a frame from an ingress bridge node for transmission through the TRILL network to a destination node that connects to the TRILL network through an egress node, the received frame including a customer VLAN identifier, a service VLAN identifier uniquely assigned to the ingress bridge node, and a destination node address for the destination node, the received frame not having mac-in-mac encapsulation; adding, in dependence upon the service VLAN identifier and the destination node address, a TRILL header conforming to the TRILL protocol, the TRILL header including an ingress bridge nickname and an egress bridge nickname; and routing, to the egress bridge node through which the destination node connects to the network, the frame in dependence upon the ingress bridge nickname and the egress bridge nickname.09-09-2010
20120128006Method and Arrangement for Enabling Multimedia Services for a Device in a Local Network - Method and arrangement in a home gateway (05-24-2012
20100220738Apparatus and Method for Route Optimization for Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol Version Six Local Routing - An apparatus comprising a first mobile access gateway (MAG) associated with a mobile node (MN) and configured to send a proxy binding update (PBU) to a second MAG associated with a correspondent node (CN). An apparatus comprising at least one processor configured to implement a method comprising promoting transmission of a route optimization start request (ROStartReq) message to a MAG, wherein the ROStartReq message requests route optimization between a MN and a CN, and wherein the ROStartReq message comprises a MN-CN route optimization (RO) option. A system comprising a local mobility agent (LMA), a first MAG coupled to the LMA and in communication with a MN, and a second MAG coupled to the LMA and in communication with a CN, wherein communications between the MN and the CN are routed through the first MAG and the second MAG without being routed through the LMA.09-02-2010
20110058567ROOT NODE REDUNDANCY FOR MULTIPOINT-TO-MULTIPOINT TRANSPORT TREES - A mechanism is provided to configure a plurality of transport trees in a transport network, each of which correspond to a native tree (e.g., a bidirectional multicast tree). In embodiments of the present invention, each of the plurality of transport trees has a unique root node so that in the event of a failure of any root node, the transport trees with surviving root nodes can be used to transport traffic from the native tree. The present invention provides for each transport network edge router being independently responsible for selection of a transport tree that the edge router will use to transmit a datastream, while also being capable of receiving packets from any transport tree. Through the use of such configured transport trees along with independent selection of a transport tree, the present invention provides a reduction in the disruption of datastream transmission due to a root node failure.03-10-2011
20110058566PACKET SWITCH APPLIANCE WITH A PACKET SWITCHING AND PACKET PROCESSING DAUGHTER BOARD - A packet switch appliance for connection to a packet switching network, the packet switch appliance has a motherboard that includes a processor, a network switch chip, and a connector. The packet switch appliance also includes a daughter board configured to be removably connected to the motherboard through the connector. The daughter board may include one or more of a network switch chip and a processor unit.03-10-2011
20110058565REAL TIME CONFIGURATION AND PROVISIONING FOR A CARRIER ETHERNET EXCHANGE - An Ethernet switch platform is configured to receive and process a provisioning order to establish a logical virtual circuit interconnecting a physical port associated with a buying carrier and a physical port associated with a selling carrier to set up a private network to private network connection between the buying and selling carriers. The virtual circuit is established with parameters called for in a request for quote (RFQ) initiated by the buying carrier and in a response to the RFQ submitted by the selling carrier. Information from the RFQ and from the response together with information previously stored in a relational database is extracted and used to fill out the provisioning order. The information extracted from the database include profile information and network service information associated with the buying and selling carriers.03-10-2011
20110058563ARCHITECTURAL FRAMEWORK OF COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND A METHOD OF ESTABLISHING QOS CONNECTION - Disclosed herein are an architectural framework (03-10-2011
20100238945METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MIGRATING CONTENT ON A NETWORK - A method and system for migrating content on a network. In one method embodiment, the present invention accesses a directory having a network address. A business rule is created and a directory is scripted based on the business rule. Next, a content switch automatically directs future access to the directory to a new environment based on the scripting, wherein the future access to the directory uses the same network address. In so doing, the migration of content on a network is greatly simplified.09-23-2010
20100238942LOOKUP ENGINE WITH PROGRAMMABLE MEMORY TOPOLOGY - An architecture for a specialized electronic computer for high-speed data lookup employs a set of tiles each with independent processors and lookup memory portions. The tiles may be programmed to interconnect to form different memory topologies optimized for the particular task.09-23-2010
20100220739Carrier Network Connection Device And Carrier Network - A network connection device connecting a pseudo wire of a layer 09-02-2010
20100220736Advertising alternate paths at border gateway protocol route reflectors - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving routing information at an alternate route reflector in a network, identifying at the alternate route reflector, an alternate path different from a primary path selected and advertised at a primary route reflector in the network, and advertising at the alternate route reflector, the alternate path. The primary and alternate paths define paths for a destination and the alternate path is the only path advertised by the alternate route reflector for the destination.09-02-2010
20090028167COOPERATIVE NAT BEHAVIOR DISCOVERY - Methods and apparatus for facilitating traversal of a network address translator (NAT) are disclosed. For example, a node configured to communicate with one or more other nodes over a network may facilitate NAT traversal by a) determining information regarding the behavior of one or more NATs with the node; and storing the information in such a way that the information is retrievable by one or more other nodes; or b) retrieving information regarding behavior of one or more NATs obtained by one or more other nodes and using the information to traverse one or more of the NATs.01-29-2009
20100220737MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE EXTENSIONS FOR TRUNK PORTS CARRYING MORE THAN 4K VIRTUAL SERVICES - In one embodiment, bridges in a computer network maintain a per-port mapping table for each of its ports, where each mapping table maps, for each virtual connection (of more than 4K) at a respective port, i) frame encapsulation fields that uniquely identify a particular virtual connection at the respective port to ii) a particular multiple spanning tree (MST) instance. The bridges may then compute a checksum of a particular mapping table for a particular port, and share the checksum with a corresponding port interconnected with the particular port (e.g., of another bridge). Upon determining that the mapping tables at the corresponding ports match in response to the checksums matching, frames may then be forwarded between the ports based on the particular mapping table.09-02-2010
20100220741HETEROGENEOUS MEDIA PACKET BRIDGING - Methods and systems for bridging Ethernet frames transmitted over heterogeneous media channels are provided. According to one embodiment, multiple Ethernet frames encapsulated within multiple in-bound media transmissions having different media formats are received via a first set of multiple network interfaces of a network-computing device. The multiple in-bound media transmissions are relayed via a switch fabric of the network-computing device to a virtual bridge application running on a processing resource shared by the network interfaces and which acts as a single bridging domain for all Ethernet frames. The virtual bridge application encapsulates the multiple Ethernet frames within multiple out-bound media transmissions by performing media agnostic Ethernet bridging of the multiple Ethernet frames. The multiple Ethernet frames are transmitted by relaying, via the switch fabric, the out-bound media transmissions to a second set of the multiple network interfaces.09-02-2010
20100220740METHOD, SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM FOR FORWARDING MESSAGES BETWEEN NODES - Provided are a method, system, and program for forwarding a message from a transmitting node. A first message is received encoded using a first communication protocol from the transmitting node, wherein the first message includes a direct reference to a memory location in one node. A determination is made as to whether the first message is directed to a receiving node using a second communication protocol. A second message is generated that is compatible with the second communication protocol, wherein the second message causes an operation to be performed with respect to the direct reference in the first message. The second message is transmitted to the receiving node.09-02-2010
20080285575System and Method For Remote Monitoring And Control Of Network Devices - A managed network provides unique network addresses that are assigned to nodes such that no two nodes will have the same address in the managed network and such that each node will always have the same network address regardless of changing its location or changing the network to which it is joined. The nodes, communicating together, comprise a mesh network. Remote management and control of the nodes is possible from the host server, which is located outside of the mesh network, even if a node is located behind a firewall or network address translator (NAT), because server management messages are encapsulated within headers so that a persistent connection between the node and the external host server is maintained once the node sends a message to the host.11-20-2008
20100254397COMMUNICATION ROUTE PRESUMPTION TECHNIQUE - A method includes: identifying a test source address (SA) in a second network and a test destination address (DA) in a third network, wherein a packet is presumed to be transmitted from the second network to the third network through plural communication routes in a first network; causing an output edge router connected to the third network to change settings of an ARP table in the output edge router so as not to transfer the packet addressed to the test DA to the third network; obtaining the first number of input packets from each counting router on each route; transmitting a test packet including the test SA and DA, plural times; obtaining the second number of input packets from each counting router; calculating a difference between the first and second numbers for each route; and identifying a route through which the test packets passed, based on the differences.10-07-2010
20100128733METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMIC APPLICATION LAYER GATEWAYS - A method and system are disclosed for providing functionality on a network. A mobile agent moves from a first node to a target node and, at the target node, performs as an application layer gateway.05-27-2010
20120140774Methods and Systems for Enterprise Network Access Point Determination - Systems and methods according to these exemplary embodiments provide for methods and systems for routing communications from a serving network to an enterprise network. Access point information associated with users in the enterprise network is stored and accessible for use by the serving network.06-07-2012
20100265959Method, System, and Device for Pausing Signals - A method for pausing signals includes the following steps: a media gateway (MG) receives a pause instruction from a media gateway controller (MGC) instructing the MG to pause a resource operation; and the MG pauses the resource operation according to the pause instruction. A device for pausing signals is also provided. In embodiments of the present invention, the MGC may flexibly pause a signal or a signal list on a termination or a stream or associated with a media resource.10-21-2010
20090041043Communication system, switching node computer and method for determining a control node - A first communications network and a second communications network are part of a communications system that includes at least one communications terminal and an interface computer, coupled to the first communications network, for mapping a data stream between the at least one communications terminal and the first communications network. The first communications network includes at least one control node for controlling the data stream between the interface computer and the at least one communications terminal. The communications system also includes at least one network node, which provides the control node with information relating to the communications terminal that allows the control node to exercise its control function, and at least one switching node which determines the control node associated with the communications terminal concerned so that the information prepared by the at least one network node can be transmitted to the control node.02-12-2009
20090041041AIRCRAFT DATA LINK NETWORK ROUTING - A method for routing aircraft data link messages over a plurality of communications networks is disclosed. The method assigns at least one data link message routing service for an aircraft having a first message processing application based on prescribed criteria, the prescribed criteria comprising preferred networks of the plurality of communications networks. As a first preferred communications network becomes available, the method selects a first message route from the assigned routing service and transmits each of the data link messages on the first message route while the first message route satisfies the prescribed criteria. When the prescribed criteria changes over a plurality of flight phases of the aircraft, the method reassigns the at least one data link message route to continue data link message transmissions to and from the aircraft based on the latest prescribed criteria.02-12-2009
20090041038Scalable Virtual Private Local Area Network Service - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a data link layer packet, such as an Ethernet packet, at a local provider edge node in a provider network from a first customer edge node of multiple customer edge nodes connected directly to the local provider edge node. A tunnel data packet for a particular tunneling protocol is generated. The tunnel data packet includes tunnel data that indicates tunnel termination at a different provider edge in the provider network. The tunnel data packet also includes customer identifier data and the data link layer packet. The customer identifier data uniquely indicates a customer associated with the first customer edge node. The tunnel data packet is sent over the provider network.02-12-2009
20120033679METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IN-BAND PROVISIONING OF A DEVICE AT A CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate performing in-band provisioning for one or more devices at a restricted group of network nodes. A packet data context related to performing provisioning at the restricted group can be established between a device and a network via a restricted group node. The device can request provisioning at the restricted group using the packet data context, and the network can perform the provisioning. The packet data context can restrict access to allow provisioning related communications while rejecting other communications until provisioning is complete.02-09-2012
20120033677ROUTER AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING MULTIPLE INTERNET PROTOCOL ADDRESSES - A router and method for configuring multiple Internet Protocol addresses includes setting at least two IP addresses for a local user terminal, and mapping the IP addresses to a domain name of a remote user terminal. A router advertisement packet that includes the IP addresses is generated and transmitted to the local user terminal to configure the IP addresses for the local user terminal. The IP addresses are determined to be configured for the local user terminal successfully if the router receives a router solicitation packet from the local user terminal.02-09-2012
20090073997METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING HIERARCHICAL NETWORK WITH PROVIDER BACKBONE BRIDGES - A method for establishing a hierarchical network with Backbone Provider Bridges includes: dividing the network into a plurality of layers, and partitioning each layer into at least one domain; each domain assigning a service tag for itself; a local domain sending a mapping request including a user type ID to a further domain in the same layer; the further domain in the same layer returning a service tag corresponding to the user type ID to the local domain; the local domain establishing and saving a mapping relationship; and edge devices of each domain learning MAC addresses. Further, a system and device having the same are also provided in the disclosure.03-19-2009
20090073998Interworking Point to Point Protocol for Digital Subscriber Line Access w/Ethernet Connections in the Aggregation Network - Methods and apparatus for enabling the establishment of a Point to Point Protocol (PPP) session to a broadband network gateway through an access node of a packet-switched wireline aggregation network and methods and apparatus for enabling Ethernet frame data to be transported through an access node of packet-switched wireline aggregation network between a remote gateway a broadband network gateway are provided. In one aspect conventional PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) BNG discovery using broadcast PADI messages is replaced by configured unicast PADI messages to specified BNGs over Ethernet Connections. In other aspects Ethernet data is transported through the access node by swapping the upstream source MAC address with the MAC address of the access node to shield the provider network from customer MAC addresses, and swapping the downstream destination MAC address to the MAC address of the remote gateway by looking up the MAC address of the remote gateway in a mapping of PPPoE Session ID to MAC address of the remote gateway.03-19-2009
20090073996INTERIOR GATEWAY PROTOCOL SUMMARIZATION PRESERVING INTERNET PROTOCOL REACHABILITY INFORMATION - In one example embodiment, a system and method is illustrated that includes receiving connectivity data for at least one network device, the connectivity data describing a connection to the at least one network device within an area. The system and method further includes processing the connectivity data to obtain a routing update for distribution to another network device outside the area. Additionally, the system and method includes a routing summary in the routing update, the routing summary including an address prefix. Further, the system and method includes reachability information in the routing update, the reachability information including an address for the at least one network device.03-19-2009
20090073993METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK ROUTING BETWEEN A TACTICAL NETWORK AND A SATELLITE NETWORK - A method, apparatus, and computer usable program code for managing networks. In one advantageous embodiment, a computer implemented method processes routing information. The process collects updates to the routing information in a first network. Responsive to an event, a cost of reaching each address in the first network from each of a plurality of gateways in the first network that has access to a second network is identified to form identified costs. The process also selects a set of addresses for a set of gateways providing access to the second network, wherein each gateway in the set of gateways is identified using a policy with respect to a cost of reaching a particular address in the first network to form an update list. The update list is sent to the second network.03-19-2009
20090073994METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING DYNAMIC AUTO-SUMMARIZATION OF INTERNET PROTOCOL REACHABLE ADDRESSES - A computer implemented method, apparatus, and computer usable program code for managing addresses in a network. In one advantageous embodiment, a computer implemented method is used to managing addresses for a plurality of destinations in a network. Addresses assigned to a plurality of gateways are summarized to form summarized addresses containing prefixes and addresses for the plurality of gateways in which each gateway in the plurality of gateways is associated with a portion of the prefixes and addresses for destinations handled by the each gateway in the plurality of gateways. A gateway in the plurality of gateways having a largest portion of the summarized addresses is assigned a prefix for all addresses assigned to the network to form a selected gateway. An associated portion of the summarized addresses for the selected gateway is replaced with the prefix.03-19-2009
20090323703Method and System for Secure Communication Between a Public Network and a Local Network - A method for secure communication between a local area network and a wide area network includes integrating a NAT functionality in a firewall associated with the local area network, wherein the NAT functionality is suitable to translate the source port of outgoing data packets with a NAT port value obtained by adding to a NAT offset value the value of the session ED used in a session database. When reply data packets coming from the wide area network are received by the firewall, the session ID is extracted from the NAT port value and is used for directly pointing to the session database, thus reducing the time required to recognize the session.12-31-2009
20090323705METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING PHOTOELECTRIC MUTEX, ETHERNET PHOTOELECTRIC MUTEX INTERFACE DEVICE AND NETWORK EQUIPMENT - A method for implementing photoelectric mutex, an Ethernet photoelectric mutex interface device, and network equipment are provided. The Ethernet photoelectric mutex interface device includes a channel switching module, a first Ethernet physical layer (PHY) chip, and a second Ethernet PHY chip. The channel switching module is connected to the first Ethernet PHY chip through a first interface and connected to the second Ethernet PHY chip through a second interface respectively, and is adapted to perform data transmission through the first Ethernet PHY chip and when a presence signal of an optical interface data transmission module is detected, perform data transmission through the second Ethernet PHY chip. Thus, a cost of equipment for implementing a photoelectric mutex function in an Ethernet is reduced, and a utilization rate of transmission resources is improved.12-31-2009
20090180487ADAPTATION OF DIAL-UP DEVICES TO BROADBAND FACILITIES - A method and system for dial-up device (07-16-2009
20090316706STRUCTURED PREMISE NETWORKING SYSTEM - A data network to manage the distribution of network services and content throughout a home or residence is described. Generally, the data network includes a media gateway to receive, manage, and distribute services and content throughout the residence. The media gateway may include a structured wiring panel, a services switch to manage the network, and a communications module to provide an interface between the services switch and the residence.12-24-2009
20090109982System and Method for Associating an End User for Billing in a Network Environment - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving one or more packets of a communication session from one or more interfaces, such that the interface is a subscriber interface or a network interface. The method further includes associating the communication session to an end user with a source Internet Protocol (IP) address of the packet if the packet is received from the subscriber interface or to an end user with a destination IP address of the packet if the packet is received from the network interface.04-30-2009
20090034546PACKET ROUTING CONTROL METHOD AND SYSTEM - A wireless communication system downloads information from a file server quickly and efficiently by using multiple wireless communication paths. When a destination requests data from a file server through a wireless terminal, the wireless terminal generates an address translation rule that includes source, translation and destination addresses used to route the data from the file server to the destination through a virtual network server. The address translation rule is sent to at least one other wireless terminal, so that retrieved data packets can be routed through both wireless terminals simultaneously. A packet retrieved from the file server is sent to the virtual network server, where the packet is encapsulated into multiple packets and assigned virtual addresses. The encapsulated packets are sent to the multiple wireless terminals, and are sent from those terminals to the destination using the address translation rule, where the packets are decapsulated to reproduce the originally sent packet.02-05-2009
20080279202Integrated Gateway for Distributed Home Network and Software Framework Structure for the Same - Disclosed herein are an integrated gateway for a distributed home network and a software framework structure for the same. The integrated gateway includes an input/output interface unit (11-13-2008
20100278187Multiple Communications Protocol Routing In Advanced Metering Infrastructure Context - Techniques for using an Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) system for Utility Automation (UA) purposes in a utility distribution system are disclosed herein. In an AMI system, a metering node often includes a communications option board for connecting to a wide area network (WAN), which can be shared between the AMI system and a UA system. The metering node may be near other devices that can be controlled by a utility company to monitor and control components of the utility distribution system. A data packet is received in a communication device. The communication device determines whether the received data packet is formatted according to a first protocol employed by the AMI system. If so, then the data packet is forwarded to a first device in communication with the AMI system. If not, then the data packet is forwarded to a second device in communication with the UA system.11-04-2010
20080247401Remote Access to Home Communication Services - A home-link gateway system for providing remote access to contracted telephone services at a home or other physical location is disclosed. The home-link gateway manages communications at the home location, for example between a PSTN or VoIP telephone network and local telephone handsets. A remote client agent requests access to telephone services, via the Internet. Following authorization and registration, the home-link gateway couples the remote client agent to the telephone network, or to local handsets, as though the remote client agent were deployed at the home location.10-09-2008
20090109987ENHANCED MEDIA GATEWAY NEGOTIATION - A method and system of negotiating Media Gateways (MGs) between a plurality of call control nodes (CCNs). The system includes an originating CCN which builds an original list of configured Media Gateways capable of being used in a call by the originating CCN. The first CCN associates an identifier and a priority with each Media Gateway in the list prior to sending the list to a subsequent CCN. The subsequent CCN removes from the original list any identifiers associated with any MG in the original list of identifiers which is not capable of being used in the call by the subsequent CCN. The subsequent CCN then forms a modified list of identifiers associated with at least one MG capable of being used in a call by the originating CCN and the subsequent CCN. The subsequent CCN also selects a specified MG from the modified list and sends a first backward message from the second CCN to the originating CCN identifying the specified MG. The originating CCN may then validate that the specified MG is on the original list of identifiers and selects the specified MG for the call.04-30-2009
20090109985Packet forwarding device - A power-saving packet forwarding device realizing electric power that accords to the number of lines in which communication is performed and a traffic volume inputted from the lines. A header processing unit with which the packet forwarding device is equipped has a plurality of packet processing circuits for performing a packet processing. A line number decision circuit monitors the number of lines in which communication is performed and a traffic volume inputted from the line, and decides presence or absence of an operation of a packet processing circuit. Based on this decision result, a power supply and a clock of the packet processing circuit that does not need to operate are interrupted, and accordingly power saving of the packet forwarding device is realized.04-30-2009
20090109984WIRELESS DEVICE WITH FLASH CACHE AND BOOT FROM DOCK - A device is docked to a docking station. The docking station is coupled to a wired network. Code is obtained through the wired network. The code is executed on the device to enable the device to couple to a wireless network.04-30-2009
20100296516HIGH AVAILABILITY TRANSPORT PROTOCOL METHOD AND APPARATUS - A system and method supporting efficient, scalable stateful switchover of transport layer connections in a telecommunications network element. One method involves receiving, at a network element comprising an active transport protocol process coupled to a standby protocol process, a request to configure a first transport layer connection maintained at the active transport protocol process for stateful switchover; receiving an event associated with the first transport layer connection; creating a message containing replicated event information based on the received event; sending the message to the standby transport protocol process; and processing the message at the standby transport protocol process, wherein the standby transport protocol process replicates state information for the first connection.11-25-2010
20100303084APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR ACCESS FAIRNESS FOR A MULTIPLE TARGET BRIDGE/ROUTER IN A FIBRE CHANNEL ARBITRATED LOOP SYSTEM - Apparatus and methods improved fair access to a Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL) communication medium through a bridge device. The enhanced bridge device provides for a fair access in a currently open access window for all presently requesting devices coupled through the bridge device to the FC-AL communication medium. Thus all devices on the loop whether coupled directly or through a bridge device can be assured fair access to the loop when there are simultaneous requests during an open access window.12-02-2010
20100303085BRIDGE APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR COUPLING MULTIPLE NON-FIBRE CHANNEL DEVICES TO A FIBRE CHANNEL ARBITRATED LOOP - Apparatus and methods for an enhanced bridge device for coupling multiple non-Fibre Channel storage devices to a Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL) communication medium. Features and aspects hereof provide for FC-AL enhanced circuits for processing loop port bypass (LPB) and loop port enable (LPE) primitive sequences addressed to any target arbitrated loop physical address (T-ALPA) associated with a storage device coupled with the bridge regardless of the present bypassed/non-bypassed status of other T-ALPAs processed by the bridge device and associated with other storage devices coupled with the bridge device.12-02-2010
20100303090DATA PROCESSING APPARATUS USING RING BUS, DATA PROCESSING METHOD ANDCOMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - In an apparatus connected to a ring bus, deadlocks and degradation in effective efficiency of the ring bus could occur when a plurality of data processing streams are input or a case when the amount of data inside a processing circuit increases/decreases is present. To solve this, degradation in processing efficiency is minimized by making a working speed of the ring bus faster than the working speed necessary for data processing to reduce occasions for suppression of data output by data moving around the ring bus.12-02-2010
20100303088DYNAMIC ADMISSION CONTROL FOR MEDIA GATEWAYS - The invention relates to a Media Gateway in connection to a backbone, which measures a packet loss and/or jitter, receives a call and notices an indication that a higher packet loss and/or jitter is acceptable. The Media Gateway thereupon decides based on said measured packet loss or jitter and said indication, whether the call is admitted to be routed via said backbone even though the packet loss or jitter is above a predefined threshold. Furthermore, the invention relates also to a Mobile Switching Centre Server in connection to a backbone, which receives a call set-up, detects that a call set-up should be performed by a Media Gateway even if the packet loss or jitter is above a predefined threshold, and provides therefore an indication to the Media Gateway that a higher packet loss or jitter is acceptable. The invention further relates to corresponding nodes.12-02-2010
20100303087 Method and System for Controlling Network Access - A method and system for controlling network access are provided. The method comprises following steps: S12-02-2010
20100303086Scalable Multi-Hop Mesh Packet Switch Fabric - The present invention provides a multi-hop mesh fabric that allows existing systems to be more effectively scaled to increase bandwidth and the number of nodes within the fabric. The multi-hop mesh fabric also provides redundancy for each of the connections between nodes. The multi-hop mesh fabric may be realized in various different architectures including the maximum number of hops within the fabric and the layout of the fabric (e.g., full mesh vs. sparse mesh). The multi-hop mesh fabric may further improve its efficiency by employing various load balancing techniques, different scheduling methods, and other traffic management technologies known by one of skill in the art. Furthermore, the multi-hop mesh fabric may be realized in different environments including intra-devices, inter-device intra-blade, intra-blade intra-system, and inter-system intra-cluster.12-02-2010
20100322261METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING AN OPEN CHARGING (OC) MIDDLEWARE PLATFORM AND GATEWAY SYSTEM - The art of present discloses a method and system for enabling mobile network operators to collect charging information from various other network elements; and indeed, is intended to exploit the resiliency of open network architecture and lessen the requisite dependency on proprietary network elements services and billing systems. The Open Charging (OC) middleware platform and gateway system interacts with proprietary network elements and effectually creates a unifying, enabling layer in mobile networks. Indeed, the art is directed at permitting mobile subscriber access to, among others, third party content and services with the simplicity and convenience of such charges appearing on either mobile phone bill, or decremented from said mobile subscriber's pre-paid account.12-23-2010
20100322258METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING USING A GATEWAY COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - Methods and a gateway apparatus for facilitating communication between communications devices which support different communications protocols are described. The gateway device may receive an identifier of interest from a first device which supports a first communications protocol but not a second communications protocol. The gateway monitors signals corresponding to the second communications protocol to detect signals corresponding to the identifier of interest. An externally perceivable alert is generated by the gateway device when a signal corresponding to the identifier of interest is detected. Communications is established between the first communications device and a second communications device with the gateway device performing protocol conversion to the extent required. The first device may power down its interface after sending the identifier of interest to the gateway and then power up the interface in response to sensing of the alert or input from a user responding to the alert.12-23-2010
20100322262METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING REPORTING OF A MATCHING RESULT - A method and an apparatus for controlling reporting of a matching result are disclosed. A matching failure reporting parameter is set by the MGC onto the MG or is preset on the MG. In this way, the MG is controlled as to whether to report the result of a matching failure to the MGC or not report the result of the matching failure, and thus the system overhead is reduced and the operation efficiency is improved.12-23-2010
20100322260SWITCH, NETWORK SYSTEM AND TRAFFIC MOVEMENT METHOD - In an FDB provided for a switch, line information associated with MAC address information is managed separately for sending destination line information and receiving discrimination line information, and provides an incompatibility permission flag of permitting that they are different. Also, a function of rewriting the sending destination line information with a command from a manager is provided and linked with the change of the incompatibility permission flag. While the traffic is moved to a new line at the time of the line switching, this incompatibility is permitted, and even if a frame is received from an old line, the receiving line is not updated based on the frame.12-23-2010
20090003360System and method of detecting lost video data packets - Systems and methods of detecting lost packets are disclosed. In an embodiment, a method is disclosed that includes receiving a first request to retransmit a first packet. The method also includes selectively retransmitting the first packet based on a first list that identifies packets to retransmit and based on a second list that identifies packets that have been retransmitted.01-01-2009
20110243146Data Frame Forwarding Using a Multitiered Distributed Virtual Bridge Hierarchy - Systems and methods to forward data frames are provided. A particular method may include evaluating address data of a first data frame at a first virtual bridge coupled to a first virtual machine of a first server computer of a plurality of server computers. Based upon the evaluation at the first virtual bridge, the first data frame may be forwarded to a second virtual bridge associated with an adapter that is coupled to the first virtual machine. The address data of the first data frame may be evaluated at the second virtual bridge. Based upon the evaluation, the data frame may be forwarded to a third virtual bridge configured to forward the data frame based upon the address data to a second server computer of the plurality of server computers.10-06-2011
20110019683METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING ROUTES - The present invention discloses a method, an apparatus, and a system for managing routes, enables the MG to implement routing functions in the network communications field, and facilitates the operations on the routing table in the MG. A route context stores route records, and the MG searches for a route by searching for the corresponding route context only, thus facilitating the route management. The embodiments of the present invention are primarily applied to the MG and the MGC, especially to the MG that implements the routing functions.01-27-2011
20090067441Multi-interface wireless adapter and network bridge - Among other things, a wireless device is disclosed for enabling communication with a gateway device within a user premises. The wireless device includes a wireless local area network transceiver for bidirectional wireless data communication at the premises, an interface for wired communication, a processor for converting data between the wireless and wired interfaces. The wireless device receives instructions from the gateway device via the transceiver or the interface and implements conversion and communication control functions to implement a selected one of a plurality of wireless-wired adaptations for communications flowing between the selected one of the transceiver and the interface and the other of the transceiver and the interface for communication within the user premises for application service delivered by the gateway device.03-12-2009
20090067442METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING MULTIPLE NETWORKS OVER A SET OF PORTS - A system has a switch that allows virtual private networks to be created dynamically. The system includes at least one network. The system also includes a computer having an address. The system also includes a plurality of ports for coupling to the computer. The system also includes a switch that assigns one of the plurality of ports to a private network according to the address of the computer. The switch assigns the port by correlating the address with an address list.03-12-2009
20110026535BRIDGE APPARATUS AND BRIDGE SYSTEM - A bridge apparatus is disclosed, the bridge apparatus being connected between a first network and a second network and achieving a communication between equipment connected to the first network and equipment connected to the second network. This apparatus accepts communication from the equipment over the first network to equipment disconnected from the second network, and then, preserves contents of the communication even in the case where the equipment over the second network has been disconnected from the second network for reasons such as electric power cut. In the case where the disconnected equipment has been connected to the second network again, this apparatus transmits the accepted contents of the communication to the reconnected equipment.02-03-2011
20110019677Limiting of Network Device Resources Responsive to IPv6 Originating Entity Identification - Methods, apparatus, computer-storage media, mechanisms, and means associated therewith are used to limit network device resources based on the identification of the Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) originating entity (e.g., subscriber of a network carrier). As an IPv6 originating entity will typically be assigned 264 or more valid IPv6 addresses, the originating entity may send packets with a source address of any of these valid IPv6 addresses and still be compliant with Internet standards and/or other specifications (e.g., RFCs). By determining the originating entity and controlling the allocation of network device resources based on the originating entity (in contrast to on a per valid IPv6 address basis), a network service provider can manage its network device resources, such as in a manner to prevent a depletion of resources caused by an originating entity using a plethora valid IPv6 addresses, or a malicious denial-of-service attack.01-27-2011
20110019682METHOD, MEDIA GATEWAY AND MEDIA GATEWAY CONTROLLER FOR MAINTAINING NAT ADDRESS MAPPING TABLE - A method for maintaining a Network Address Translation (NAT) address mapping table, a Media Gateway (MG) and a Media Gateway Controller (MGC) are disclosed herein. The method for maintaining the NAT address mapping table includes: the MG creates a NAT address mapping table context as instructed by a MGC, where the NAT address mapping table context stores at least one NAT address mapping entry; and the MG operates the NAT address mapping table context to maintain the NAT address mapping entry stored in the NAT address mapping table context. Through the embodiments of the present invention, the NAT address mapping table can be maintained on the MG by operating the created NAT address mapping table context.01-27-2011
20110019680METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR APPLYING RELATIONS BETWEEN PACKAGE BASE AND EXTENSION - A method, an apparatus, and a system for applying relations between a package base and a package extension are disclosed herein. The method includes: A Media Gateway Controller (MGC) delivers an audit command request to a Media Gateway (MG), where the audit command request carries a package extension information property indicating audit of base-extended relationships of packages supported by the MG; the MGC receives an audit command response returned by the MG, where the audit command response carries the base-extended relationships of the packages supported by the MG; the MGC applies the packages according to the base-extended relationships of the packages supported by the MG; the MG receives a command request delivered by the MGC, where the command request carries a package extension information property whose value is the base-extended relationships of packages supported by the MGC; and the MG applies the packages according to the base-extended relationships of the packages supported by the MGC.01-27-2011
20110019681METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR CARRYING SYNCHRONIZATION OVER ETHERNET AND OPTICAL TRANSPORT NETWORK - The present disclosure relates to carrying synchronization through Ethernet, Optical Transport Network (OTN), and other asynchronous protocols. In one exemplary embodiment, timing markers or symbols are used in packets to enable a downstream device to recover timing based upon a time differential between markers or symbols. Advantageously, enabling Ethernet, OTN, etc. to carry synchronous information will de-risk switching from SONET/SDH to Ethernet and/or OTN for service providers. The present disclosure also includes frame decomposition scheme of the Ethernet stream. Ethernet packets are broken into fixed bandwidth and excess bandwidth. The fixed bandwidth is subdivided into fixed (negotiated) flits, with each flit corresponding to a specific user or combination of users like a private tunnel. This offers service providers a method to provide deterministic and more secure bandwidth over Ethernet to multiple clients.01-27-2011
20110019678ROUTING FRAMES IN A SHORTEST PATH COMPUTER NETWORK FOR A MULTI-HOMED LEGACY BRIDGE NODE - Methods, apparatus, and products for routing frames in a shortest path computer network for a multi-homed legacy bridge, wherein the network includes a plurality of bridges. At least two of the plurality of bridges operate as edge bridges through which the frames ingress and egress the network. A first edge bridge identifies a legacy bridge nickname for a legacy bridge connected to the network through the first edge bridge and a second edge bridge using active-active link aggregation. The first bridge receives a frame from the legacy bridge and determines, in dependence upon the frame's destination node address, an egress bridge nickname for a third bridge through which a destination node connects to the network. The first bridge then adds the legacy bridge nickname and the egress bridge nickname to the frame and routes the frame to the third bridge in dependence upon the egress bridge nickname.01-27-2011
20110019679NETWORK RELAY APPARATUS - The network relay apparatus is provided. The network relay apparatus includes: multiple ports, each being provided to send and receive a frame to and from one of multiple external devices; and a frame processor configured to perform flooding, in order to relay a received frame that is received via one of the multiple ports as a receiving port, with a preset flooding target according to an attribute of a transmit port that sends the received frame.01-27-2011
20110019684Multimedia Content Sharing Via Audio-Video Communication - A communications system sets up a multimedia session between two terminals (STB01-27-2011
20110026538NETWORK DEVICE OF TRANSFER SWITCHING TYPE AND FRAME TRANSFER METHOD - A network device of is a network device that transfers frames by repeating, in a constant cycle, a reserved transfer interval and a free transfer interval. The network device includes a transmission port, a cycle timer, a mode switching control unit that monitors a transfer state of the transmission port and selects a store-and-forward system when the transmission port is in the transfer process and selects a cut-through system when the transmission port is not in the transfer process, and a transfer prohibition control unit that selects the cut-through system as a transfer system when a non-reserved frame is transmitted and switches a transfer method of the non-reserved frame to the store-and-forward system when a reserved transfer interval is established, with reference to the cycle timer.02-03-2011
20110026536DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION AMONG CUSTOMER PREMISE EQUIPMENT DEVICES - A method of initializing, provisioning, and managing a cable modem and a customer premise equipment device includes sending a customized configuration file to the cable modem. The configuration file contains service provisioning information and further includes information indicative of a device-to-device communication configuration. A message is passed from the cable modem to the customer premise equipment device indicative of the device-to-device communication configuration. The customer premise equipment device is initialized for device-to-device communication with any other customer premise equipment devices in accordance with the device-to-device communication configuration indicated in the message, which relates to physical layer and data link layer communications among customer premise equipment devices. In this way, the customer premise equipment device knows how to communicate with other customer premise equipment devices, for example, at the same subscriber location.02-03-2011
20110026537Method and Apparatus for Communication of Data Packets between Local Networks - Method and arrangement for communication of data packets between a first device (D02-03-2011
20110026534Packet Switch with Separate Look Ahead, Computation, and Shift Phases - A packet switch architecture that can switch optical packets at high throughputs without using any random access memory, without fragmenting variable length packets into fixed length fragments and reassembling them, and without converting the optical packets into electronic packets. Programmable delay lines are use which delay the output of each packet for a programmable amount which may be re-programmed while the packet is being delayed by the programmable delay line. Programmable delay line controllers manages the delays imposed by the programmable delay lines so as to have a look-ahead phase during which information about the packets is gathered and a shift phase during which the sequence of packets is shifted to match an output sequence.02-03-2011
20110026532Forwarding Data Through a Three-Stage Clos-Network Packet Switch with Memory at each Stage - Examples are disclosed for forwarding data partitioned into one or more cells through at least a portion of a three-stage memory-memory-memory (MMM) input-queued Clos-network (IQC) packet switch. In some examples, each module of the three-stage MMM IQC packet switch includes a virtual queue and a manager that are configured in cooperation with one another to forward cells through at least a portion of the switch. The cells may have been partitioned and stored at an input port for the switch and destined for an output port for the switch.02-03-2011
20110032946DELIVERY DELAY COMPENSATION ON SYNCHRONISED COMMUNICATION DEVICES IN A PACKET SWITCHING NETWORK - The present invention relates to the synchronizing of equipment, and more precisely to the transporting of synchronization signals via a communication network with a view to inter-synchronizing the equipment. The invention concerns a reference station able to deliver packets in a packet switching network to communication devices connected to the network. According to the invention, the reference station comprises means for inserting at least a temporal offset in said packets, wherein said temporal offset describes data delivery duration on a pre-determined path of said network. The invention relates also to a sending communication device and to a receiving communication device.02-10-2011
20110032945SIGNALING OF ATTACHMENT CIRCUIT STATUS AND AUTOMATIC DISCOVERY OF INTER-CHASSIS COMMUNICATION PEERS - In an embodiment, a method of signaling status at a routing device is provided. In this method, the routing device establishes an inter-chassis control plane channel session with a remote routing device. Here, the routing device and the remote routing device are linked to a multi-homed routing device. The routing device then synchronizes with the remote routing device by way of the inter-chassis control plane channel session to identify a state of a link from the routing device to the multi-homed routing device. The state of the link is thereafter advertised by way of Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). Additionally, a method of discovering inter-chassis communication peers via BGP between the first and remote routing devices is provided.02-10-2011
20090034545Multicasting - In one embodiment, a computer system comprises a multicast node to receive a multicast signal indicating a multicast content, in response to the multicast signal, apply a multicast notification signal to at least one remote client managed by the remote computing server, receive, from the at least one remote client, a subscription signal indicating that the at least one remote client subscribes to the multicast content, and in response to the subscription signal, connect the at least one remote client to the multicast node on the remote computing server, whereby the at least one remote client accesses the multicast content.02-05-2009
20090034543OPERATING SYSTEM RECOVERY ACROSS A NETWORK - A system comprises a first network device and a second network device coupled via a network to the first network device. The first network device initiates a recovery across the network of an operating system of the second network device.02-05-2009
20100158025BRIDGE APPARATUS AND VIRTUAL NETWORK SWITCHING METHOD - A bridge apparatus creates, transmits and circulates pass checking frames having virtual network identifiers in a ring network, and collects a passing/non-passing state of each virtual network identifier. The bridge apparatus creates, transmits and circulates a usage state checking frame in the ring network, and collects a used/unused state of the virtual network identifier of each bridge apparatus. The bridge apparatus creates, transmits and circulates a connection changing frame to change the virtual network identifier having the used state and the non-passing state into the virtual network identifier having the unused state and the passing state. Each bridge apparatus changes the virtual network identifier having the used state and the non-passing state into the virtual network identifier having the unused state and the passing state.06-24-2010
20110044347Residential Gateway - A particular residential gateway includes a connector interface to receive a composite signal including voice data, video data, and network data via one or more communication lines and a power coupling device to receive power via the one or more communication lines. The residential gateway includes a voice module to route the voice data to a voice-enabled device coupled to a network interface, a video module to route the video data to a video-enabled device coupled to the network interface, and a network module to route the network data to a computing device coupled to the network interface. The residential gateway further includes a testing module to communicate test results to an external device via a data communication interface. At least one of the voice module, the video module, the network module, and the testing module is powered using the power received by the power coupling device.02-24-2011
20110044348LDP IGP SYNCHRONIZATION FOR BROADCAST NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for LDP-IGP synchronization for broadcast networks. In one embodiment of the invention, responsive to a network element bringing up an adjacency with a Designated Router of the broadcast network on a broadcast interface, that network element advertises in its Link State Advertisement (LSA) a peer-to-peer (P2P) adjacency to each member of the broadcast network that has bidirectional IGP communication with the network element instead of advertising a pseudo-node adjacency to the pseudo-node of the broadcast network. Each P2P adjacency includes a high cost to discourage use of those links for transit traffic. After LDP becomes operational with all neighbors on the broadcast interface, the network element advertises the pseudo-node adjacency instead of the P2P adjacencies. Accordingly, transit traffic is avoided through that network element until LDP is operational with all neighbors on the broadcast interface.02-24-2011
20110044346 Network Bridge and a Method of Operating Thereof - A network bridge comprising two ports for connection to two networks, a spanning tree controller and a wireless bridge link controller for each port. The ports employ an adaptive modulation technique. The wireless bridge link controller is connected to the port to exchange physical layer information with said port. When the port detects a change of its PHY mode, it sets the path cost of the link to a value configured for the new PHY mode and forces the bridge to recalculate its spanning tree. The wireless bridge link controller is also connected to the spanning tree controller. If the bridge detects that it has not received BPDUs for a certain time period and the timer will expire soon, the bridge forces the port, via the wireless bridge link controller, to use a more robust PHY mode.02-24-2011
20090022167PACKET FORWARDING SYSTEM AND PACKET FORWARDING DEVICE - In a forwarding device connected to a network including a plurality of communication nodes connected to each other, in which a plurality of communication routes, each for forwarding a signal through at least one of the communication nodes can be present between arbitrary ones of the communication nodes, a forwarding method according to the present invention determines that the received packet is a BPDU or a local BPDU, and discards the BPDU if the received packet is the BPDU and fetches an original BPDU from the local BPDU if it is the local BPDU. In the case where the BPDU is to be transmitted, the BPDU is created and wrapped in a format of the local BPDU. Then, the wrapped BPDU is broadcasted. In this manner, the local BPDU can be exchanged without affecting the other bridges having a normal spanning tree function.01-22-2009
20110116509METHOD FOR THE PROVISION OF GATEWAY ANYCAST VIRTUAL MAC REACHABILITY IN EXTENDED SUBNETS - A method and apparatus is disclosed for providing gateway anycast virtual MAC reachability in extended subnets. When an extended L2 subnet spans more than one geographical location, it is desirable that the gateway MAC addresses learned in each location be the same across all IP hosts. Accordingly, the gateway MAC address may be preserved (i.e., programmed) in more than one port on a bridge, such as both a local port and a LAN extension port. The bridge may forward traffic having the anycast MAC address to the closest instance of the MAC address, rather than replicating the traffic to the multiple ports on which the anycast MAC address is programmed. If the gateway reachable on the local port goes down, the frame may be forwarded to the local gateway in the second layer 2 subnet over the LAN extension port.05-19-2011
20110128967SYSTEM, METHOD, PROGRAM ELEMENT AND COMPUTER-ACCESSIBLE MEDIUM FOR FORWARDING MEDIA CONTROL MESSAGES - A Media Gateway Control Apparatus/Arrangement (06-02-2011
20110211588GATEWAY WITH HTTP PROCESSING - Embodiments of the present invention relate to an apparatus and method for providing an end user of a network terminal in a local network with an access link to an external network. According to an embodiment of the present invention, a network node further includes a control unit arranged to transmit a local hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) response including detailed information to at least one network terminal in said local network using an earlier original HTTP request towards said external network made by said at least one network terminal in the local network.09-01-2011
20110211585PACKET RELAY DEVICE - A packet relay device determines a port to be placed on standby in a link aggregation, determines whether there is an active port among ports belonging to redundant network interfaces, and, if a network interface has no active port, places the network interface on standby. The packet relay device monitors whether a failure has occurred in an active network interface and, if a failure is detected, activates a standby network interface and places the failed network interface on standby.09-01-2011
20100027554METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR IMPLEMENTING A POLICY FOR A ROUTER - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for implementing a policy for a router are disclosed. One method includes providing a meta administrator interface configured to facilitate the specification of one or more rules that form a policy definition. The method further includes automatically generating, based on the policy definition, an administrator interface for inputting rule data associated with the policy definition. Even further, the method includes storing the input rule data in one or more data structures associated with a router.02-04-2010
20100027553Communications Network Bridge And A Communications System Comprising Such A Bridge - A bridge for linking a first communications network to a second communications network is taught. The bridge comprises a first bridge module linked to the first communications network and a second bridge module linked to the second communications network. The first bridge module is linked to the second bridge module by only an analog audio link and a General Purpose Input Output call negotiation signalling link such that generic digital data cannot effectively pass between the first communications network and the second communications network through the bridge elements. There is also provided a network terminal for connection to a network connected to the bridge and communications system comprising the bridge and first communications network.02-04-2010
20100027552CLOUD COMPUTING GATEWAY, CLOUD COMPUTING HYPERVISOR, AND METHODS FOR IMPLEMENTING SAME - Embodiments of the present invention provide a cloud gateway system, a cloud hypervisor system, and methods for implementing same. The cloud gateway system extends the security, manageability, and quality of service membrane of a corporate enterprise network into cloud infrastructure provider networks, enabling cloud infrastructure to be interfaced as if it were on the enterprise network. The cloud hypervisor system provides an interface to cloud infrastructure provider management systems and infrastructure instances that enables existing enterprise systems management tools to manage cloud infrastructure substantially the same as they manage local virtual machines via common server hypervisor APIs.02-04-2010
20110085560System and Method for Implementing a Virtual Switch - Systems and methods for implementing a virtual switch are disclosed. A system may include a plurality of information handling systems and a network of physical switches interfaced between the plurality of information handling systems and configured to communicatively couple the plurality of information handling systems to each other. The network of physical switches may include a plurality of participating physical switches. The plurality of participating physical switch may be configured as a virtual switch such that the plurality of participating physical switches appears as a single logical switch to devices external to the plurality of participating physical switches.04-14-2011
20120243547TOKEN-BASED CORRELATION OF CONTROL SESSIONS FOR POLICY AND CHARGING CONTROL OF A DATA SESSION THROUGH A NAT - A method of handling packets sent across a packet switched network comprising a policy server acting as a policy and charging rules function. The method comprises providing a first set of policy rules at said policy server, and installing these from the policy server into an access gateway over a first service control session. These policy rules cause packets belonging to a given IP session to be diverted by the access gateway to a network address translator. At the network address translator, an IP source address of said packets is translated into a translated IP source address identifying a deep packet inspection node. The network address translator forwards the packets to the deep packet inspection node configured to perform deep packet inspection of IP packets.09-27-2012
20090310615Logical geographical and subscriber ONT subgroups in support of fiber-to-the-premises (FTTP) architecture - Example embodiments of the present invention help extend service provider visibility to all premises equipment (CPE) devices that are ranged with an Optical Line Terminal (OLT) by associating an Optical Network Terminal (ONT) within each device (CPE-ONT), such as a personal computer (PC), set-top box (STB), broadband home router (BHR), or analog telephone adapter (ATA). Therefore, each CPE device is managed independently via the CPE-ONT integrated with it. This allows each CPE device to terminate only optical signals supporting communications supported by the CPE device. Further, each CPE device has access to the entire GPON bandwidth, thereby increasing performance and eliminating bottlenecks caused by electrical communications over 10/100/1000 BaseT interfaces.12-17-2009
20090310614System and Method for Establishment of a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Tunnel - In one embodiment, a method for receiving a request from a first interface to establish a session with at least a second interface in a communication network is provided. The request is transmitted to an application layer signaling device via an application layer signaling protocol dialog, wherein the application layer signaling protocol dialog is configured to facilitate communication between the first interface and the application layer signaling device. The method further includes communicating parameters for establishing a session tunnel to a first edge router via the application layer signaling protocol dialog, wherein the first edge router is configured to dynamically establish the session tunnel between the first edge router and at least a second edge router, wherein the second edge router is positioned proximate to the at least second interface in the communication network.12-17-2009
20110243147ROUTER DESIGN FOR 3D NETWORK-ON-CHIP - A network-on-chip router which includes an input buffer, an input controller connected to said input buffer, an arbiter connected to said input controller, a crossbar connected to said arbiter and said input buffer, and an output buffer connected to said crossbar. The network-on-chip router minimizes propagation time of data through the router by ensuring that the propagation delay of data through an input buffer is less than the combined propagation delay of data through an input controller and arbiter.10-06-2011
20120134368DYNAMIC DISCOVERY MECHANISMS VIA INTER-DOMAIN ROUTING PROTOCOL - In an embodiment, a method is provided at which it is used in a device. In this method, a logical identifier assigned to the device is identified and additionally, a mesh group identifier identifying a mesh group is identified. The logical identifier and the mesh group identifier are encoded in a routing message, which is used in an inter-domain routing protocol, and this routing message is transmitted to a reflector device in communication with the device. The reflector device is configured to transmit the routing message to a remote device included in the computer network.05-31-2012
20110085564Gateway for Transporting Out-Of-Band Messaging Signals - A Cable Modem Termination System (CMTS) having a gateway configured to output signals on over data tunnels for transfer over a cable network to Customer Premises Equipment (CPE). Each data tunnel is preferably characterized as a one-way data stream of out-of-band (OOB) messaging signals.04-14-2011
20110085561Incremental Adaptive Packet Routing In A Multi-Dimensional Network - Illustrated is a computer system and method that includes a Processing Element (PE) to generate a data packet that is routed along a shortest path that includes a plurality of routers in a multiple dimension network. The system and method further include a router, of the plurality of routers, to de-route the data packet from the shortest path to an additional path, the de-route to occur where the shortest path is congested and the additional path links the router and an additional router in a dimension of the multiple dimension network.04-14-2011
20110085559Transit Switches in a Network of Logical Switches - A Layer 2 network switch is partitionable into a plurality of switch fabrics. The single-chassis switch is partitionable into a plurality of logical switches, each associated with one of the virtual fabrics. The logical switches behave as complete and self-contained switches. A logical switch fabric can span multiple single-chassis switch chassis. Logical switches are connected by inter-switch links that can be either dedicated single-chassis links or logical links. An extended inter-switch link can be used to transport traffic for one or more logical inter-switch links. Physical ports of the chassis are assigned to logical switches and are managed by the logical switch. Legacy switches that are not partitionable into logical switches can serve as transit switches between two logical switches.04-14-2011
20110085562AGGREGATING PORTS WHILE ALLOWING ACCESS TO SINGLETON PORTS - Disclosed is a method for aggregating parallel data links connecting two end-point devices into a logical link. If one of the parallel data links is a multi-point link, then an end-point device can still access that link to route traffic to an end station on the link (that is, to a device other than the other end-point device of the logical data link). In the terminology of this disclosure, the logical aggregated link is accessed through an “aggregated port” on an end-point device, while the constituent multi-point link is accessed directly through a “singleton port.” By assigning a smaller cost to the aggregated port than to the singleton port, embodiments avoid creating routing loops. In some embodiments, the aggregation is performed at Layer 2 of the Open System Interconnection seven-layer protocol model. Then, the methods of the present invention work well with existing IEEE 802.1 bridging architectures and protocols.04-14-2011
20120134367SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT AND STUFFING CONTROL UNIT - A signal distribution circuit includes: first to n-th input lines on which first to n-th signals are respectively input; first to (n−1)th selectors each of which selects one of two inputs under the control of a select signal; and a first output line on which the first signal is output and second to n-th output lines on which output signals of the first to (n−1)th selectors are respectively output, wherein: the first and second inputs of the first selector are supplied with the first signal and the second signal, respectively, the first and second inputs of the i-th selector (i is an integer between 2 and (n−1)) are supplied with the output signal of the (i−1)th selector and the (i+1)th signal, respectively, and any of the selectors, when selected by the select signal, selects the second input and, when not selected by the select signal, selects the first input.05-31-2012
20090016367SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A PLURALITY OF NETWORKS - A communication system for communication between a plurality of networks through a NAPT (Network Address Port Translation) device has communication terminals provided in a local network and a global network, a main device for managing communication information of the communication terminals, and a table provided in the main device for storing identification information, a local address, and a global address of each communication terminal in association with each other. When a communication terminal originates a call, the table is referred to, and when the destination of the call is a communication terminal outside the network, the global address of the NAPT device of the remote network is used as the mutual destination address, whereas when the destination of the call is a communication terminal present in the same network, the local address effective only in the local network is used.01-15-2009
20090016366Packet transfer apparatus and packet transfer method - Disclosed herewith is a packet transfer apparatus that carries out 1+1 protection switching for traffics to be received variably in both length and cycle. The apparatus enables flows to be multiplexed and the link usage efficiency to be improved without generating any buffer overflow errors. The data transfer apparatus, upon receiving the third sequentially numbered data from the first communication route before receiving the preceding second sequentially numbered data, stores the received third data in a buffer. And upon receiving the second sequentially numbered data from the second communication route, the apparatus sends the second and third data sequentially. Then, upon receiving the third sequentially numbered data from the second communication route before receiving the second sequentially numbered data, the apparatus sends the third data when a predetermined waiting time expires.01-15-2009
20090016365Intra-domain and inter-domain bridging over MPLS using MAC distribution via border gateway protocol - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving, by a first autonomous system border router (ASBR) of a first autonomous system (AS), a first plurality of provider-provisioned media access control (B-MAC) addresses via Interior Border Gateway Protocol (I-BGP). Each of first plurality of B-MAC addresses is associated with a provider edge (PE) device of the first AS. The first ASBR sends the first plurality of B-MAC addresses to a second ASBR of a second AS using Exterior Border Gateway Protocol (E-BGP). The first ASBR also receives via E-BGP a second plurality of B-MAC addresses each of which is associated with a PE device of the second AS. The first ASBR then distributes the second plurality of B-MAC addresses to each of the PE devices of the first AS using I-BGP.01-15-2009
20110085563Virtualization Aware Network Switch - A network switch includes a port coupled to a host, and a profile. The profile includes a key associated with a virtual machine on the host, and information for configuring the port for the virtual machine. The switch receives communication on another port with the key and configures the other port for the virtual machine. A method includes coupling a host with a virtual machine to a port of a network switch, receiving communications from the virtual machine on the port, and creating a profile with a key for identifying data associated with the virtual machine and with information for configuring the switch to route data associated with the virtual machine through the port, receiving communications with the key information at another port, and modifying the information to route data for the virtual machine through the other port.04-14-2011
20100014529Network Communication Apparatus, Network Communication Method, And Address Management Apparatus - To connect arbitrary network communication apparatuses by selecting an appropriate route or identifying an IP address in an environment which includes a network using plural NAT routers, which is hierachically connected through plural NAT routers for distributing private IPs.01-21-2010
20100183019METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING DATA PACKETS TO MULTIPLE NETWORK ADDRESSES - A network device for transferring a data packet from a source address to a destination address is provided. The network device includes a plurality of network addresses for indicating locations of a plurality of network processing units, and further including a data packet distributing unit for transferring a data packet to the network processing units in sequence by replacing a destination address of the data packet with the network addresses. The data packet distributing unit performs the actions of determining whether the data packet has been transferred to each of the network processing units, transferring the data packet to a network processing unit after replacing the destination address of the data packet with a corresponding network address if the data packet has not been transferred to the network processing unit, and outputting the data packet if the data packet has been transferred to each of the processing units.07-22-2010
20090041042SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING COMPRESSION FOR COMPUTING CLIENTS BASED ON A LATENCY LEVEL - A system and method for adjusting a level of compression for endpoint devices. Endpoint devices in a network can stream audio/video traffic over a network. Such a connection between the endpoint devices can be reserved with guarantees of latency being obtained. Latency guarantees across multiple intermediary switches can be used to define a compression level for the end devices.02-12-2009
20100027555METHOD FOR PROCESSING LINK STATE ADVERTISEMENT AND ROUTINGDEVICE - A method for processing a Link State Advertisement and a routing device are provided. The method includes: receiving a Link State Advertisement via an interface; obtaining an address of the interface, which is a first Link-local Interface Address, and an address contained in the Link State Advertisement, which is a second Link-local Interface Address; and performing deletion related processing for the Link State Advertisement if the first Link-local Interface address is identical to the second Link-local Interface Address.02-04-2010
20090323707PACKET SWITCH AND SWITCHING METHOD FOR SWITCHING VARIABLE LENGTH PACKETS - A packet switch for switching variable length packets, wherein each of output port interfaces includes a buffer memory for storing transmission packets, a transmission priority controller for classifying, based on a predetermined algorithm, transmission packets passed from a packet switching unit into a plurality of queue groups to which individual bandwidths are assigned respectively, and queuing said transmission packets in said buffer memory so as to form a plurality of queues according to transmission priority in each of said queue groups, and a packet read-out controller for reading out said transmission packets from each of said queue groups in the buffer memory according to the order of transmission priority of the packets while guaranteeing the bandwidth assigned to the queue group.12-31-2009
20110149980EFFICIENT GENERATION OF VPN-BASED BGP UPDATES - In one embodiment, a router may store a “neighbor table” for storing the router's Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) neighbors. Each neighbor corresponds to a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance and associated VRF identifier (ID), and the neighbor table indexes the BGP neighbors according to their respective VRF ID. In response to initiating a BGP update generation for a BGP table having BGP network entries, each entry having an associated VRF ID that indicates to which VRF instance the BGP entry is to be advertised, a single lookup operation for each BGP entry is performed into the neighbor table based on the corresponding VRF ID of each BGP entry to determine a corresponding VRF update group of indexed BGP neighbors to which each BGP entry is to be advertised. Accordingly, a shared BGP update may be generated for each VRF update group for the initiated BGP update generation.06-23-2011
20110149987System and Method for Route Data in an Anycast Environment - A method of routing data in a network includes sending an instruction to a router to statically route outbound traffic to a firewall farm having an anycast address, identifying prefixes of endpoints that communicate with router, instructing a firewall router to send a route advertisement to the network announcing that the firewall router is the subsequent best hop for data bound for the endpoints, detecting a change in network condition, and sending another instruction to the router to route outbound traffic to another firewall farm having the anycast address after detecting the change.06-23-2011
20100008370HOME GATEWAY DEVICE - The present invention relates to a home gateway device. The home gateway device comprises a main processor to generate information process signals and control signals, a computer bus signal Ethernet adapter unit connected to the main processor to translate the signals between computer bus signals and Ethernet signals, an Ethernet frame process unit connected to the computer bus signal Ethernet adapter unit to forward the received Ethernet frame based on a prearranged policy, an inner interface unit connected to the Ethernet frame process unit to connect interior networking devices, and an outer communication module connected to the main processor and the Ethernet frame process unit. The centralized control of the home gateway device of the present invention can decrease the requirement that the household appliances should be intellectualized, thereby achieving more flexible control and reducing the cost. The uplink and downlink Ethernet signals are controlled by using the prearranged policy to separate the Ethernet signals for Internet access from the Ethernet signals of the household information appliances, and avoid the threat due to the unsafe factors.01-14-2010
20100008375LABEL SWITCHING IN FIBRE CHANNEL NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus are provided for label switched routing in fibre channel networks. Techniques are provided for implementing label switching based on particular characteristics of fibre channel networks. By using label switching, mechanisms such as traffic engineering, security, and tunneling through networks that do not support fibre channel frames can be implemented.01-14-2010
20100054266Method, device and module for optimising the remote management of home network devices - A method is disclosed for managing a home network which is connected by means of a home network gateway device to an external network, the home network comprising at least a first TR-069 compatible device and the external network having at least one auto configuration server (ACS) adapted and arranged for allowing automatic configuration of the TR-069 compatible device, characterised in that it comprises monitoring TR-069 sessions between the at least one TR-069 compatible device and the at least one ACS, in the home network gateway device.03-04-2010
20090316707Services Switch Form Factor - A media gateway to distribute network services and content throughout a home or residence is described. Generally, the media gateway includes a structured wiring panel, a services switch mounted within the structured wiring panel to receive network services from one or more network service providers, and to distribute the network services to a number of data outlets located at the residence. The media gateway may also include one or more patch panels mounted within the structured wiring panel to provide connectivity between the services switch and the data outlets, and an uninterruptable power supply (UPS) mounted within the structured wiring panel to supply backup electrical power to the services switch and/or one or more of the plurality of data outlets in the event of a main power failure.12-24-2009
20100061387NETWORK SIGNAL AUTO SWITCHING DEVICE THAT PREVENTS INTERRUPTION OF WAN SIGNAL - For installation in an electronic apparatus, for example, computer, a network signal auto switching device is disclosed having a circuit module that has a plurality of signal I/O ports, transformers and an automatic switch device, the automatic switch device having a plurality of signal directioning components respectively electrically connected to the signal I/O ports and a switch operable to control close/open circuit status of the signal directioning components such that a user can control signal transmission from one first signal I/O port to a second signal I/O port directly for output.03-11-2010
20100061384GATEWAY SYSTEM WITH AUTOMATIC DISPATCH MECHANISM AND METHOD THEREOF - The method for automatically dispatching frames applied to a gateway comprises the steps of: using a first transceiver module to receive a plurality of frames from a network system; storing the frames in corresponding dispatch registers if at least a portion of the bits of the frames match one of a plurality of predetermined values; scheduling a dispatch order of the dispatch registers in accordance with a dispatch request; and dispatching frames stored in the dispatch registers to a second transceiver module in accordance with the dispatch order.03-11-2010
20100238944SYSTEM HAVING A PLURALITY OF NODES CONNECTED IN MULTI-DIMENSIONAL MATRIX, METHOD OF CONTROLLING SYSTEM AND APPARATUS - A system has a plurality of nodes connected in a multi-dimensional matrix and having node addresses, respectively, each of the nodes having a processor, and a router for transmitting a request packet to a node adjacent to its own node located in n+1th dimension when the address of nth dimension of its own node is matched to the address of nth dimension of the target node, transmitting a response packet to a node adjacent to its own node located in nth dimension when the address of n+1th dimension of its own node is matched to the address of n+1th dimension of the response packet, wherein the router terminates a request packet when the address of the request packet is fully matched to the node address of its own node in all the dimensions, transfers the data conveyed by the request packet to the processor of its own node for processing.09-23-2010
20110176552MANAGING INTERWORKING COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOLS - Systems and methods for managing interworking protocols are provided. According to one embodiment, a service management system (SMS) communicatively coupled with multiple service processing switches of a service provider provisions transport network interfaces of the service processing switches to provide a transport between subscriber interfaces of the service processing switches. The subscriber interfaces are configured to communicate data in accordance with a first protocol. The transport network interfaces configured to communicate data in accordance with a second protocol. The SMS causes a first-protocol-over-second-protocol (FPoSP) Virtual Private Network (VPN) to be created through which subscriber sites securely exchange data by establishing a virtual router (VR) within the service processing switches corresponding to each subscriber interface. The VRs communicate the data among the service processing switches by encapsulating packets received from the subscriber sites within packets of the second protocol and transmitting the encapsulated packets through the transport network interfaces.07-21-2011
20110080918POWER OVER ETHERNET MANAGEMENT DEVICES AND CONNECTION BETWEEN ETHERNET DEVICES - In one embodiment, a connection is maintained between a pair of ethernet ports that have circuitry connected in series with the ports and receiving power-over-ethernet (PoE) from one of the ports, by providing a controllable bypass circuit coupled to the pair of ethernet ports in parallel with the circuitry receiving power-over-ethernet, sensing a preselected condition, and opening and closing the bypass circuit in response to the presence or absence of the preselected condition. Power sourcing equipment (PSE) may to supply the one of the ports with power over ethernet, and the circuitry may transports data between the pair of ethernet ports. The circuitry may also supply the switch with a control signal in response to the detection of the preselected condition.04-07-2011
20110080917METHOD, PROCESS AND SYSTEM FOR SHARING DATA IN A HETEROGENEOUS STORAGE NETWORK - A method, process and system of controlling the transmission of data in a heterogeneous environment having mainframe based storage using FICON and an open system based storage using FC. The invention bridges the heterogeneous environment while maintaining DASD/Disk neutrality. The bridge is a gateway programmed to permit applications residing on the mainframe or open system to map logic paths thereby eliminating or reducing the need to store data prior to transmission. The gateway is able to appear to the first storage device as a standard CTC connection to a mainframe, while appearing to the open system as a number of SCSI tape drives.04-07-2011
20100135308INTEGRATED GATEWAY APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATIONS METHOD - An integrated gateway apparatus includes a policy storage for storing therein a first information on message filtering and switching policies for messages received from heterogeneous devices in lower networks via network interfaces; a device management unit for extracting a second information on the messages, the devices and the network interfaces; a layer-basis filter unit for performing, based on the first and the second information, the message filtering and switching on the messages on a layer basis; and an integrated switch management unit for providing the first information to the layer-basis filter unit and controlling the layer-basis filtering unit. The layer-basis filter unit includes a switch filter unit, a route filter unit and a gateway filter unit for performing the message filtering and switching in a MAC layer, in a network layer and a transport layer and in an application layer, respectively.06-03-2010
20110096789Isolating network traffic in multi-tenant virtualization enviroments - Managing data in a server system includes providing a plurality of servers, each having an internal gateway/switch that is accessible from outside the server, providing a plurality of virtual servers on at least some of the servers, where each of the virtual servers is accessible by the internal gateway/switch of the corresponding server, and accessing the data using the internal gateway/switch, where the internal gateway/switch determines which particular one of the virtual servers contain the data and then accesses the particular virtual server to provide the data. Managing data in a server system may also include associating portions of the data to tenants of the server system. Each of the servers may maintain a table that correlates tenants with the virtual servers maintained thereby and the internal gateway/switch may use the table to determine which particular one of the virtual servers contains data for a particular tenant.04-28-2011
20110085557Partitioning of Switches and Fabrics into Logical Switches and Fabrics04-14-2011
20110075676METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES USING A MESSAGE INTERMEDIATION MODULE - A system and method for managing multimedia messaging is described. A system includes a messaging intermediation module having, a sender-side interface configured to communicate a multimedia message between the messaging intermediation module and a data gateway of a multimedia messaging system, a recipient-side interface configured to communicate the multimedia message between the messaging intermediation module, an Internet gateway, a message store and forward (MSF) server, and another messaging intermediation module, a message storage module configured to store the multimedia message for forwarding to the Internet gateway, the MSF server, and the other messaging intermediation module, and a workflow engine configured to process the multimedia message. In response to the processing, the workflow engine forwards the multimedia message to the Internet gateway, forwards the multimedia message to the MSF server, or forwards the multimedia message to the other messaging intermediation module. Other embodiments are also described.03-31-2011
20110075673Methods and Apparatus for Distribution of IP Layer Routing Information in Peer-to-Peer Overlay Networks - Methods and apparatus for distribution of IP layer routing information in peer-to-peer overlay networks. A method includes transmitting an advertisement to a first subnet advertising the accessibility of subnets and including unique subnet identifiers to disambiguate overlapping addresses, receiving a request from a network that includes the first subnet to communicate with a network that includes the second subnet, establishing a first tunnel with the second subnet and a second tunnel with the first subnet, and directing transmissions between the tunnels based on policy. An apparatus includes means for transmitting the advertisement, means for receiving a request, means for establishing the first tunnel with the second subnet and the second tunnel with the first subnet, and means for directing transmissions between the first and second tunnels based on policy information.03-31-2011
20110249683TRANSMISSION APPARATUS FOR VPN OPTIMIZATION BY DEFRAGMENTATION AND DEDUPLICATION AND METHOD - A transmission apparatus for optimizing a virtual private network operates by defragmenting and deduplicating transfer of variable sized blocks. A large data object is converted to a plurality of data paragraphs by a fingerprinting method. Each data paragraph is cached and hashed. The hashes are transmitted to at least one satellite apparatus. Only data paragraphs which are not previously cached at each satellite are transferred.10-13-2011
20110249682SCALABLE DISTRIBUTED USER PLANE PARTITIONED TWO-STAGE FORWARDING INFORMATION BASE LOOKUP FOR SUBSCRIBER INTERNET PROTOCOL HOST ROUTES - Communication sessions are each homed on one of a plurality of line cards in a network element. Packets received by the network element are processed on the home card before being transmitted to a subscriber device, such as a mobile phone or laptop computer. When a packet is received by the network element, it is not necessarily received by the line card that serves as a home card for the respective session. The packet is switched within the network element from the receiving line card, i.e., the trunk card, to the home card. The network element identifies the home card by performing a lookup in a table duplicated on all the line cards using the least significant bits of the IP address in the packet. Using these bits to organize the table limits the size of the table and balances load among the line cards.10-13-2011
20090213862METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MIGRATING A PEER IN A DISTRIBUTED BGP SYSTEM - A method for peer migration in a distributed Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) system includes: disconnecting a peer relationship between a source BGP process and a network device, wherein first routing information received from the network device is recorded in a forwarding instruction process; establishing a peer relationship between a target BGP process and the network device, and receiving second routing information from the network device; and updating the first routing information recorded in the forwarding instruction process according to the second routing information.08-27-2009
20110080916CONFIGURABLE FRAME PROCESSING PIPELINE IN A PACKET SWITCH - Highly configurable frame processing pipelines are enabled in packet switches in an efficient manner which satisfies stringent area and power requirements. Frame processing pipelines are described that enable dynamic processing of different types of frames on a per frame basis.04-07-2011
20110075677NETWORK GATEWAY FOR TIME-CRITICAL AND MISSION-CRITICAL NETWORKS - A network gateway for time-critical and mission-critical networks is provided. The network gateway comprises a decision unit for determining, based on at least one network event; a processing unit for processing frames determined to be associated with the at least one service; a queue for buffering frames; and a traffic shaper for performing bandwidth management on frames stored in the queue.03-31-2011
20110069714METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SYMMETRIC ROUTING - The present invention includes a method, a system, and a computer readable medium for establishing a connection between hosts in a computer network with the connection configured for symmetrical forward and reverse routing. The method uses the following steps. First, a first host local routing table to route a packet from a first host to a first gateway according to a routing protocol. Next, the first gateway local routing table routes the packet from the first gateway to a first access router. After that, a first access router local routing table routes the packet from the first access router to a second access router. Then, a second access router local routing table routes the packet from the second access router to a second gateway. Finally, a second gateway local routing table routes the packet from the second gateway router to a second host.03-24-2011
20120201252METHOD & APPARATUS FOR THE DISTRIBUTION OF NETWORK TRAFFIC - A packet network system, such as an autonomous system, includes a plurality of packet network devices some of which are edge routers and some of which are core routers. Each of the edge and core routers include functionality that operates to receive network traffic, process the traffic as needed and to forward the traffic to its destination. Additionally, each router includes a traffic distribution function that operates to calculate path bandwidths for all of the paths over which the traffic can be forwarding through the system and to use the volume of traffic ingressing to the system, link utilization information and the calculated path bandwidth to redistribute the traffic in the system such that traffic loss in the system in minimized.08-09-2012
20120201253Multi-Adapter Link Aggregation for Adapters with Hardware Based Virtual Bridges - Mechanisms for providing a network adapter and functionality for performing link aggregation within a network adapter are provided. With these mechanisms, a network adapter is provided that includes a plurality of physical network ports for coupling to one or more switches of a data network and a link aggregation module, within the network adapter, and coupled to the plurality of physical network ports. The link aggregation module comprises logic for aggregating links associated with the plurality of physical network ports into a single virtual link. The link aggregation module interfaces with a virtual Ethernet bridge (VEB) of the network adapter to send data to the VEB and receive data from the VEB.08-09-2012
20110149986SWITCHING HUB, LINE CARD AND FRAME RELAY METHOD - A switching hub includes a plurality of ports including receiving ports for receiving a frame from outside and transmitting ports for transmitting the frame to outside, a distributed ID calculation portion for calculating a distributed ID based on the frame received by one of the receiving ports of the plurality of ports and adding the distributed ID to the frame, a first distribution table that stores a port ID for identifying the transmitting port for transmitting the frame associated with the distributed ID to outside, a second distribution table that stores the port ID associated with the distributed ID so that the correspondence relation is different from that of the first distribution table, a distribution table identification information adding portion for adding first table identification information for identifying the first distribution table or second table identification information for identifying the second distribution table to the frame, and a transmission distribution table access portion for obtaining the port ID stored in the first or second distribution table so as to be associated with the distributed ID that is added to the frame by referring to the first distribution table when the first table identification information is added to the frame and by referring to the second distribution table when the second table identification information is added to the frame.06-23-2011
20110149985DATA PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - Provided is a data communication technique in which overhead is reduced. A data processing apparatus includes a plurality of modules each of which executes data processing; a plurality of routers, which have input ports and output ports, for relaying data transmission among the plurality of modules; and a control unit for outputting a control signal to each of the plurality of routers to thereby control selection of router path. Each of the plurality of routers has a deciding unit for deciding an output port and output timing used in data transmission by utilizing a value of the control signal that has been input thereto.06-23-2011
20110149984CONFIGURATION MEMORY APPARATUS IN FPGA AND ROUTER SYSTEM USING THE SAME - Disclosed are a configuration memory apparatus and a router system using the same. The configuration memory apparatus includes: a selection unit selecting one of a first external device and a storage unit and receiving data; a register storing input data received from the selection unit; a storage unit storing data received from the register; and an I/O unit controlling transmission and reception of data to and from the register and a second external device.06-23-2011
20110149981DEADLOCK PREVENTION IN DIRECT NETWORKS OF ARBITRARY TOPOLOGY - Aspects of the invention pertain to routing packets in a computer system while avoiding deadlock. A turn rule is set according to unique identifiers associated with switches in the system. Numeric values of switches in possible turns are compared to determine whether a turn is permissible. The rule applies to all nodes in the system. The rule may be violated when using virtual channels. Here, a violation is permissible when using monotonically increasing virtual channel numbers or monotonically decreasing virtual channel numbers. Alternatively, the violations of the turn rule may be allowed if they force a packet to change to a later virtual channel in some fixed ordering of virtual channels. Deadlock can thus be avoided in many different types of architectures, including mesh, torus, butterfly and flattened butterfly configurations.06-23-2011
20100303089METHOD FOR OPERATING A DISTRIBUTED COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method for operating a dezentralized communication network with network nodes is provided. The method is based on protocols in conventional peer-to-peer networks. The method provides rapid searching of resources whereby each network node manages a table containing information regarding all the other network nodes, such that a network that contains the resource is immediately retrieved among the table entries. Furthermore, the table contains device names of technical components on which the network nodes are mapped, so that a technical component is directly addressed also via its device name without use of the search process.12-02-2010
20110211586METHOD, MEDIA GATEWAY AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING A FILTER RULE - A method, a Media Gateway (MG), and a system for managing a filter rule are disclosed. The method includes: The MG receives a processing message from a Media Gateway Controller (MGC); and the MG maintains the packet filter rule context according to the processing message, where the packet filter rule context includes at least one filter rule for filtering a packet received or sent by the MG. The processing message may be a message for creating, modifying or deleting the packet filter rule context. With the present disclosure, the MGC can manage the packet filter rule on the MG effectively.09-01-2011
20080240125INTERCONNECTING MULTIPLE MPLS NETWORKS - A network may include a first customer edge (CE) router and a second CE router. The first CE router may run an external border gateway protocol (EBGP) to exchange routing information with a first provider edge (PE) router that is in a first multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) network and may run an interior gateway protocol (IGP) to exchange routing information with the second CE router. The second CE router may run the IGP to exchange routing information with the first CE router and may run the EBGP to exchange routing information with a second PE router in a second MPLS network.10-02-2008
20100111094RELAY DEVICE, ACCESS ANALYSIS DEVICE, METHOD OF CONTROLLING RELAY DEVICE, AND STORAGE MEDIUM FOR THE SAME - When transmitting, to an information processing device (such as a server) via a telecommunications line, a plurality of pieces of information obtained in a target device that is a target of maintenance, a relay device (computer) refers to priority recognition information used to recognize priority in transmitting the pieces of maintenance information in order to determine the priority of each of the pieces of maintenance information, and transmits the plurality of pieces of maintenance information separately and sequentially to the information processing device via the telecommunication line on the basis of the determined priority.05-06-2010
20100254396METHOD OF CONNECTING VLAN SYSTEMS TO OTHER NETWORKS VIA A ROUTER - A local system including at least two VLANs may be connected to a local layer 2 switch to a wider network by providing a connection between the local switch and a router port and a single logical layer 3 interface may be assigned to the VLANs. A VLAN tag may be assigned to each connected VLAN. Outgoing data including the user's address, the intended recipient of the data and the VLAN tag assigned to the VLAN may be communicated to the router. The address of the user and the VLAN tag may be copied to a forwarding table, and the outgoing data may be forwarded to the wider network for delivery to the intended recipient. Incoming date intended for delivery to the user may be received at the assigned layer 3 interface and forwarded to the local switch for delivery to the user.10-07-2010
20100254395METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING DATA TO NODES - A method is described for routing data from a first node to a second node via a gateway. The second node is detected at the gateway, which determines a local identifier of the second node. A name and a global address are associated with the second node. The name and the global address are published to a name service, such that the first node can retrieve the global address based on the name. The gateway receives data from the first node that is addressed to the global address and transmits the data to the second node using the local identifier. The gateway includes software implementing a service-oriented architecture (SOA). Any number of additional services may be added to process messages passing through the gateway.10-07-2010
20080317052Location of Packet Data Convergence Protocol in a Long-Term Evolution Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service - A system for compressing an Internet Protocol (IP) header for a multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS) is provided. The system includes an access gateway and a plurality of cells, each of which has an enhanced node B (ENB). When the quantity of cells that will provide the MBMS is known to be one, execution of a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP)-based data compression function for the IP header occurs in the ENB of the one cell. When the quantity of cells that will provide the MBMS is not known to be one, execution of the PDCP-based data compression function occurs in the access gateway.12-25-2008
20100098096METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING BEARING PATH - A method and apparatus for implementing a bearer path are disclosed. The method includes the following steps: a Media Gateway (MG) reports a preset Path Request (PR) event to a Media Gateway Controller (MGC) according to a received request message related to a bearer path, requesting the MGC to deliver a resource reservation decision; the MG receives the resource reservation decision sent by the MGC; and the MG processes the bearer path according to the resource reservation decision. The present disclosure is applicable to setup of a bearer path.04-22-2010
20100098097MULTIPLE CHANNEL SYSTEM FOR A TWISTED PAIR TELEPHONE WIRE LOCAL LOOP SYSTEM - The system (04-22-2010
20100098093Method and system for IP Multimedia bearer path optimization through a succession of border gateways - A method for identifying alternative end-to-end media paths through Internet protocol realms using substitute session description protocol parameters is disclosed. The method includes receiving a session description protocol offer, including a list of internet protocol realms. The list may include any number of previously traversed through internet protocol realms and/or secondary Internet protocol realms. The method continues with determining the outgoing Internet protocol realm for a media path based on unspecified signaling criteria. Finally, the method includes that if the outgoing Internet protocol realm to be traversed through is on the list of previously traversed through and/or secondary Internet protocol realms, bypassing at least one border gateway associated with the incoming and previously traversed through Internet protocol realms. The system implementing a method for identifying optimal end-to-end media paths and Internet protocol multimedia subsystems includes a list of internet protocol realm instances and an application level gateway configured to receive a session description protocol offer having connection information and port information, and a procedure to determine that if the outgoing Internet protocol realm that the media path may traverse through is on the list of instances, the media path connection information and port information is substituted to facilitate border gateway bypassing.04-22-2010
20100008373COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, DEVICE, METHOD FOR HANDING OVER A ROUTE AND METHOD FOR NOTIFYING A STATE OF ADVERTISING A LABEL - The present invention relates to a field of communication technology, and more particularly to a communication system, a label switched router, a network device, a method for handing over a route, and a method for notifying a state of advertising a label so as to improve an accuracy occasion for handing over a route. A liberal LSP between an upstream LSR and a downstream LSR is established; it is confirmed that establishing the liberal LSP is accomplished; a handover notification is sent to the upstream LSR; and the upstream LSR hands over the route according to the handover notification. By adopting such technical solution, the accuracy occasion for handing over the route is improved so as to avoid label forwarding interruption, and reduce the influences on the convergence time of handing over the route.01-14-2010
20110149982ETHERNET-MOST GATEWAY APPARATUS - An Ethernet-MOST gateway apparatus for exchanging data between a MOST network transferring multimedia data within a vehicle and a packet network for a computer and Internet communications. The Ethernet-MOS gateway apparatus including: an Ethernet frame interface unit connected with a packet network to transmit and receive an Ethernet frame, and converting the Ethernet frame into a MOST frame; a MOST frame interface unit connected with a MOST network to transmit and receive the MOST frame, and converting the MOST frame into the Ethernet frame; and a switch fabric connecting the Ethernet frame interface unit and the MOST frame interface unit.06-23-2011
20110149979COMMUNICATION NETWORKS THAT PROVIDE A COMMON TRANSPORT DOMAIN FOR USE BY MULTIPLE SERVICE DOMAINS AND METHODS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR USING THE SAME - A method of operating a communication network comprises receiving loopback addresses from a plurality of edge networks at a provider router of a core backbone network, the edge networks and the core backbone network being logically distinct from each other, advertising the loopback addresses to a transport route reflector element, propagating the advertisement of the loopback addresses to other provider routers of the core backbone network using a protocol for communicating between autonomous systems, and using the transport route reflector element to advertise at least one of the loopback addresses to a service route reflector element in one of the plurality of edge networks.06-23-2011
20090257438METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSPORT OF STRUCTURE AWARE TDM TRAFFIC OVER PACKET NETWORKS - A communications network gateway receives a stream of information formatted to be compatible with a synchronous structured network. The frames from the synchronous structured network are extracted and modified for transmission over a packet network in a manner that optimizes bandwidth utilization of the overall communications network.10-15-2009
20110149983AMI GATEWAY APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING LARGE AMI DATA AND VARIOUS APPLICATION PROFILES AND METHOD THEREOF - Provided are an AMI gateway apparatus and method for processing large AMI data and an application profile. The AMI gateway apparatus and method are associated with collecting meter data of smart meters measuring the amount of electricity or the like and transmitting the meter data to an AMI server. Disclosed is a method of reducing an ID type and a method of minimizing meter data to reduce the transmission rate of large AMI data including an ID value and meter data. A method of setting a gateway ID value according to locations and zones is also provided. Those three methods achieve the efficient transmission of large AMI data to an AMI server and is applicable to various gateway apparatuses processing various application profiles such as an HA profile controlling and sensing home appliances, an SE profile providing an AMI service, a TA profile providing mobile services or the like.06-23-2011
20090022166Method and system for providing media services by distributed networks - Techniques for managing media services in a distributed environment are disclosed. Data representing an item in the media service is distributed among devices in service. When a requesting device is newly joined and requests for the item, at least one supplying device is designed to supply the data to the requesting device. The supplying device may be a server or a peer device. In one case, each of the devices is behind a network address translator. A server, in responding to a request from a requesting device for needed data, is configured to determine some of devices in service to be candidates from a database, where the database has many entries, each of the entries pertaining to one of the devices. The candidates are determined in accordance with at least compatibility of respective network address translators with a network address translator of the requesting device. Among the candidates, the server then designates a finalist that is preferably not designated to be a supplying device more often than it should be on average. The server then notifies either the requesting device or the supplying device so that the requesting device can get the needed data directly from the supplying device.01-22-2009
20090180488METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTING VMG - A method, apparatus and system for selecting a Virtual Media Gateway are provided. The method for selecting a VMG includes: setting the service domain information on a VMG by extending a property parameter, after receiving the event triggering message on the bearer layer, the physical MG matches the source identifier information carried in the event triggering message with the service domain information on each VMG, If determining that the source identifier information is included in the service domain on a VMG, the physical MG may select the corresponding VMG accordingly.07-16-2009
20090080449METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING MEDIA RESOURCES, METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING CALLS - The present invention discloses a media resource control method, including indicating source attributes of locally transmitted and/or received media to a first media gateway. An operation on source attributes of media can be performed concurrently with or separately from that on destination attributes of media. The invention further provides a device and a call establishment method and system, which use the above media resource control method. Since source attributes of media provided at a termination are described, the remote end can be notified conveniently when destination attributes of media provided at the termination are inconsistent with the source attributes; and since a gateway can obtain descriptions of source attributes of media from indications of a media gateway controller, the invention meets a condition in which the media gateway can determine legality of a received media packet in accordance with source attributes of the media packet to thereby avoid processing of a trash message and prevent an attack.03-26-2009
20090080447RELAY DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - An IP address and a MAC address of each of communication devices connected to a plurality of communication ports provided in a switching hub device are associated in an ARP table. Also, priority information representing the communication priority of each communication device is received, and the received priority information is associated with the MAC address of the communication device. When no IP address of a transmission source included in a data packet received at each communication port exists in the ARP table, the IP address and the MAC address of the transmission source are added to the ARP table and priority information is attached to the ARP table.03-26-2009
20090003362Event notification control based on data about a user's communication device stored in a user notification profile - An exemplary method is implemented in a communication system in which periodically updated data for respective end-users is stored in a notification profile at a communication infrastructure node. The updated data is based on conditions associated with each end-user's communication device and its network context, where the data is not presence status. Predetermined rules are stored at the communication infrastructure node and generate respective results based on factors such as network contextual data and corresponding values contained in the notification profile data for each end-user. An event is detected by the communication infrastructure node where the event is intended to cause communication with all the communication devices that are interested in that event. The communication infrastructure node determines an action to be taken in response to the event based on the results of the rules for data associated with the first end-user. The communication infrastructure node implements the action related to the first end-user.01-01-2009
20080267194Method and Apparatus for Communicating Loss of Alternating Current Power Supply - In general, various methods, apparatuses, and systems are described for communicating a loss of an AC power source. In at least certain embodiments, a broadband communication gateway receives a direct current (DC) output signal from an alternating current (AC) to DC converter that detects a loss of an AC input signal. The apparatus further includes a processing unit that generates a communication message in response to receiving an interrupt signal based on the detection of the loss of the AC input signal. The processing unit controls an analog front end that sends the communication message to a device external to the broadband communication gateway in response to the interrupt signal prior to a voltage of the DC output signal decreasing below a threshold voltage needed for operation of the broadband communication gateway.10-30-2008
20110255550METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SERVICE MIGRATION - A method for service migration is disclosed. A first Serving-Call Session Control Function (S-CSCF) receives a service migration command; the first S-CSCF receives a user's register message sent by an Interrogating-Call Session Control Function (I-CSCF), and decides, according to a preset configuration policy, whether to migrate the user's service. An apparatus and a system for service migration are also disclosed. By using the method, apparatus and system disclosed herein, the user's service can be migrated flexibly.10-20-2011
20110255549COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication management apparatus includes a token-circulation-order-information storing unit that stores token circulation order, a token-frame processing unit that determines whether transmission right acquiring apparatus information of the token frame indicates the own apparatus and transmits a token frame in which first transmission right acquisition determination information indicating a sequence number of a communication apparatus that can acquire a transmission right in the token circulation order, second transmission right acquisition determination information indicating the number of frames that can be transmitted during one token frame circulation, and transmission right acquiring apparatus information indicating the next transmission destination of the token frame after the own apparatus acquired from the token circulation order are set, and a data-frame-communication processing unit that transmits and receives the data frame, thereby to reduce time required until a communication node that acquired the token frame transmits data.10-20-2011
20100309926METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING HOME GATEWAY POLICY - A method and system for controlling home gateway policy are disclosed. The method comprises: a Resource and Admission Control Function (RACF) entity sends down a policy to a home gateway, and the home gateway performs a policy execution for an uplink packet passing through the home gateway according to the policy received. With the policy control method and system of the present invention, the policy is sent down to the home gateway through the RACF, Quality of Service (QoS) control is made for the uplink packet passing through the home gateway before Bandwidth Remote Access Server (BRAS), effective QoS assurance is provided for the uplink packets before arriving at the BRAS, and meanwhile, the problem of heavy load of a convergence layer of a metropolitan area network in the prior art is solved.12-09-2010
20100309923GATEWAY INTEGRATING MOBILE COMMUNICATION AND POWERLINE CONNECTION - A gateway integrating mobile communication and powerline connection (PLC) has a network communication control unit, at least a wireline communication unit, a powerline communication unit and a mobile communication unit. The network communication control unit is connected with the wireline communication unit, the powerline communication unit and the mobile communication unit to convert, process and transmit network packets from the wireline communication unit, the powerline communication unit and the mobile communication unit. As such, the present invention is compatible with the network terminal using network cable, power line and mobile communication, thereby realizing the gateway integrating mobile communication and PLC.12-09-2010
20100309924CLIENT/SERVER ADAPTATION SCHEME FOR COMMUNICATIONS TRAFFIC - A communications network provides a carrier Ethernet service without requiring the client signal to be identified by an Ethertype in a carrier Ethernet frame. A plurality of differing types of client signals can thus be encapsulated within the same carrier Ethernet service channel by using a generic framing procedure adaptation layer. The client signals are adapted for encapsulation within the carrier Ethernet frames by mapping the client signal within a generic framing procedure adaptation layer signal and then by mapping the generic framing procedure adaptation layer signal into the carrier Ethernet signal. As the client signal is identified within said generic framing procedure signal only a generic framing signal Ethertype is required. The mapping protocol enables a single Ethernet frame to carry a plurality of client signals.12-09-2010
20080253383Communicating using the port-preserving nature of symmetric network address translators - Methods for establishing connections between computing devices when the computing devices are behind Network Address Translators (NATs). Embodiments of the present invention are directed to enabling a first client computer to communicate with a second client computer when both client computers are positioned behind NATs, wherein at least one of the NATs is a port-preserving NAT.10-16-2008
20080253384COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, RELAYING METHOD AND RELAYING DEVICE - Method and device for heightening communications security. Gateway 10-16-2008
20080240126Systems and Methods for Recording Resource Association for a Communications Environment - Included are embodiments for determining an extension-to-channel mapping. At least one embodiment includes determining, at a first time, a first extension-to-channel mapping configuration, the first extension-to-channel mapping configuration including an indication that at least one extension is coupled to a first recording channel. Similarly, some embodiments include determining, at a second time, a second extension-to-channel mapping configuration, the second extension-to-channel mapping configuration including an indication that the at least one extension is coupled to a second recording channel. Similarly, some embodiments include creating an extension-to-channel map, the extension-to-channel map indicating a configuration of the at least one extension, the first recording channel, and the second channel during a time period between the first time and the second time.10-02-2008
20080205420Determining bidirectional path quality within a wireless mesh network - An apparatus and method for communicating link quality information between access nodes is disclosed. A first step includes a first access node transmitting first routing packets. A second step includes a second access node receiving at least one of the first routing packets over a first direction of a first link. A third step includes the second access node transmitting second routing packets. A fourth step includes the first access node receiving at least one of the second routing packets over a second direction of the first link, and determining a first direction link quality of the first link based upon the second routing packets.08-28-2008
20080205417Method and apparatus for bridging wired and wireless communication networks - Method and apparatus for bridging wired and wireless communication networks are disclosed. The method includes interfacing with a wired communication network, and interfacing with a wireless communication network, where the wired communication network and the wireless communication network have different communication media for transmitting communication signals, and the wired communication network and the wireless communication network use different communication protocols for transmitting the communication signals. The method further includes detecting the different communication protocols of the communication signals, programming a baseband processing module for transmitting the communication signals between the different communication protocols and the different communication media dynamically, and bridging communication signals between the wired communication network and the wireless communication network using the baseband processing module.08-28-2008
20080205419Residential Gateway System for Home Network Service - Disclosed herein is a Residential Gateway (RG) system for home network service. The RG system receives various supplementary services through a Home Network Serving Node (HNSN) that provides home network service. The system includes an Open Service Gateway initiative (OSGi) framework, an RG agent, a virtual Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) device, and a Java virtual machine. The RG agent is installed on the OSGi framework and implemented in bundle form. The UPnP device is registered on the OSGi framework by the RG agent. The Java virtual machine is ported by the RG agent to hardware on which an operating system is installed.08-28-2008
20080205418System and Method for Avoiding Duplication of MAC Addresses in a Stack - A system and method of operating a set of stack elements that are stackable and connected to form a ring. In one embodiment, the stack Media Access Control (MAC) address is stored in each stack element of the ring; and responsive to an assessment that communication with a primary stack element is lost, a determination is made whether to replace the first MAC address with a second MAC address or to retain the first MAC address in each stack element remaining of the set of stack elements.08-28-2008
20080205415Access, Connectivity and Interoperability for Devices and Services - Among other things, in a network, a mechanism enables a resource that has a pre-assigned unique identifier and is not otherwise capable itself of being accessible on the network, to maintain a resolution record for the resource in an identifier resolution mechanism of the network where the resolution record associating the identifier with an address or other information useful in enabling the accessibility of the resource on the network through the mechanism.08-28-2008
20080205413System and Method to Trigger a Mobile Device in Different Domains Based on Unsuccessful Initialization or Handover - A system to promote communication in a second domain responsive to a failure in a first domain. The system includes a first domain for communicating, and a second domain for communicating. The system includes a rejection message and a mobile device. The rejection message transmitted upon a failure of a call in the first domain. The mobile device configured to communicate in both the first domain and the second domain. The mobile device configured to attempt the call in the second domain responsive to receiving the rejection message in the first domain.08-28-2008
20100284418METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS INCLUDING SELF-ORGANIZING SCALABLE ETHERNET USING IS-IS HIERARCHY - A first aggregation node in communication with the first network and the second network, the source node and internal nodes of the first network only having knowledge of each other and of the first aggregation node. The system includes a second aggregate node in communication with the second network and the third network, the internal nodes of the second network only having knowledge of each other and the first and second aggregate nodes, the destination node and the internal nodes of the third network only having knowledge of each other and the second aggregation node, the first and second aggregation nodes only having knowledge of each other, the destination node receiving the data from the source node using a link state routing protocol and shortest path bridging through the first second and third networks and the first and second aggregation nodes.11-11-2010
20100284414FLEXIBLE STACKING PORT - A stackable device having a plurality of data ports, wherein each of the data ports is capable of operating as a regular data port or a stacking port. A first set of one or more of the data ports is specified as a first flexible stacking port, and a second set of one or more of the data ports is specified as a second flexible stacking port. Each flexible stacking port can be individually configured to operate as an actual stacking port, if required by the configuration of an associated stack. If a flexible stacking port is not configured to operate as an actual stacking port, then the data port(s) included in the flexible stacking port are available to operate as regular data port(s).11-11-2010
20100284412METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSPORTING CONTENT - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a controller operable to receive signaling information from a local resource manager (LRM) identifying a recipient media processor (RMP) and describing at least one media characteristic of media content selected by an initiating media processor (IMP) to be presented at the RMP, determine a location of the RMP and a media capability of the RMP, compare the media capability of the RMP to the at least one media characteristic of the media content, determine a media configuration of at least one network element in an interactive television network based on the comparison, configure at least one network element of a virtual private network (VPN) based on the media configuration, and transmit signaling information to the LRM to enable the IMP to present the media content at the RMP over the VPN. Other embodiments are disclosed.11-11-2010
20100329270DYNAMIC DISCOVERY MECHANISMS VIA INTER-DOMAIN ROUTING PROTOCOL - In an embodiment, a method is provided at which it is used in a device. In this method, a logical identifier assigned to the device is identified and additionally, a mesh group identifier identifying a mesh group is identified. The logical identifier and the mesh group identifier are encoded in a routing message, which is used in an inter-domain routing protocol, and this routing message is transmitted to a reflector device in communication with the device. The reflector device is configured to transmit the routing message to a remote device included in the computer network.12-30-2010
20100329272VEHICLE ONBOARD GATEWAY APPARATUS - In an onboard gateway apparatus, when data is received from one network, the received data is stored in the buffer. The buffer includes a first storage area for storing data in the order of priority of an identifier (ID) attached to the data and a second storage area for storing data in the order in which the data is received. A control means stores the received data in one of the first and second storage areas based on the attached identifier, and sends the data to another network in accordance with the priority of the ID of the data. As to data passing through the first storage area, sending in the order of priority is ensured. As to data passing through the second storage area, sending in the order in which the data is received is ensured.12-30-2010
20100329274Network Repeater - A network repeater is configured to repeat data packets in a broadcast mode without generating a significant broadcast storm. The network repeater is configured to detect a characteristic of a received data packet. The data packet characteristic is compared with valid copies of packet characteristics previously stored in a packet registry. During a delay period, if a valid copy of the detected characteristic is found in the packet registry, then it is assumed that the packet is being received for the second time and the data packet is not repeated in the broadcast mode. If a valid copy of the detected characteristic of the data packet is not found in the packet registry, then the characteristic is stored in the packet registry and the data packet is repeated in a broadcast mode.12-30-2010
20100329269SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING COMMUNICATIONS USING SERVICE INTERCEPTORS - A gateway is described that performs processing of communications by employing a series of service interceptors. The interceptors can be registered in the gateway by using a configuration file. Once registered, the interceptors can be invoked in a particular sequence for the requests coming into the gateway. Each interceptor can deny the request, allow the request, abstain from processing the request and pass the request to the next interceptor specified by the sequence. The interceptors can also modify the various data associated with the request. There can be dependencies between multiple interceptors. In addition, new custom interceptors can be created and registered at the gateway to process incoming requests.12-30-2010
20100329271Communication System and Server Unit Thereof - According to one embodiment, there is provided a communication system including a router, a terminal and a server. The router interconnects a private network using private address and a global network using global address. The terminal belongs to the private network. The server is connected to the global network and executes processing based on SIP messages output from the terminal via the router. The server includes a generator, a table and a module. The generator generates discriminator to be associated with a REGISTER source terminal using IP addresses contained in all Via headers. The table associates the discriminator with a registration condition of the terminal which belongs to the private network for each terminal. The module collates the discriminator and the registration condition managed in the table. The module decides whether or not to permit registration of REGISTER source terminal.12-30-2010
20110134931Virtual router migration - A Virtual Router (VR) is described that can move freely from one physical router to another in a network. Embodiments enable a network operator to configure a network management primitive that supports live migration of VRs from one physical router to another. To minimize disruptions, VRs allow a migrated control plane from a source router to clone its data plane state from the source router at a destination router while continuing to update its data plane state at the source router. Embodiments temporarily forward packets using both router location data planes to support asynchronous migration of links.06-09-2011
20100303083Two-Layer Switch Apparatus To Avoid First Layer Inter-Switch Link Data Traffic In Steering Packets Through Bump-In-The-Wire Service Applications - Link-level data communications carried out in a link-level data communications switching apparatus that includes modular link-level data communications switches; the switching apparatus is configured as two layers of link-level data communications switches; all the switches stacked by a stacking protocol that shares administrative configuration information among the switches and presents the switches as a single logical switch; the switching apparatus includes data communications ports coupling the switching apparatus to data communications networks and to service applications, each service application associated with a unique, link-level identifier; the switching apparatus includes rules governing the steering of packets among service applications and networks; including receiving, in the switching apparatus, packets directed to a destination network; and steering each packet among the service applications to the destination network in accordance with the rules, without using the link-level identifier of any service application.12-02-2010
20100309925METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR USING SIGNALING SYSTEM 7 (SS7) SUBSYSTEM NUMBERS TO ROUTE MESSAGES TO SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) NODES - Methods, systems, and computer program products for using signaling system 7 (SS7) subsystem numbers to route message to session initiation protocol (SIP) nodes. According to one method, an SS7 message can be received. A SIP message can be generated based on the SS7 message. A subsystem number associated with the SS7 message can be identified. A destination SIP node for the SIP message can be identified based on the subsystem number. Further, the SIP message can be forwarded to the SIP node.12-09-2010
20120147895METHODS, APPARATUS AND ARTICLES OF MANUFACTURE TO SELECT LABEL SWITCHED PATHS (LSPs) FOR PREEMPTION - Example methods, apparatus and articles of manufacture to select label switched paths (LSPs) for preemption are disclosed. A disclosed example method includes sorting a first list of first label switched paths based on their respective bandwidths and priorities to form a sorted first list, each of the label switched paths having a lower priority than a requested label switched path, sequentially marking the first label switched paths for preemption based on their position in the sorted list until a bandwidth associated with the marked label switched paths exceeds a bandwidth gap, and configuring a routing engine to preempt the marked first label switched paths.06-14-2012
20110085565METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR COMMUNICATION ROUTING - An apparatus for communication routing may include a processor. The processor may be configured to receive a packet. In this regard, the packet may include an address of a sending entity. The processor may also be configured to identify the packet as a qualified packet and store a local gateway table entry in a local gateway table to thereby identify a local gateway relationship in response to identifying the qualified packet. In this regard, the local gateway table entry may include the address of the sending entity. The processor may also be configured to update a routing table based on the local gateway table entry. Associated methods and computer program products may also be provided.04-14-2011
20110085558Virtual and Logical Inter-Switch Links04-14-2011
20110261829TUNNEL PROVISIONING WITH LINK AGGREGATION - A method for processing data packets in a communication network includes establishing a path for a flow of the data packets through the communication network. At a node along the path having a plurality of aggregated ports, a port is selected from among the plurality to serve as part of the path. A label is chosen responsively to the selected port. The label is attached to the data packets in the flow at a point on the path upstream from the node. Upon receiving the data packets at the node, the data packets are switched through the selected port responsively to the label.10-27-2011
20110261828Virtual switching overlay for cloud computing - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving data at a virtual switch located at a network device in a cloud network. The data is received from an external network and destined for one or more virtual machines located in the cloud network and associated with the external network. The method further includes transmitting the data from the virtual switch to the virtual machines. The virtual switch operates as an access layer switch for the external network and creates a virtual switching overlay for secure communication between the virtual machines and the external network. Logic and an apparatus are also disclosed.10-27-2011
20100322259SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION - A method, device, and system for conducting communication over one or more communication networks. The method comprises determining a number, A, of simultaneously receivable communication paths at a receiving device; and selecting, based on A, a version of data for reception from a plurality of available versions.12-23-2010
20110044349PACKET SWITCH AND METHOD OF USE - The present invention relates to a packet switch and a packet switching method. An example embodiment of the present invention comprises at least three network ports, at least one instrument port, a mux-switch, a packet switch fabric, and an address table. The embodiment updates the address table to include the source address of each ingress packet of each network port and associate the source address with that network port. The mux-switch routes the ingress packet traffic of each network port according to the identity of the network port so that at least a copy of the packet traffic of one of the network ports is routed to an instrument port. The packet switch fabric routes the packets from the instrument ports to the network ports according the destination address of the packet and the identity of the network port that is associated with the destination address as recorded in the address table.02-24-2011
20080219275Apparatus, method and computer program product providing neighbor discovery, handover procedure and relay zone configuration for relay stations in a multi-hop network - Methods for use in multi-hop relay networks are described. One method includes receiving a first message from a first relay station requesting a temporary suspension of communication between the first relay station and one or more user equipment. In response to receiving the first message, a second message is transmitted to the one or more user equipment. The second message includes instructions to the user equipment to temporarily suspend communication with the first relay station at a specific time. A third message is transmitted to the first relay station. A scanning operation is performed at the specified time in response to receiving the third message. A second method for use in multi-hop relay networks is also described. The second method includes transmitting a neighbor information message. The neighbor information message includes a relay zone offset indicating the start of a station in a frame structure. Several apparatus are also described.09-11-2008
20080219274On-vehicle gateway device, method for controlling an on-vehicle gateway device, connection device and connection control method - An on-vehicle gateway device connected to an information system network and a control system network of a vehicle executes monitoring the status of an information system via an information system access circuit taking charge of message transmission and reception to and from the information system network, and an information system management step to manage information acquired by the information system monitoring, monitoring the status of a control system via a control system access circuit taking charge of message transmission and reception to and from the control system network, and a control system management step to manage information acquired by the control system monitoring, managing policies for access control by the access control circuit controlling data flows between the information system access circuit and the control system access circuit, and determining whether or not to update the policies managed by policy management and to update the policies.09-11-2008
20080219276METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATED EDGE DEVICE CONFIGURATION IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - A PE device learns the address of a local CE device by monitoring the control messages, such as address resolution messages, originating from those local devices. In one embodiment, automated configuration of the PE devices participating in a Layer 2 VPN is facilitated by permitting a PE device to share the addresses for its locally-attached CE devices with the remote PE devices in the VPN. A PE device may share the addresses of the remote CE devices with the local CE devices by initiating its own control message or responding to an control message issued by one of its local CE devices. This latter mechanism in effect hides the distributed, heterogeneous nature of the network from a local CE device.09-11-2008
20110096788SESSION BORDER CONTROL MIGRATION - One or more devices in a provider network receive provisioning information to migrate customer devices within a customer network from an original session border controller (SBC) device of the provider network to a new SBC device, where the provisioning information includes one or more fully-qualified domain names (FQDNs) associated with the original SBC device. The one or more devices update DNS server entries for the one or more FQDNs with an Internet Protocol (IP) address associated with the new SBC device and provide, to the customer devices within the customer network, DNS entry updates for the one or more FQDNs. The new SBC device then receives SIP session signal from the customer devices, and the configuration information associated with the customer may be deleted from the original SBC.04-28-2011
20100215048DYNAMIC BRIDGE FOR OBJECT TRANSFER - A request for a first dynamic bridge end is received at a first device. A capability for a second dynamic bridge end is transmitted to a second device. At least one of the first dynamic bridge end and the second dynamic bridge end have a movable end point location. The first dynamic bridge end and the second dynamic bridge end create a path for transmission of an object.08-26-2010
20100215050PACKET PROCESSING DEVICE BY MULTIPLE PROCESSOR CORES AND PACKET PROCESSING METHOD BY THE SAME - A packet processing device includes multiple processor cores and memory connected to the multiple processor cores, upon reception of a load request of a program, selects a processor core to which the program has not yet been loaded, loads the program to the selected processor core, retains first association information that associates attribute information specified by the load request with the processor core to which the program has been loaded, upon reception of the packet, specifies the attribute information corresponding to the received packet, and transfers the received packet to the processor core corresponding to the specified attribute information.08-26-2010
20100215049INTER-NETWORKING DEVICES FOR USE WITH PHYSICAL LAYER INFORMATION - One exemplary embodiment is directed to an inter-networking device that performs at least one inter-networking function using physical layer information about the network of which the device is a part. Another exemplary embodiment is directed to capturing physical layer information about physical communication media that is attached to an inter-networking device. Another exemplary embodiment is directed to a technique for generating a spanning tree and/or forwarding database information for a plurality of switches in a network at a central location. The spanning tree and/or forwarding database information is generated at the central location using information including physical layer information about devices and physical communication media in the network. Another exemplary embodiment is directed to an ETHERNET physical layer device having integrated support for capturing physical layer information about the physical communication media connected to the ETHERNET physical layer device.08-26-2010
20100215047SUBSETS OF THE FORWARD INFORMATION BASE (FIB) DISTRIBUTED AMONG LINE CARDS IN A SWITCHING DEVICE - Disclosed are, inter alia, methods, apparatus, computer-storage media, mechanisms, and means associated with subsets of the Forward Information Base (FIB) distributed among line cards in a switching device; especially wherein one or more of the line cards does not contain the complete FIB, and this line card forwards packets, for which it does not have the forwarding information, to another line card which has the forwarding information for the packet.08-26-2010
20110182298COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, MEDIUM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication apparatus that can communicate with a network includes a transmitting/receiving unit configured to transmit and receive a packet, a first information storing unit configured to store first information about a route, a second information storing unit configured to store second information that specifies a gateway, via which a transmitted packet is to pass, from among the first information, a detecting unit configured to detect third information including Layer 2 information about a gateway based on a received packet, a determining unit configured to determine whether or not a first condition that is a condition for a change of the second information is satisfied based on the third information, and a changing unit configured to change the gateway specified in the second information if it is determined that the first condition is satisfied.07-28-2011
20100166005 MECHANISM FOR UPDATING THE PARAMETERS OF A PSEUDOWIRE - A method is provided for communicating between first and second routers, the routers being part of a packet-switched network. The method includes a stage of transmitting data over a pseudowire set up between the first and second routers, the data being transmitted in accordance with a parameter of the pseudowire. The method includes at least one step of sending a modification request message of the parameter at the initiative of one of the two routers, to the other router, and during the stage of transmission over the pseudowire. Also, a method is provided for processing data transmitted over such a pseudowire. The method includes a stage of transmission of data over the pseudowire, the data being transmitted in accordance with a parameter of the pseudowire. The method includes, during the transmission stage, at least one of the routers receiving a modification request message of the parameter of the pseudowire.07-01-2010
20100166006METHOD, MEDIA GATEWAY AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING REDUNDANT DATA PACKET TRANSMISSION - A method for controlling redundant data packet transmission is provided, which includes: transmitting data packets between media gateways; and controlling whether to transmit redundant data packets between the media gateways according to a packet loss condition of the data packets detected by the media gateways during the transmission of the data packets. A media gateway and a system for controlling redundant data packet transmission are also provided. Accordingly, the function of redundant data packets is fully achieved and it is controlled in real time whether to transmit redundant data packets according to the packet loss environment of the network. Thus, when it is detected that packet loss occurs, the quality of service is guaranteed by sending the redundant data packets, and when it is detected that no packet loss occurs, the network bandwidth resources are effectively saved by sending ordinary data packets carrying no redundant data.07-01-2010
20100166004INFORMATION TRANSMISSION AND SERVICE INTEGRATION SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - An information transmission and service integration system for transmitting a message between at least one information transmission device and at least one service providing terminal is provided. The information transmission and service integration system includes an interface registry repository, a device gateway, and a service gateway. The interface registry repository stores device interface meta-data (DIMD) of the information transmission device and service interface meta-data (SIMD) of the service providing terminal. The device gateway detects and adapts the information transmission device according to the DIMD information. The service gateway transforms and transmits the message between the information transmission device and the service providing terminal according to the DIMD information and the SIMD information. Thereby, the information transmission and service integration system can automatically establish an information transmission channel between the information transmission device and the server-providing terminal.07-01-2010
20100166003LOCATOR RESOLUTION IN COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A set of globally-reachable attachment registers is provided for objects in an internetwork of interconnected communications networks. “Objects” can be networks, hosts or terminals, or passive objects which themselves do not have a network interface. Each attachment register corresponds to an object in the internetwork. The attachment registers are not located with their respective object. Information is stored in the attachment registers that establishes one or more logical links between the attachment registers. The information is used to perform one or more network communication functions, and in particular to determine a locator by identifying a logical path, along the logical links between attachment registers, from a destination attachment register corresponding to the destination object. Other non-limiting example functions include location registration and update, name to global locator resolution, routing, multi-homing, dynamic ISP selection, and handover.07-01-2010
20100166002SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONNECTING TWO NETWORKS - In accordance with an aspect of the present invention, a method is provided for establishing connection between a first local area network and a second local area network. The first local area network includes a first device and a second device. The second local area network includes a third device. The method comprises establishing a security connection between the third device and the first device; detecting a status of the second device; creating a virtual device based on the second device; and establishing connection between the second device and the third device via the virtual device.07-01-2010
20100195661Optimizations and Enhancements to the IEEE RSTP 802.1w Implementation - A method for supporting dynamic configuration changes comprises receiving a message from a current root bridge, comparing a bridge media access control (MAC) address of a receiving port to a bridge MAC address of the received message, if the bridge MAC addresses are the same, then comparing a current priority value with a previous priority value of the current root bridge, determining if the receiving port is a qualified root port, and if the port is a qualified root port, then returning a superior designated message to execute an RSTP calculation.08-05-2010
20100067536Multimodal Data Switch - A transit memory assembly of a rotator-based switching node is logically partitioned into two sections, one operated as a common-memory switch fabric and the other as a time-shared space-switch fabric. The composition of data received at input ports of the switching node determines adaptive capacity division between the two sections. Based on an indication of traffic type, a controller of at least one input port selects one of the two sections. The space-switch section enables scalability to a high transport capacity while the common-memory section enables scalability to a high processing throughput.03-18-2010
20100067534DIGITAL CONTENT DELIVERY SYSTEM - The digital contents distribution system of the present invention distributes digital contents through first and second networks. A server is connected to the first network, and clients for receiving and displaying or reproducing the digital contents are connected to the second network. The server divides digital contents held therein into a plurality of packets, and transmits packets of a minimum unit for constructing the digital contents to the second network. The clients include means for holding the digital contents therein by use of the packets of the minimum unit received from the server and packets received from other clients constructing the second network.03-18-2010
20100067533NETWORK CONTROL APPARATUS, METHOD, AND PROGRAM - To enable network control (particularly, transmission band allocation) that excels in follow-up ability to follow changes in a network, locality, and responsiveness. A network control apparatus controls a wireless ad-hoc network and includes: a routing processing unit (03-18-2010
20100067535Packet Router Having Improved Packet Classification - A computer-implemented method for classifying received packets using a hardware cache of evolving rules and a software cache having an original rule set. The method including receiving a packet, processing the received packet through a hardware-based packet classifier having at least one evolving rule to identify at least one cache miss packet, and processing the cache miss packet through a software based packet classifier including an original rule set. Processing the cache miss packet includes determining whether to expand at least one of the at least one evolving rules in the hardware-based packet classifier based on the cache miss packet. The determination includes determining whether an evolving rule has both the same action and lies entirely within one of the rule of the original rule set.03-18-2010
20090180486REMOTE ACCESS METHOD IN NETWORK ENVIRONMENT COMPRISING NAT DEVICE - Provided is a remote access method between a remote access client (RAC) and a remote access server (RAS) in a network comprising a network address translation (NAT) device. The method includes obtaining a transport address set (TAS) with respect to a home remote access server (RAS) from an external server; registering the obtained TAS to a transport address resolution (TAR) server; receiving an IP packet transported from a remote access client (RAC) using the registered TAS; and transporting a response packet along a transport path of the received IP packet. Thus, an RAC can remotely access an RAS in a network comprising an NAT device, and an optimum communication path can be determined.07-16-2009
20090296722Modular power line repeater and system - A data router or data switch connected to a medium and having private addresses bounded to a specific subsegment of and address range, and a user-selectable number of data repeaters also connected to the medium in a sequence of overlapping address ranges, in which a data repeater communicates upstream with a prior data repeater (or if it is the first repeater, the data router) and provides a data path to subsequent data repeaters over a different subsegments of that range by address translation, permitting extension of the usable range of the resulting network without the need for data-blocking filters on the medium, and without interference generated by the repeaters.12-03-2009
20110051741METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AN ASYMMETRIC PHY OPERATION FOR ETHERNET A/V BRIDGING AND ETHERNET A/V BRIDGING EXTENSIONS - A network device comprising asymmetric, multi-rate, Ethernet MAC and asymmetric, multi-rate, Ethernet PHY communicates signals via a network utilizing A/V bridging services. Higher bandwidth A/V signals are communicated and lower bandwidth signals are received or vice versa. Signals are communicated based on a plurality of different Ethernet protocols and/or data rates. Signals may be communicated based on 10GBASE-T in a first direction and based on a lower rate Ethernet protocol in a second direction. Extended range mode may be utilized. PDUs comprise time stamps, traffic class designations and/or destination addresses. Data rate requests, resource reservation messages and/or registration for delivery of PDUs may be communicated. Time stamps enable end to end transport within a specified latency target. Video signals may be compressed, uncompressed, encrypted, unencrypted and/or formatted for a video display interface.03-03-2011
20110051740Delayed Onset of Voice Activity Detection for Jitter Adaptation - Disclosed are various systems and methods for controlling a voice activity detector. In one example approach, a method is provided in which a voice over Internet protocol (VOIP) session is initiated in a first gateway with a second gateway. A plurality of jitter adaptation packets are transmitted from the first gateway to the second gateway. Also, the voice activity detector is disabled in the first gateway during the transmission of the jitter adaptation packets. The voice activity detector is enabled in the first gateway after the transmission of the jitter adaptation packets.03-03-2011
20110051739Method for Using Voice Messages in Telecommunications Connections - The invention relates to a method for using voice messages in telecommunications connections. The method comprises the following steps: —routing a connection establishment or the data of a through-connected telecommunications connection from a calling end system (03-03-2011
20110051738METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING ROUTES - A method, system, and device for maintaining routes are provided. A communications network includes multiple point of presence (PoP) groups, where each of the PoP groups includes one or more PoP nodes. PoP nodes within the same PoP group issue routing information of the same super prefix. PoP nodes within different PoP groups issue routing information of different super prefixes. The method further includes the following steps. A PoP node acquires routing information of a detailed prefix covered by a super prefix issued by the PoP node and synchronizes the routing information of the detailed prefix with other PoP nodes within the same PoP group. The method, system, and device reduce flow of data forwarded by each PoP node.03-03-2011
20110051737SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR EXTENDING NETWORK WITH POWER SUPPLY - System, apparatus, and method for extending network with power supply are disclosed. The apparatus includes a processing unit, a signal and power integration unit, a power supply unit, a transmission rate regulation unit, a display unit, and a symmetric transmission control unit. The signal and power integration unit integrates the electrical power with the data packages, so that the normal data transmission line can also transmit electrical power alone with signals to the electrical devices which are connected to the network extending apparatus. Therefore, the electrical devices do not need any extra power transmission line or independent power supply for obtaining the requisite power.03-03-2011
20110051736COMMUNICATION RELAY SYSTEM - A communication relay system relays communications between communication terminals performing the communications according to a plurality of communication protocols. The communication relay system includes pseudonymous identification information acquiring sections associated with respective communication protocols. Each of the pseudonymous identification information acquiring sections acquires pseudonymous identification information which is information according to the associated communication protocol and is different from terminal identification information for identifying each of the communication terminals. The communication relay system includes a communication relay section which, when receiving communication information according to a communication protocol from one of the communication terminals, replaces the source terminal identification information included in the communication information with pseudonymous identification information acquired by the pseudonymous identification information acquiring section, and transmits the communication information after the replacement to another one of the communication terminals.03-03-2011
20110188507METHOD FOR ALLOCATING A RESOURCE AMONG CONSUMERS IN PROPORTION TO CONFIGURABLE WEIGHTS - A method for allocating a resource among a plurality of consumers of the resource is described herein. For each consumer of the plurality of consumers, a configurable weight associated with the consumer is determined. For each consumer of the plurality of consumers, credits assigned to the consumer at a first interval of a plurality of variable intervals are determined. The credits may be assigned in proportion to the configurable weight associated with the consumer. A consumer is selected for servicing based on the credits of the consumer. The selected consumer is serviced.08-04-2011
20110188508Gateway Apparatus, Authentication Server, Control Method Thereof and Computer Program - One aspect of the present invention will provide a gateway apparatus being able to communicate with a user terminal and provide the user terminal with a GBA authentication between the gateway apparatus and an authentication server, comprising, a receiving unit operable to receive a HTTP request addressed to a network address of the gateway apparatus from the user terminal, a requesting unit operable to request an GBA authentication to the authentication server according to the reception of the HTTP request, and a transmission unit operable to transmit the HTTP request, after the GBA authentication, to the authentication server using a network address of the authentication server preliminarily received from the authentication server.08-04-2011
20090175283Advanced single-chip USB-to-Ethernet controller with a Dual-PHY mode capacity for Ethernet PHY or USB-to-Rev-MII Bridging - This invention relates to a single-chip USB-to-Ethernet controller that can operate either as a standalone USB-to-Ethernet controller integrated circuit chip in one mode, or the Ethernet PHY or the USB-to-Rev-MII Bridging chip in another mode, namely Dual-PHY mode, to interface with an external Network Microcontroller's Ethernet MAC for providing Ethernet and USB Device interface in a network communication system and to provide a mechanism for auto-detection and auto-selection between the Ethernet interface and USB Device interface through some Station Management Register access wherein the Network Microcontroller's Ethernet MAC can access two PHY devices through the same Station Management Interface.07-09-2009
20090175282Using a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Channel to Save Power for Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) That Use User Datagram Protocol (UDP) - Provided is a method for maintaining a Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection between a mobile device and a server over a wireless network in a manner that conserves the power supply of the mobile device and is suitable for connections that employ server-initiated traffic. After a successful login to a VPN server, a VPN client establishes a Transport Control Protocol (TCP) connection and a UDP connection with the server. After a power timeout, the server calculates the elapsed time between the current transmission and the last tunnel traffic. If the elapsed time exceeds a power timeout value, the VPN server transmits a simple control message to the client via the TCP channel. The client then reestablishes the UDP connection to the client and the server resumes transmission on the reestablished UDP channel.07-09-2009
20090175281SWITCH DEVICE, SWITCHING METHOD AND SWITCH CONTROL PROGRAM - A switch device is composed of a switch portion 07-09-2009
20110170552PACKET RELAY APPARATUS - When burst traffic causes a packet to overflow or to be ready to overflow from a queue, a packet relay apparatus mirrors only the packets to be accumulated in that queue. An outgoing queue management unit copies a packet into a queue in an outgoing queue list and then obtains the length of the queue (step 07-14-2011
20110206054DATA SESSION HANDLING - A method and apparatus to transfer a data session from one device connected to a residential gateway to another. The transfer is completed within the residential gateway, without routing data through the service provider's network. In one embodiment, a native address of a communication device engaged in an active data session is stored in a memory as a temporary device address. A session address in memory is set equal to the stored temporary device address and the temporary device address is associated with the session address in memory. When a request to transfer the data session to another device is received, the temporary device address in memory set to the native address of the new communication device and the session history is sent to the new device. Any new data received in the session, intended for the original device, is routed by a data session handling engine to the new communication device.08-25-2011
20120307833DOMAIN GATEWAY CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - A domain gateway control system and a method are provided. The system includes a gateway device configured at an interface of a domain. The gateway device is further linked to more than one Ethernet. When the gateway device analyzes a data packet acquired from an Ethernet and detects that a destination MAC address data of the data packet points to a net device in the domain, the gateway device records a gateway MAC address data in a source MAC field of the data packet and records a domain type code data corresponding to the domain in an Ethernet-type field of the data packet to convert the data packet into a domain packet used in the domain. Any net device in the domain that acquires the domain packet learns the gateway MAC address data, and does not learn a device MAC address data of an external device of the Ethernet.12-06-2012
20100020812COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ACCESS GATEWAY APPARATUS - A communication system comprising a home server, an access gateway, and a policy server, wherein the policy server transmits, to the first access gateway, a link creation request for associating a communication path of the first terminal and a communication path of the second terminal; and the access gateway sets a fifth communication path which connects the first communication path and the third communication path upon receiving the link creation request, records information on the set fifth communication path in the communication path management information, and transmits the data from the first terminal via the first communication path to the second terminal via the fifth communication path and the third communication path based on the communication path management information.01-28-2010
20110216778MULTIFABRIC ZONE DEVICE IMPORT AND EXPORT - A Fibre Channel router used to join fabrics. EX_ports are used to connect to the fabrics. The EX_port joins the fabric but the router will not merge into the fabric. Ports in the Fibre Channel router can be in a fabric, but other ports can be connected to other fabrics. Fibre Channel routers can be interconnected using a backbone fabric. Global, interfabric and encapsulation headers are developed to allow routing by conventional Fibre Channel switch devices in the backbone fabric and simplify Fibre Channel router routing. Phantom domains and devices must be developed for each of the fabrics being interconnected. Front phantom domains are present at each port directly connected to a fabric. Each of these is then connected to at least one translate phantom domain. Zoning is accomplished by use of a special LSAN zoning naming convention. This allows each administrator to independently define devices are accessible.09-08-2011
20100290477METHOD FOR ROUTING TRAFFIC IN A GATEWAY - The present invention concerns a gateway device comprising a first interface to a first network, a second interface to a second network, the getaway having an address on the second network, a router that is adapted to route traffic between the first network, the second network and the gateway, a tunneling module that is adapted to lease the address to a first device located on the first network, a host module for sending and receiving traffic through said router, and a tracking module that is adapted to enable the host module to communicate to the second network when the address is leased to the first device.11-18-2010
20080267198Support of C-tagged service interface in an IEEE 802.1ah bridge - In one embodiment, a Provider Backbone Edge Bridge (BEB) IEEE 802.1ah compliant apparatus includes a B-component having one or more provider backbone ports, and a first I-component coupled with the B-component, the first I-component being configured to support a S-tagged interface. A second I-component is also coupled with the B-component, the second I-component being configured to support a C-tagged interface, thereby facilitating direct connection to a device operating in compliance with IEEE 802.1Q specification. It is emphasized that this abstract is provided to comply with the rules requiring an abstract that will allow a searcher or other reader to quickly ascertain the subject matter of the technical disclosure.10-30-2008
20120033678MULTI-CHASSIS INTER-PROCESS COMMUNICATION - Aggregation Switches connected via a virtual fabric link (VFL) are each active and able to communicate via an inter-process communication (IPC) using an IPC Virtual Local Area Network (IPC VLAN). A sub-set of Customer-facing ports (CFPs) of each Aggregation Switch are coupled to the VFL and assigned to the IPC VLAN to enable communication therebetween.02-09-2012
20080267197Circuit Assembly and Data Transmission Method - A circuit assembly and an associated method are provided, which allow a user to autonomously influence the quality of the data that is to be transmitted, especially language data that is to be transmitted via the IP network, by controllingly addressing an adjusting unit via an evaluator and signalor when a selected coder-decoder is to be used.10-30-2008
20120307836IN-VEHICLE-DATA RELAYING DEVICE AND VEHICLE CONTROL SYSTEM - An object of the present invention is to provide a technique making it possible to transmit and receive communication data among multiple types of networks in an in-vehicle network having the networks therein. An in-vehicle-data relaying device according to the present invention relays communication data to a different in-vehicle-data relaying device when the transmission destination of the communication data is a network not directly connected to the in-vehicle-data relaying device.12-06-2012
20120307834Synchronous Network Switch - A network router connects network nodes within a ring network for transferring frames of data within the network. It has a plurality of network ports which pro-vide a physical interface to the network nodes. The network router further has a routing processor which is connected to the network ports. The routing processor is configured for receiving frames and transmitting frames at the same time. It reads a specific payload section from a frame to be received and places with payload section within another specific payload section of a frame to be transmitted.12-06-2012
20100284413DUAL HOMED E-SPRING PROTECTION FOR NETWORK DOMAIN INTERWORKING - A system for controlling packet forwarding through a dual-homed connection between first and second network domains, the dual-homed connection including two peer nodes connected to the first and second network domains. A sub-ring network is instantiated in the first network domain, and includes at least two nodes connected in a linear topology between a pair of end-nodes. Each end-node corresponds with a respective one of the peer nodes. A virtual link through the second network domain for conveys traffic of the sub-ring network between the peer nodes, and closes the sub-ring network to define a ring topology. Each of the nodes of the sub-ring network is controlled to forward packets of the sub-ring network in accordance with a ring network routing scheme.11-11-2010
20090185573PSUEDOWIRE TERMINATION DIRECTLY ON A ROUTER - A method, apparatus and computer program product for routing data within a packet-switched network using a PW wherein the PW is terminated directly on the layer-3 routing device such that certain services and applications can be utilized is presented. The method, apparatus and computer program product receives an encapsulated layer-2 Protocol Data Unit (PDU) from a pseudowire emulating a service. The encapsulation is removed from the encapsulated layer-2 PDU and a layer-2 circuit associated with the pseudowire is terminated. The circuit is treated as an interface and the PDU is forwarded based on upper layer protocol information within the PDU.07-23-2009
20090116497Ethernet Performance Monitoring - One embodiment is a source router that monitors the performance of an Ethernet network. The source router generates an Ethernet connectivity check request frame that includes a transmission timestamp, and transmits the Ethernet connectivity check request frame to a destination router. The source router receives a reply from the destination router that is transmitted in response to receiving the Ethernet connectivity check request frame and determines a round trip time between the source router and the destination router based on a time of receipt of the reply and the transmission timestamp.05-07-2009
20090103551MEDIA GATEWAY AND PACKET FILTERING METHOD THEREOF - A media gateway (MG) and a packet filtering method thereof are provided to enhance the adaptability of the packet filtering mechanism on the MG. The packet filtering rule for a service instance may be changed dynamically, namely, the MG analyzes the currently transmitted packets of a service instance, obtains the state change of the instance, and then dynamically changes the packet filtering rule of the instance according to the state change of the instance. The present invention extends the property parameters of the H.248 protocol or MGCP protocol and adds a property parameter that indicates the dynamic packet filtering function is enabled or disabled and a property parameter that indicates the service type so that the MGC can enable or disable the packet filtering function for the instance of the specified service type flexibly according to the values of such parameters.04-23-2009
20110305244GATEWAY CONFIGURATION UPDATING - The configuration of a gateway in a communications network may be updated. Provisioning data may be extracted from a gateway management server. The extracted provisioning data may be filtered against a list of target gateways. Upon determining an equipping status of endpoints associated with the target gateways in the list, the configuration of one or more target gateways may be updated utilizing existing endpoint provisioning associated with the one or more target gateways.12-15-2011
20100284419Auto-Selection of SGMII or SERDES Pass-Through Modes - Methods and systems for operating a physical layer device (“PHY”) in an Ethernet network include methods and systems for detecting active link partners and for selecting a mode of operation based on detected active link partners, without user intervention. The PHY monitors fiber link media and copper link media for active link partners. The PHY selects a mode of operation according to detected active link partners. For example, a serial gigabit media independent (“SGMII”) mode of operation is selected when an active copper link partner is detected and an active fiber link partner is not detected. Similarly, a serialize/deserialize (“SerDes”) pass-through mode of operation is selected when an active fiber link partner is detected and an active copper link partner is not detected. The PHY interfaces with the active copper link partner when the SGMII mode of operation is selected. Conversely, the PHY interfaces with the active fiber link partner when the SerDes pass-through mode of operation is selected. The SGMII or SerDes pass-through mode of operation can be prioritized for when active copper and fiber link partners are detected. The prioritized mode can be user selectable or factory set. The invention optionally powers down circuitry associated with an unselected mode of operation.11-11-2010
20110305245NETWORK SWITCH - A network switch including a plurality of switches are mutually connected operable as one switch stack with maintenance operation to be logically performed, and wherein the switch stack can be constructed by connecting a plurality of switches having different enclosing conditions. A stackable switch operable under one of the following two operation references of switches: only one or a plurality of switches having the largest enclosing condition play as a master and the backup and if communication cannot be made or backup and the switch having the largest enclosing condition serving as an alternative switch does not exist, it is regarded that the switch stack entered an operation incapable state; and the switch operates in accordance with the smallest enclosing condition among all of the switches constructing the stack.12-15-2011
20080267200Network Router Based on Combinatorial Designs - A router architecture based on combinatorial design. The router includes a plurality of input channels; a plurality of processors; a plurality of output channels; and buses interconnecting the input channels, processors, and output channels in a manner such that each pair of channels exists in only a pre-selected number of processor (pairwise balance property) and subsets of output channels, connected to processing elements. covers entire set of output channels (full covering property).10-30-2008
20110110379METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTIG UP UPLINK COMMON BEARER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for setting up an UpLink common bearer shared by a plurality of User Equipments (UEs) in a wireless communication network is provided. The apparatus includes a Serving GateWay (S-GW) for receiving a group identifier of a UE from a Mobility Management Entity (MME), sending a create bearer request message including the group identifier to a Packet Data Network (PDN) GateWay (P-GW), receiving a create bearer response message including UL common S05-12-2011
20100166000 Broadbrand Switched Multiplexer - A broadband switched multiplexer comprising an input broadband demultiplexer (07-01-2010
20090003358Signaling Architecture for Decomposed Service Network Elements Operable with IMS - In one embodiment, a service gateway decomposition method is described that is operable in an Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) environment. A service gateway controller (SGC) is provided for effectuating a signaling interface with respect to at least one remote services server. One or more service gateways (SGWs) are provided for effectuating a message transport interface with respect to the remote services server, wherein the SGC and SGWs are interfaced together using a suitable signaling architecture.01-01-2009
20120099600TRANSCEIVER HAVING HEAC AND ETHERNET CONNECTIONS - A transceiver having HEAC and Ethernet connections is disclosed. An active hybrid & common-mode bias (AHCB) unit facilitates the transmission of differential transmission signals and the reception of first differential reception signals. An Ethernet line gate controllably configures the pairing among first and second differential Ethernet signals, the differential transmission signals and second differential reception signals. An Ethernet physical-layer (PHY) transceiving unit receives both or one of the first and second differential reception signals and the differential transmission signals, followed by processing the reception signals at a physical layer.04-26-2012
20080259942Arrangements For Providing Peer-To-Peer Communications In A Public Land Mobile Network10-23-2008
20110064087Method for Dynamical Adjusting Channel Direction and Network-on-Chip Architecture thereof - A method for dynamical adjusting channel direction and Network-on-Chip architecture thereof are provided. The Network-on-Chip architecture of dynamical adjusting channel direction comprises a first channel, a first router and a second router. The first channel has a first transmission direction. The first router generates and outputs a first output request when receiving a first data. The second router is coupled to the first router through the first channel. The second router receives the first data through the first channel when receiving the first output request.03-17-2011
20110064086Fiber Channel over Ethernet and Fiber Channel Switching Based on Ethernet Switch Fabrics - An apparatus comprising a Converged Port Controller (CPC) comprising a plurality of first ports and a plurality of second ports, and an Ethernet Switch Fabric (ESF) coupled to the second ports, wherein the CPC is configured to receive a plurality of Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) frames on the first ports, modify at least some of the FCoE frames, thereby producing modified FCoE frames, and transmit the FCoE frames on the second ports. An apparatus comprising at least one processor configured to implement a method comprising receiving a plurality of FCoE frames, a plurality of Fiber Channel (FC) frames, and a plurality of Ethernet frames, modifying the FCoE frames, thereby producing modified FCoE frames, encapsulating the FC frames in an Ethernet format, thereby producing a plurality of second FCoE frames, and switching the modified FCoE frames, the second FCoE frames, and the Ethernet frames using an Ethernet switch fabric.03-17-2011
20110064089PCI EXPRESS SWITCH, PCI EXPRESS SYSTEM, AND NETWORK CONTROL METHOD - Provided are a first PCI-PCI bridge that handles Multi Root to connect to a plurality of root complexes; a second PCI-PCI bridge that connects to an endpoint; a virtual PCI Express switch that performs a switching process between the first and second PCI-PCI bridges; and a network control device that transfers data that is to be processed in the virtual PCI Express switch to an external switch through a network without passing through a PCI-PCI bridge.03-17-2011
20110064088COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD IN RING NETWORK - A ring connection apparatus according to one embodiment is provided with: a frame receiver that receives frames to be transmitted to one of the plurality of ring networks from each of the plurality of networks; and a frame transmitter that transmits each of frames, a passing frame to be transmitted from a device to another device inside said one ring network and a crossing frame to be transmitted to a device in said one ring network from a device in another ring network different from said one ring network, to said one ring network within the range of a band, which is separately determined in advance.03-17-2011
20120044944System and Method for Carrying Path Information - A routing bridge in a Transparent Interconnection of Lots of Links (TRILL) domain includes a link coupled to a device in the TRILL domain, and an Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) Traffic Engineering (TE) module that receives configuration information from the device, and that determines that data packets received by the routing bridge need to be routed to the device based upon the configuration information. The routing bridge receives a data packet, and routes the data packet to the link in response to the IS-IS TE module determining that the data packet needs to be routed to the device.02-23-2012
20120155483Video Router and Method of Automatic Configuring Thereof - A video router comprises a multiple port Ethernet switch that may used to connect at least one Internet Protocol (IP) camera; a power over Ethernet unit that supplies power to the at least one connected IP camera; at least one network interface; and a central processing unit (CPU) capable of running a routing software that automatically discovers and configures the at least one connected IP camera.06-21-2012
20120155481Gateway device capable of enhancing video packet transmission quality and method thereof - The present invention is to provide a gateway device which, when determining that a network device connected thereto is a web camera and receives a packet from the web camera, is able to automatically add a port of the gateway device connected with the network device to a VLAN designated by the gateway device and then add a specific group code to the packet to specify the VLAN, such that the gateway device can transmit the packet to the VLAN according to the specific group code. The gateway device is then able to automatically set transmission priority of the packet to a high priority, such that after the packet is transmitted out of the VLAN, the packet can be transmitted through a transmission channel with the high priority, so as to improve the convenience of using the web camera and assure the transmission priority of the packet in the VLAN.06-21-2012
20120155479SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING A CALL WITH A TDM NETWORK AND ROUTING THE CALL WITH AN IP NETWORK - A system for processing calls with a time division multiplexing (TDM) network and routing the calls via an internet protocol network is disclosed. The system may receive a call from a call originating device. The call may then be routed to a time division multiplexing switch at which call processing is performed to determine routing information for the call. The routing information may then be received at a first VoIP media gateway, and the call may then be routed by the first VoIP media gateway. Once the call is answered, the connection between the time division multiplexing switch and the VoIP media gateway may be terminated to enable the total number of terminations to be reduced, thereby creating a more efficient system.06-21-2012
20110090914METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING AN ENERGY EFFICIENT NETWORK UTILIZING AUDIO VIDEO BRIDGING - Aspects of a method and system for managing an energy efficient network utilizing Audio Video Bridging are provided. Communications on an Ethernet link may be scheduled into a plurality of recurring time slots, where the scheduling comprises reserving resources of the Ethernet link utilizing the Audio Video Bridging suite of protocols. One or more occurrences of one or more of the recurring time slots may be designated for carrying out an energy efficient networking transaction on the link. The energy efficient networking transaction may be carried out during the designated one or more occurrences of the one or more of the recurring time slots. The energy efficient networking transaction may comprise communicating information for scheduling a change in the data rate on the network link. The energy efficient network transaction may comprise communicating information for implementing the change in the data rate.04-21-2011
20110158246NETWORK SYSTEM OF DATA COMMUNICATION - A data communication network system comprises: a data receiving layer which comprises data communication terminals (DCT), a route layer which comprises routers. Each of the routers receives data from the DCTs or from other router 06-30-2011
20110158245NETWORK DEVICE WITH VIRTUAL SWITCH FABRIC - Methods and apparatus for processing packet data are disclosed. An example apparatus includes a plurality of network interfaces configured to send and receive packet data. The example apparatus further includes a switching module coupled with the plurality of network interfaces, the switching module being configured to communicate the packet data to and from the plurality of network interfaces. The example apparatus still further includes a fabric interface controller coupled with the switching module. The example apparatus also includes a virtual fabric interface controller coupled with the fabric interface controller.06-30-2011
20110158244INTELLIGENT ETHERNET GATEWAY SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING SERIAL COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Systems, devices, and computer readable media for optimizing serial communication networks provide an intelligent network gateway through which network data flows. Systems and devices monitor network requests for data packets supplied by slave computing devices, examine the supplied data packets, and copy the supplied data packets to a memory device. The supplied data packets are delivered to a first requesting network device and when an additional network request for the data packets is made by a second requesting network device the data packets are delivered from the memory device to the second requester in response to the additional network request without interrupting the slave computing device to redundantly supply the data packet. Polling by multiple requester devices for redundant data from slave computing devices is avoided. Communication response times are improved, data caching is provided for devices that have no logging memory, and optimum communication settings can be automatically determined.06-30-2011
20110317711EXTENSIONS TO IPV6 NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY PROTOCOL FOR AUTOMATED PREFIX DELEGATION - In one embodiment, a method comprises detecting, by a router, a first router advertisement message from an attachment router that provides an attachment link used by the router, the first router advertisement message specifying a first IPv6 address prefix owned by the attachment router and usable for address autoconfiguration on the attachment link. The router detects an unsolicited delegated IPv6 address prefix from the attachment router and that is available for use by the router. The router claims a second IPv6 address prefix from at least a portion of the delegated IPv6 address prefix, for use on at least one ingress link of the router.12-29-2011
20110317710ENHANCED RELIABILITY ROUTING PROTOCOL - In a method of enhanced reliability routing within a system including one or more networks having several nodes connected together by communication means, the system using a link-state routing protocol constructing the topology of the nodes within a system of nodes, the routing method determines the logical topology of network interconnection nodes NIN by using modules which perform the following: discovery of the neighbourhood by functions of the physical networks; smoothing of the information provided by TNAs to improve the stability of the protocol; distributing the neighbourhoods to the set of NINs; relaying of the information associated with a node by a subset of the NIN node; hop by hop enhancement of the reliability of the transmission between various nodes; transmission in point-to-multipoint mode; announcement of oriented characteristics of logical links solely by the source routers of the links; marking of the signalling data so as to manage non-sequencing in reception; and calculation of the global topology.12-29-2011
20110317709MANAGEMENT OF SERVING GATEWAYS FOR ENHANCED PERFORMANCE - Various embodiments relate to a system and related method for managing a connection of a user device to a communications network. Various embodiments relate to a Policy and Charging Rules Node (PCRN) receiving a user requests through multiple serving gateways. The PCRN may assign one of the serving gateways as a primary serving gateway when the serving gateway sends a Gateway Control Session that binds to an IP-CAN session established in the PCRN. When the PCRN receives a subsequent message from another serving gateway, the PCRN may reassign the new serving gateway as primary when its Gateway Control Session matches. The PCRN may then mark the former serving gateway as pending termination and signal the marked gateway to terminate. After sending rules to serving gateways not pending termination, the PCRN may delete those serving gateways marked for termination.12-29-2011
20090135840METHOD FOR ADJUSTING MSS OR PACKETS SENT TO A BRIDGE DEVICE POSITIONED BETWEEN VIRTUAL AND PHYSICAL LANS - A method and apparatus are provided for use with a SEA or other bridge device, which is positioned between virtual and physical LANS and is adapted to monitor connection setup packets. If the SEA detects such a packet, it determines whether it can accommodate the MSS value listed in the packet. In one embodiment, a method is provided for implementation by a bridge device positioned to transfer data packets between a specified LPAR system arid a specified host. The method comprises the step of detecting a packet that is transmitted to the bridge device, in order to set up a connection between the LPAR system and the host. The method further comprises determining whether the detected packet indicates an initial MSS value for the connection that is greater than a prespecified MSS value. Upon determining that the detected packet indicates an initial MSS value that exceeds the prespecified MSS value, the packet is altered to establish the prespecified MSS value as the MSS value for the connection.05-28-2009
20120044950ALLOCATION OF ROUTE TARGETS BASED ON SERVICE - A network controller to allocate route targets for communication services provided on one or more corresponding virtual private networks, the route targets identifying service providers associated with the virtual private networks and the communication services provided by the corresponding virtual private networks.02-23-2012
20120044948MULTIPLE CORE NETWORK DEVICE WITH CORE REDUNDANCY - An embodiment of a network device includes a plurality of switch cores and a plurality of ports for receiving and transmitting data frames on a network disposed on a single integrated circuit, where switch core is coupled to a subset of the plurality of ports. The network device includes a deactivator configured to selectively deactivate at least a portion of one or more switch cores among the plurality of switch cores on the single integrated circuit, and the network device is configured to forward data frames among the plurality of ports based on a configuration of active portions of the plurality of switch cores. The deactivated portions may include ingress processing pipelines, egress processing pipelines, and/or entire switch cores. The portions of the switch cores to be deactivated may be dynamically be determined based on connectors of the integrated circuit.02-23-2012
20120044947FLOODING-BASED ROUTING PROTOCOL HAVING DATABASE PRUNING AND RATE-CONTROLLED STATE REFRESH - An enhanced, flooding-based link state routing protocol is described that provides pruning of link state data and, when needed, rate-controlled refresh of the pruned link state data from other routers of the flooding domain. A routing device comprises a network interface to send and receive packets over a layer-two (L2) communication medium. The routing device includes a control unit coupled to the network interface, and a flooding-based link state routing protocol executing on a processor of the control unit. The link-state routing protocol establishes an adjacency with a peer router. A database of the routing device includes entries that store a plurality of link state messages for a flooding domain of the link state routing protocol, wherein at least one of the entries in the database stores a partial link state message having a header portion and a payload having pruned link state data.02-23-2012
20120044946ROUTER AND METHOD OF PASSING IPV6 DATA PACKETS THROUGH THE ROUTER - In a router and a method of passing IPv6 data packets through the router, the router receives a data packet from a local area network or the wide area network. The router determines if the data packet is a IPv6 data packet or a non-IPv6 data packet . The router routes the data packet to a destination address via the network layer of the open system interconnect, upon the condition that the data packet is a non-IPv6 data packet; or bridges the data packet to the destination address via the data link layer, upon the condition the data packet is a IPv6 data packet.02-23-2012
20120044945Mechanism for Implementation of System Signaling 7 (SS7) Layers as Microcontainer Beans in a Media Gateway - A mechanism for implementation of system signaling 02-23-2012
20120044943Method and system for layer-2 pseudo-wire rapid-deployment service over unknown internet protocol networks - An International Standards Organization (“OSI”) Layer-2 (“Ethernet”) Pseudo-wire (“OSI Layer-1 type service”) appliance, method, system and hub service is disclosed. The method and system facilitate the rapid deployment of Layer-2 Pseudo-wires over unknown and untrusted Internet Protocol (“IP”) networks. The method and system facilitate the fluid edge of corporate networks and any situation where the Layer-3 network addresses cannot be changed.02-23-2012
20100189116Routing A Packet Flow In A VLAN - According to one embodiment, routing a packet flow includes routing the packet flow from a sender along a first VLAN to a receiver by applying a first service tag to the packet flow. The first service tag comprises a first VLAN identifier with a first masked portion indicating the first VLAN, where the first masked portion is masked to the receiver. The packet flow is sent to the receiver along the first VLAN. The packet flow is switched to a second VLAN associated with the first VLAN by applying a second service tag to the packet flow. The second service tag comprises a second VLAN identifier with a second masked portion indicating the second VLAN, where the second masked portion is masked to the receiver. The packet flow is sent to the receiver along the second VLAN.07-29-2010
20120207174DISTRIBUTED SERVICE PROCESSING OF NETWORK GATEWAYS USING VIRTUAL MACHINES - A network gateway device includes an ingress interface, an egress interface, and a load balancing module coupled to the ingress and egress interfaces. The load balancing module configured to receive a packet from the ingress interface, determine a set of a plurality of processes corresponding a connections session associated with the packet based on a policy. For each of the identified processes, the load balancing module is to identify a service processing module executed by a virtual machine that is capable of handling the identified process, and to send the packet to the identified service processing module to perform the identified process on the packet. The packet is then transmitted to the egress interface of the gateway device to be forwarded to a destination.08-16-2012
20120008633BRIDGE APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A bridge apparatus including a first line card and a second line card is provided. The first line card includes a first memory storing an association between a line card and a destination address, a first receiver receiving a frame from the second line card including a flag indicating whether a memory of the second line card stores the destination address of the frame, a determination circuit determining whether the first memory stores the destination address of the received frame, when the first flag added to the received frame indicates that the second memory does not store the destination address of the frame, and a first transmitter transmitting, when the determination circuit determines the first memory stores the destination address of the frame, address information associated with at least the destination address of the frame to the second line card, the destination address being stored by the first memory.01-12-2012
20120008634FIRST RELAY SERVER AND SECOND RELAY SERVER - A communication system achieves excellent flexibility and expandability and includes communication terminals that communicate with each other through a WAN. A first relay server and a second relay server share relay group information and relay server information. In the relay group information, a network address of a first LAN that performs routing control via the first relay server and a network address of a second LAN that performs routing control via the second relay server are registered. The first and second relay servers establish a routing session via a WAN. When a communication terminal connected to the first LAN sends out a communication packet in which an IP address of a communication terminal connected to the second LAN is designated, the communication packet is routed through the routing session between the first and second relay servers while being encapsulated.01-12-2012
20120044949ROUTE OPTIMIZATION OF A DATA PATH BETWEEN COMMUNICATING NODES USING A ROUTE OPTIMIZATION AGENT - The invention relates to optimizing a data path between two communication nodes. A route optimization agent (ROA) is determined in the current network of the second communication node, preferably on the data path between the two communication nodes. Then, an IP tunnel is established between the first communication node and the ROA, the IP tunnel and the corresponding security association of said IP tunnel being based on the home address of the first communication node in its home network. The first communication node may have two IP tunnels based on the same home address, one to its home agent and one to the ROA. Corresponding routing entries and binding cache entries need to be established in the ROA and the first communication node so that all data packets between the two communication nodes are exchanged via the established IP tunnel over the ROA.02-23-2012
20090323704HYBRID TOPOLOGY ETHERNET ARCHITECTURE - A distributed control system comprises a first network section comprising one or more control nodes containing control logic operable to perform control function computations; a second network section, wherein the second network section comprises; a plurality of additional nodes responsive to the one or more control nodes in the first network section, each of the plurality of additional nodes communicatively coupled to two neighbor nodes and to two skip nodes using a plurality of links; first and second gateway interfaces each coupled to the first and second network sections and each operable to interface the first network section to the second network section; wherein the first network section is operable to communicate signals using a first communication protocol; and wherein the plurality of nodes in the second network section are operable to communicate signals over the plurality of links using a second communication protocol that is different from the first communication protocol.12-31-2009
20120014390PROCESSOR TOPOLOGY SWITCHES - A first processor has a processor port for peer-to-peer processor communications. A switch provides for switching communications from a path between said first processor and a second processor to a path between said first processor and a third processor (and vice-versa).01-19-2012
20120014389PROVIDING NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS SATISFYING APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS USING VIRTUALIZATION - A method of providing network communications includes receiving, at a second device via a virtual network connection associated with virtual dispersive routing (VDR) software that virtualizes network capabilities of the second device, a packet communicated from a first device over a connection path comprising a plurality of other devices, the packet including a header and a payload, the payload including data appended thereto by one or more devices of the plurality of devices; and determining, at the second device by the VDR software, whether the connection path satisfies one or more requirements of an application running on the second device, the determination being based at least in part on the data appended to the payload by the one or more devices of the plurality of other devices.01-19-2012
20120057602RELAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND FIRST RELAY SERVER - A relay communication system includes a first client terminal which creates routing group information including network addresses of first and second LANs, and identification information of the first client terminal and a second client terminal which execute routing processing, and which shares the routing group information with the second client terminal. Based on the routing group information, a routing session is established between the first and second client terminals. A communication terminal connected to the first LAN sends out a communication packet in which an IP address of a communication terminal connected to the second LAN is designated. The communication packet is encapsulated by the first client terminal, and is routed by using the routing session.03-08-2012
20120057601ACCURATE MEASUREMENT OF PACKET SIZE IN CUT-THROUGH MODE - A network device operating in a cut-through mode receives a current packet of an unknown length and determines if there is a known length value of a previous packet in a processing cycle associated with the current packet. When there is no known length value of the previous packet, the network device applies, to the current packet, an estimated length value for the current packet. When there is a known length value of the previous packet, the network device applies, to the current packet, the known length value of the previous packet. The network device processes the current packet based on one of the estimated length value or the known length value of the previous packet.03-08-2012
20100189117Distributed IP Gateway Based on Sharing a MAC Address and IP Address Concurrently Between a First Network Switching Device and a Second Network Switching Device - In one embodiment, a method comprises assigning, by a distributed gateway protocol circuit in a first network switching device, a shared Media Access Control (MAC) address to a shared Internet Protocol (IP) address, the shared MAC address and the shared IP address enabling connected network devices to reach a distributed IP gateway in a network; and sending, by a layer 2 forwarding circuit in the first network switching device, an instruction via a peer data link to a peer layer 2 forwarding circuit in a second network switching device in response to the distributed gateway protocol circuit claiming active control of the distributed IP gateway, the instruction enabling the second network switching device to operate as part of the distributed IP gateway based on concurrent use of the shared MAC address and the shared IP address by the first network switching device and the second network switching device.07-29-2010
20120155482MANYCORE NETWORKS-ON-CHIP - A manycore networks-on-chip (NoC) formed by a plurality of clusters is provided. The manycore NoC includes redundant routers and connection channels therefore is fault-tolerant as long as the numbers of damaged routers and damaged connection channels are under predetermined thresholds. Moreover, the NoC can retain its original logical topology without isolating any core after resetting the connection channels in response to the damaged routers and connection channels.06-21-2012
20120027021NETWORK SIMULATION RACK AND SYSTEM - Various exemplary illustrations are provided of systems and methods for simulating a communication network. An exemplary system may include a communication router rack in communication with an external network. The rack may include a structure supporting a plurality of network router cards, each including a plurality of communication ports configured to allow selective communication between communication devices connected to the router cards and the external network. The router rack may further include a switching circuit enclosed by the rack structure that is in physical communication with the plurality of network router cards. The switching circuit may be configured to determine a unique network identifier for each of the plurality of network router cards to the external network. The rack may further include an external communication port configured to be selectively connected to the external network to allow communication between the plurality of network router cards and the external network.02-02-2012
20120027023TRANSMISSION DEVICE - When multiple SDH/SONET frame are accumulated and then lower-order path information removed from multiple frames is multiplexed into the same packet to achieve better transmission efficiency during packetization, the delay for accumulating increases. Disclosed is a transmission device that packetizes an SDH/SONET lower-order path with timing which is an integer factor of 1 cycle of the SDH frame. In this case, the destination loads the same multiple lower-order path in one packet. The result is that delay time accompanying lower-order path packetization is kept to less than the time of 1 cycle of the SDH frame, and the efficiency with which lower-order paths are accommodated in packets is further increased. The result is that improved transmission efficiency is realized.02-02-2012
20120063466Specifying Priority On a Virtual Station Interface Discovery and Configuration Protocol Response - An apparatus comprising an Edge Virtual Bridging (EVB) bridge coupled with an EVB station wherein the EVB bridge is configured to communicate to the EVB station a Filter Information (Info) field of a virtual station interface (VSI) discovery and configuration protocol (VDP) Associate Response message, and wherein the Filter Info field specifies a default Priority Code Point (PCP) value associated with at least one or all of a plurality of VID values carried by that VDP TLV Response.03-15-2012
20120063465ACCESS NETWORK DUAL PATH CONNECTIVITY - A transport network employs dual homing to an access network to provide connectivity from multiple network switches. Dual homing is a mechanism by which an access network employs pair of switches in the transport network as if it were connecting to a single device. Conventional arrangements for defining multiple paths from a transport network to an access network suffer from the shortcomings of potential routing loops, increased hops to the access network, and inability or inconsistency with forwarding to different types of access networks, and may involve redirecting traffic absent faults in the access network. The dual homed network switches identify the type of access network and perform switching logic corresponding to the access network type to provide comprehensive dual-homed support to the access network independently of the type of transport employed in the access network, and employ redirection only if there is a fault in the access network.03-15-2012
20120063464PAGING CONTROL IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - This disclosure relates to a system and method for providing a mechanism control page requests sent in a wireless communication network. The paging control mechanism can be implemented in a gateway through a combination of hardware and software to determine whether packets received at a gateway trigger a page. The packets received at the gateway are intended for user equipment that is indicated to be in an idle state with no bearer connection. The paging mechanism controls paging when paging requests need to be sent. In some communication networks, page requests can be sent that are not needed because a bearer connection or link is in the process of being established. The control can be asserted by adding intelligence to the gateway to determine—on receipt of downlink data or signaling—how to proceed based on the state of the user equipment and the bearer connection.03-15-2012
20090135838SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING LINK AGGREGATION AND OTHER LAYER-2 PROTOCOLS PRIMARILY OVER UNIDIRECTIONAL LINKS - Traffic through a bridge or other network device is directed in a manner that enables link aggregation and other layer-2 protocols to operate fully, even though the device may have as few as a single bidirectional link, with the remaining links being unidirectional. The protocol stack logic of the network device includes shim logic that receives traffic and processes it to determine to where it is to be directed.05-28-2009
20090135839PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK-TO-NETWORK INTERCONNECTION INTERFACE - In one of many possible embodiments, an exemplary method includes establishing a secure packet-switched connection for exchanging predefined signaling messages between network elements associated with distinct network domains, determining and implementing at least one media exchange technology for transporting media between the network domains, exchanging signaling and media border processing information between the network domains, exchanging access device information between the network domains, determining and implementing at least one service policy associated with the network domains, and providing a packet-switched network-to-network interconnection interface configured for peering at least one session between the network domains based on the predefined signaling messages, media exchange technology, signaling media border processing information, access device information, and service policy.05-28-2009
20090052461Method and Apparatus for Fibre Channel Over Ethernet Data Packet Translation Via Look up Table Conversion Bridge in a Network System - A network system supports multiple network communication protocols. In one embodiment, network device driver software provides a “Fibre Channel over Ethernet” communication capability and methodology. Device driver software manages a Fibre Channel to Ethernet and Ethernet to Fibre Channel address translation in real time for data packet communications in the network system. Different embodiments of the disclosed network system include multiple name servers and network device driver software that together provide multiple adapter name discovery methodologies. In one embodiment, the adapter name discovery methodologies include port name discovery and adapter attributes discovery.02-26-2009
20120155480FLEXIBLE PARAMETER CACHE FOR MACHINE TYPE CONNECTIONS - The present invention relates to a method for improving parameter cache in a communication system, the system enabling Machine Type Communication, MTC, connection between at least one MTC device (06-21-2012
20110069715ACCELERATING DATA COMMUNICATION USING TUNNELS - Methods and systems are provided for increasing application performance and accelerating data communications in a WAN environment. According to one embodiment, packets are received at a flow classification module operating at the Internet Protocol (IP) layer of a first wide area network (WAN) acceleration device via a shared connection-oriented tunnel, which is operable to convey application layer data for connection-oriented applications between WAN acceleration devices. Packets that are classified as being associated with an existing connection-oriented flow are passed to a WAN socket operating at the transport layer. Based on the application protocol, the packets are passed to an application handler of multiple application handlers operating at the application layer each of which implements one or more application acceleration techniques for a particular poorly behaved WAN protocol. The existing connection-oriented flow is securely accelerated by performing one or more application acceleration techniques and applying one or more security functions.03-24-2011
20120300786MEDIA CONVERSION DEVICE FOR INTERCONNECTING COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICES WITH MEDIA CONVERTED AND A METHOD THEREFOR - A gateway device includes a SIP server and a media converter. The SIP server uses media communication control data output from communication terminal devices (CTDs) to discriminate the communication media standards adopted by the CTDs, based on a call control, to call-control the CTDs. The media converter uses the communication media standards discriminated and acquired to convert media data, delivered from the CTDs, involved in communication, to a signal of a relevant communication media standard. The SIP server causes the communication media standard and information used for communication to be stored in an information memory. The media converter includes input/output interfaces, a controller, a media converter circuit and a data switcher. The interfaces verify whether or not the received data is media data, the media converter circuit converts the communication media standard of received media data received from the source CTD to a communication media standard of the destination CTD.11-29-2012
20110075675PROVIDING SERVICES AT A COMMUNICATION NETWORK EDGE - As the proliferation of data rich content and increasingly more capable mobile devices has continued, the amount of data communicated over mobile operator's networks has increased. Upgrading the existing network that was designed for voice calls is not desirable or practical for many mobile operators. This disclosure relates to a mobility edge gateway that resides on the edge of the core network and can provide one or more services such as call localization, offloading of traffic, session management, and content streaming. The call localization involves identifying calls that can be maintained at the edge of the network and bridging the calls at the mobility edge gateway to bypass the core network. The offloading involves identifying traffic and offloading the traffic to the Internet or another network to bypass the core network. These services can relieve congestion on the core network of mobile operator's networks.03-31-2011
20100098092ACCELERATING DATA COMMUNICATION USING TUNNELS - Methods and systems are provided for increasing application performance and accelerating data communications in a WAN environment. According to one embodiment, a method is provided for securely accelerating network traffic. One or more tunnels are established between a first wide area network (WAN) acceleration device, interposed between a public network and a first local area network (LAN), and a second WAN acceleration device, interposed between a second LAN and the public network. Thereafter, network traffic exchanged between the first LAN and the second LAN is securely accelerated by (i) multiplexing multiple data communication sessions between the first LAN and the second LAN onto the one or more tunnels, (ii) performing one or more of application acceleration, transport acceleration and network acceleration on the data communication sessions and (iii) performing one or more security functions on the data communication sessions.04-22-2010
20100172360BEST EFFORT SEAMLESS NETWORK SWITCH IN A MEDIA STREAMING SESSION - Systems, methods, and machine-readable media are disclosed for switching a media streaming session between a plurality of networks. In one embodiment, a method of switching networks in a media streaming session can comprise detecting a plurality of networks available for communication of streaming data. The plurality of networks can include a first network providing a first streaming session and a second network. A determination can be made as to whether to switch the first streaming session from the first network. Determining to switch the first streaming session from the first network to the second network can be based on detecting a loss of the first network, detecting a lower cost alternative to the first network, etc. In response to determining to switch the first streaming session from the first network, the first streaming session can be switched from the first network to the second network.07-08-2010
20100172361METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RELIABLE COMMUNICATIONS IN A PACKET NETWORK - A system and method are disclosed for reliable communications in a packet network. A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a network management system (NMS) having a controller programmed to establish between first and second customer edge (CE) routers in a full mesh packet network first and second logical data tunnels conforming to an isolation protocol, synchronize packet data in the first and second logical data tunnels, enable packet data exchanges between the first and second CE routers over the first logical data tunnel, direct the first and second CE routers to duplicate the packet data exchanged between them over the second logical data tunnel, and direct the first and second CE routers to synchronously switch to the second logical data tunnel upon detecting a fault in the first logical data tunnel.07-08-2010
20100172359INTELLIGENT ALG FUNCTIONALITY IN NETWORKS SUPPORTING ENDPOINTS PERFORMING NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION - In one embodiment, a signaling message is received from an endpoint. It is determined from the signaling message whether, prior to sending the signaling message, the endpoint performed network address translation on the body of the signaling message. If it is determined from the signaling message that, prior to sending the signaling message, the endpoint did not perform network address translation on the body of the signaling message, application layer gateway functionality is applied to the body of the signaling message such that a modified signaling message is generated.07-08-2010
20110103394NETWORK TOPOLOGY CONCEALMENT USING ADDRESS PERMUTATION - A first packet is received from a client over an internal network destined for a remote node of an external network. The first packet includes a source IP address having an internal network portion that identifies a location of the client in the internal network and an external network portion that identifies a location of the internal network accessible by the external network. An obfuscation operation is performed on the internal network portion of the source IP address of the first packet to conceal the location of the client in the internal network and the internal network portion of the source IP address of the first packet is rewritten with the obfuscated internal network portion while maintaining the current external network portion of the source IP address. Thereafter, the first packet is transmitted to the remote node over the external network.05-05-2011
20110103393SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION IN A TACTICAL NETWORK - A system, apparatus, and method are described for communication in a tactical network. A gateway is communicatively couplable to one or more tactical nodes and to one or more other gateways. The gateway is programmed to transmit information to and/or receive information from other gateways. Information exchanged includes gateway attributes, link attributes, service availability, and/or data availability. The gateway optionally provides quality of service, distributed persistence, load balancing, and/or transformation services. Services are provided in a modular, service-oriented architecture (SOA) to accommodate the addition of services and/or applications.05-05-2011
20110103392System and Method to Support Secondary Channel Connection from Residential Gateway to Service Provider Network - The present disclosure is directed to an apparatus and method for providing service to a residential gateway. The method includes detecting a service disruption associated with a first connection to a first residential gateway device. In response to the detected service disruption, a second residential gateway device selected at the first residential gateway may be used to establish a second connection to the first residential gateway device.05-05-2011
20130010802DEMARCATION BETWEEN SERVICE PROVIDER AND USER IN MULTI-SERVICES GATEWAY DEVICE AT USER PREMISES - An application gateway including application service programming logically positioned on a user premises side of a network demarcation forming an edge of the wide area network at a user premises can provide managed services to a user and one or more endpoint devices associated with the application gateway. The application gateway can be controlled remotely by the application service provider through a service management center and configured to execute an application service provided from the application service provider. The application gateway executes the application service at the user premises independent of application services executing on the application service provider's network. An application service logic manager can communicate with an application service enforcement manager to verify that the request conforms with policy and usage rules associated with the application service in order to authorize execution of the application service on the application gateway, either directly or through endpoint devices.01-10-2013
20120120963SUBSEA ELECTRONIC MODULE - An electronic module for use as a subsea electronic module (SEM) for an underwater fluid extraction well, as provided. An example of such an SEM includes a plurality of substantially planar electronics cards to operate devices in the SEM. The cards are arranged in a stack such that major faces of each card are oriented substantially parallel to, and coaxial with, major faces of the other cards in the stack. The SEM also includes a substantially planar switch card orientated relative to the stack such that its major faces are oriented substantially parallel to a main axis of the stack and orthogonal to the orientation of the major faces of the electronics cards within the stack. The switch card includes a first Ethernet switch blade configured to control traffic on a LAN area network and a second Ethernet switch blade configured to control traffic on a second LAN.05-17-2012
20120314714Method, Device for Implementing Identifier and Locator Split, and Method for Data Encapsulating - A method for implementing Identity and Locator Split is provided. The method is applied in a MPLS network. ITR and ETR are also LERs in the MPLS network. The method includes: establishing a point to point LSP tunnel between ITR and ETR by running a MPLS signaling protocol; the ITR storing an EID of endpoint and RLOC mapping as well as a RLOC and outer MPLS label mapping, and forwarding the endpoint's data packets in the MPLS network based on the outer MPLS label corresponding to the RLOC. A data encapsulation method for Identity and Locator Split and a LER device in the Identity and Locator Split network are also provided in the present invention. The present invention greatly improves the encapsulation and transmission efficiency of LISP data packets in the MPLS network.12-13-2012
20120314713METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROXY ENTITY REPRESENTATION IN AUDIO/VIDEO NETWORKS - Communication in an AV network includes a Talker device initiating communication with a Listener device via a proxy device for data streaming. The proxy device participates in one or more of: content discovery, connection establishment, AV selection and AV streaming between the Talker device initiating communication with a Listener device.12-13-2012
20120314712SIGNAL SWITCHING APPARATUS - A signal switching apparatus includes a switch circuit having a common terminal and first to third terminals, and enabling two terminals among the first to third terminals to be simultaneously connected to the common terminal while enabling the first to third terminals to be individually attachable/detachable to/from the common terminal, and an amplification circuit of which an input terminal is connected to the first terminal, and an output terminal is connected to the second terminal. Here, gain in the output terminal being an output point, with respect to a signal level in the common terminal being an input point, is switched to a first gain when only the first terminal is connected to the common terminal, a second gain when only the second terminal is connected to the common terminal, and a third gain when the first and second terminals are simultaneously connected to the common terminal.12-13-2012
20100091780FRAME TRAFFIC BALANCING ACROSS TRUNK GROUPS - Embodiments of methods, apparatuses and/or systems for logical ports in trunking are disclosed. For example, a method of routing a flow of frames may include applying a correspondence between logical ports and physical ports of a switch.04-15-2010
20100290479METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PARAMETERIZING A BRIDGE WITHIN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - In order to parameterize, within a communication network, a bridge to be put in communication with at least one element to be connected to said bridge, said bridge comprising at least one created port, a parameter representing a predetermined waiting period and corresponding to a time for detection by said bridge, during a phase of listening to the data received by said at least one created port, of the presence of any communication loop within said network, is determined; a filtering of said at least one created port is activated, said filtering being adapted to prevent the sending and reception by said at least one created port of inter-bridge management messages; the bridge is configured with said parameter thus determined; a new port of said bridge is created with a view to setting up communication with said at least one element; and said filtering is deactivated.11-18-2010
20100290478Using Internet Protocol Version Six (IPv6) Tunnel for Access Identifier Transport - A method comprising encapsulating a message with a tunnel header comprising an access identifier associated with a network entity. Also included is an apparatus comprising an access node (AN) configured to communicate with a residential gateway (RG) via the access network, wherein the AN is configured to encapsulate a router solicitation (RS) with a header comprising an access identifier associated with the RG, and send the encapsulated RS to an Internet Protocol (IP) edge, wherein the AN is configured to receive a router advertisement (RA), and wherein the AN is configured to forward the RA to the RG associated with the access identifier.11-18-2010
20100290475Source-Based Steering Data Communications Packets For Transparent, Bump-In-The-Wire Processing Among Multiple Service Applications - Steering data communications packets among multiple service applications in a link-level data communications switching apparatus that includes a link-level data communications switch and data communications ports coupling the switching apparatus to networks organized into pairs of networks, and ports connected to service applications, the switching apparatus further including rules governing the steering of data communications among service applications and networks, at least one rule that includes a network code that identifies a network pair and a direction of travel between the networks, including receiving data communications packets directed to a destination network, each packet containing a source network address, and steering by the switching apparatus each packet, the steering carried out only in accordance with the rules, using neither the source network address of the packet, the destination network address of the packet, nor the link-level identifier of any service application.11-18-2010
20100290476One-Way Router - A one-way router combines benefits of a network diode and router, and thus can route data between networks of varying confidentiality and/or integrity in a secure, one-way fashion. Secure routing is provided transparently so that the router is compatible with standard network applications by synthesizing responses for standard network protocols to provide many-to-many network connections while preventing bidirectional data flow. Separate network stacks are provided for each connected network, and the network stacks are separated from each other by data diodes that enforce one-way data flow. The one-way router can be implemented in hardware or software, and provides architectural flexibility to customize levels of assurance, performance, reliability, and cost.11-18-2010
20120120962COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CLIENT AND SERVER USING MULTIPLE NETWORKS - A system is provided to facilitate communication with a client via both a first network and a second network. The system comprises a plurality of bandwidth aggregation servers, each bandwidth aggregation server configured to aggregate data packets received from the client via both the first and second networks for transmission to a destination server; and transmit data packets to the client via both the first and second networks in accordance with a scheduling algorithm, the data packets being received from a source server.05-17-2012
20100254398MIMIC SUPPORT ADDRESS RESOLUTION - Mimicking network devices with a computing device having first and second network interface cards, the first network interface card connecting the computing device to an external network and the second network interface card connecting the computing device to a local network, including obtaining an IP address of a device on the local network, determining an IP address for the second network interface card based on the obtained IP address of the device on the local network, and assigning the determined IP address to the second network interface card.10-07-2010
20100254394Gateway Entity - A simple gateway and an improved controlling method for controlling said gateway are provided to distinguish between different kinds of messages without requiring the gateway to be fully aware of the protocol. The gateway (10-07-2010
20100246588SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE FOR VERY FAST ETHERNET BLADE - The system of the present invention provides data transmission speeds at or in excess of 10 gigabits per second between one or more source devices and one or more destination devices. The system comprises a media access control (MAC) interface to facilitate receipt and transmission of packets over a physical interface. A first field programmable gate array is coupled to the MAC interface and operative to receive packets from the MAC interface and configured to perform initial processing of packets, which are dispatched to a first memory. A second field programmable gate array is operative to retrieve packets from the first memory and configured to compute an appropriate destination, which is used to dispatch packets to a backplane. A third field programmable gate array is provided that is operative to receive packets from the backplane and configured to organize the packets for transmission, which are dispatched to a second memory. A fourth field programmable gate array is coupled to the MAC interface and operative to retrieve packets from the second memory and configured to schedule the transmission of packets to the MAC interface for transmission to one or more destination devices.09-30-2010
20100246589SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ACCESSING VOICE TRANSMISSIONS - Various systems and methods for intercepting transmissions are disclosed. In one embodiment, a system is disclosed that includes a media gateway communicably coupled to a soft switch and an acquisition facility. A first processor and a first computer readable medium are associated with the soft switch. The computer readable medium includes instructions executable by the processor to receive a transmission originating from a first communicator and indicating at least a second communicator, and to direct the transmission to the acquisition facility via the media gateway. A second processor and second computer readable medium are included, and the second computer readable medium includes instructions executable by the second processor to direct the transmission from the media gateway to the second communicator such that direction of the transmission to an acquisition facility is obscured from at least the second communicator. Various other systems and methods are also disclosed.09-30-2010
20100246587MULTITOPOLOGY ROUTING METHOD AND SYSTEM - Method and system for routing data streams in a meshed system, in which use is made of multitopology routers each provided with an intelligent module and wherein at least one step is implemented which takes account of the flow objectives associated with a data stream, the intelligent module associated with each multitopology router determines the proportion of resources reserved for the streams established for the various operational importances and a metric of links is calculated for each of the topologies, and each multitopology router driven by its intelligent module determines a routing table for each topology.09-30-2010
20120128005NETWORK RELAY SYSTEM AND METHOD OF AUTOMATICALLY SETTING A NETWORK RELAY SYSTEM05-24-2012
20120128004METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CENTRALIZED VIRTUAL SWITCH FABRIC CONTROL - In some embodiments, an apparatus comprises a processing module, disposed within a first switch fabric element, configured to detect a second switch fabric element having a routing module when the second switch fabric element is operatively coupled to the first switch fabric element. The processing module is configured to define a virtual processing module configured to be operatively coupled to the second switch fabric element. The virtual processing module is configured to receive a request from the second switch fabric element for forwarding information and the virtual processing module is configured to send the forwarding information to the routing module.05-24-2012
20100226380Transmission line adapter and system - A data transmission system forming a network including transmission line sections comprising traditional infrastructure such as AC power line (mains), twisted-pair (e.g. CAT-5) and coaxial cable wiring interconnected with a novel adapter to form a data system also providing data transfer over an extended length and diversity of connected equipment. Further combined with a data bridge connected to conventional format data (e.g. Ethernet) and to the traditional data infrastructure wiring, the novel adapter permits connection to any 2 of twisted pair/multi-pair, coaxial and power mains for data flow therebetween.09-09-2010
20100208743SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMIC DATA TRANSFER MANAGEMENT ON A PER SUBSCRIBER BASIS IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method of dynamically managing transmission of packets is disclosed. The method, in some embodiments, may comprise establishing a network session over a communication link between a network and a user device of a user and associating a data transmission parameter with the user device. The method may further comprise receiving a packet and calculating a delay period associated with the packet based on the data transmission parameter and delaying transmission of the packet based on the delay period.08-19-2010
20100208742PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD USING NODE IDENTIFIER AND LOCATOR - A home node and a destination node, which are specified by node identifiers, acquire locators thereof and mapping of the node identifiers and the locators, prior to communication, and they are transmitted after the address of a packet specified by the node identifier is rewritten by the locator at the time of communication. Because roles of the node identifier and the locator are separated, the communication method is suitable for mobile communication and multi-homing. In addition, the communication method makes it possible to reduce use amount of global addresses, and thus solve an address exhaustion problem.08-19-2010
20110182297METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING VOICE TRAFFIC OVER A RESIDENTIAL GATEWAY - A system and method for managing voice communication between devices located within a local network and other devices. The present invention permits the managing and selective routing of voice communications over VoIP systems, circuit-based cellular systems and public switched telephone network systems based upon predefined criteria such as Quality of Service (QoS) considerations, geographic considerations, cost considerations and other factors.07-28-2011
20110182295AUTOMATICALLY IDENTIFYING AN EDGE-FACING ROUTER - Techniques for automatically identifying an edge-facing router in a network are provided.07-28-2011
20120163394Route Switching Device and Data Cashing Method Thereof - The present invention discloses a routing and switching device and a data caching method thereof. The method includes: a routing and switching device, when receiving a data packet, and if the routing and switching device inquires that a data caching state of an exterior cache is that there are data slice row addresses not fully filled and continuous space in the data slice row addresses not fully filled is enough to store all the data slices of the data packet, then writing all the data slices of the data packet into the data slice row addresses not fully filled, storing packet information of the data packet and the written data slice row addresses, and updating the data caching state of the exterior cache. The present invention enhances the utilization rate of the memory bandwidth. In addition, the present invention is also easy to be applied in other relevant data caching managements.06-28-2012
20120163393METHOD FOR PLACING IN STANDBY AND WAKING UP A RESIDENTIAL GATEWAY ACCORDING TO PROGRAMMABLE TIME SLOTS - The present invention concerns a method for putting on standby and waking up a domestic gateway, characterised in that a time slot is stored by the gateway and the gateway is put on standby at the start of the said time slot and woken up at the end of the said time slot. It also concerns a domestic gateway that implements the said method.06-28-2012
20120163392PACKET PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - A packet processing apparatus and method are provided. According to the packet processing apparatus and method, it is possible to manufacture a product within a short period of time in a case in which there are signals that are not provided by an existing network processing unit (NPU) through a bridging algorithm that is realized in a field programmable gate array (FPGA).06-28-2012
20090059935Colored access control lists for multicast forwarding using layer 2 control protocol - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving, by an access node, multicast control parameters for white, black, and grey lists of multicast groups. The access node applies the multicast control parameters to an IGMP process running on a port associated with a subscriber. In response to receiving an IGMP message requesting joining a multicast group, the access node either: autonomously forwarding the multicast group on the port where the multicast group in on the white list, blocking the multicast group on the port where the multicast group in on the black list, or relying on a Layer 3 broadband network gateway (BNG) to instruct the access node whether to add a forwarding entry on the port for the multicast group where the multicast group in on the grey list. It is emphasized that this abstract is provided to comply with the rules requiring an abstract that will allow a searcher or other reader to quickly ascertain the subject matter of the technical disclosure.03-05-2009
20090059940NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION GATEWAY FOR LOCAL AREA NETWORKS USING LOCAL IP ADDRESSES AND NON-TRANSLATABLE PORT ADDRESSES - A network address translation gateway provides normal network translation for IP datagrams traveling from a local area network using local IP addresses to an external network, but suspends source service address (port) translation when the port is reserved for a specific protocol, such as the ISAKMP “handshaking” protocol that is part of the IPSec protocol model. ISAKMP exchanges require both source and target computers to use the same service address (port). By providing a network interface that does not translate the source service address (port), this gateway enables the initiation and maintenance of secure, encrypted transmissions using IPSec protocol between a local area network using local IP addresses and servers on the internet.03-05-2009
20090059939System, Method and Computer Program Product for Residential Gateway Monitoring and Control - A system, method and computer program product is provided that allows an end user to monitor and/or control various data streams appearing on one or more customer premises equipment (CPE) interfaces of a residential gateway, even where the data streams are of different types such as voice, video or computer data. The invention provides a user interface, implemented as part of a CPE device or as a stand-alone device, that is accessed by an end user to transmit commands to a residential gateway. A processor within the residential gateway executes gateway monitoring and control software that receives the commands and, in response, performs the necessary routing and conversion of data streams to execute the desired monitoring and/or control functions.03-05-2009
20090059938High security backplane-based interconnection system capable of processing a large amount of traffic in parallel - An inter-network connection system is provided with a plurality of interface boards capable of processing traffic in a lower layer, an upper layer processing board capable of processing traffic in an upper layer, and an inter-board connection board capable of intervening in information transfer between the interface board and the upper layer processing board. The interface board has its input/output ports paired as port groups. When traffic is input through one input/output port of a port group, the traffic is output through the other input/output port of this port group. Only when the traffic is to be processed in the upper layer, the traffic is transferred from the interface board to the upper layer processing board. The inter-network connection system allows the amount of traffic processed in parallel to be increased with a high security configuration.03-05-2009
20090059937Network system for guarantee QoS - Provided is a network system which is coupled to first and second computers including: at least one network node; a network device; and a resource management server. In the network system, QoS requirements are set for a communication between the first and second computers; the second computer measures QoS of the first communication, and transmits the control information including an identifier of the first communication and a result of the measurement of QoS to the first computer; the network device captures the control information, and transmits to the resource management server a message including the identifier of the first communication and the measurement result which are extracted from the captured control information; and the resource management server estimates a cause of failure in satisfying the QoS requirements if the measurement result does not satisfy the QoS requirements, and sets QoS for the network node judged to involve the cause.03-05-2009
20090059936Process for manging resource address requests and associated gateway device - The invention concerns a gateway device comprising means for connection to a first device and means for connection to a second device for obtaining a network address as a function of a network resource identifier provided by the second device, and means for providing a false network address in response to a network resource identifier provided by the first device in case a real network address cannot be provided. The means for providing a false network address are adapted to provide a distinct false network address for a distinct network resource identifier—when the real address becomes available, a request made on the distinct false address allows the first device to obtain the corresponding real network address. The invention also concerns an associated process.03-05-2009
20090059934METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROVIDING A BRIDGE IN A NETWORK - A method and device for providing a bridge between a distribution system and a wireless network device as provided increases network availability. According to one aspect, the method includes assigning a first wireless network device to a first wireless distribution system port in response to processing a first identification message received from the first wireless network device. A second wireless network device is then assigned to a second wireless distribution system port in response to processing a second identification message received from the second wireless network device after assigning the first wireless network device to the first wireless distribution system port. The bridge is then provided between the distribution system and the first wireless network device via the first wireless distribution system port.03-05-2009
20120170589METHOD FOR PROVIDING SELECTIVE SERVICE BY SELECTIVE SERVICE MODULE AND HOME GATEWAY USING THE SAME - A selective service providing method using a selective service module, and a home gateway using the same are provided. A home gateway includes a module port for mounting a service module which provides a particular service; a communication interface for receiving a function result of the service module mounted to the module port; a display interface connected with a display; and a processor for sending the function result received from the service module through the communication interface, to the display through the display interface. Thus, the user's intended service can be selectively provided using the selective service module.07-05-2012
20120170588DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD - A transmission unit of a first device transmits, before transmitting at least one data packet including data to be transmitted located in a data region to another device, a first packet notifying that usage of a serial bus is to be started to a second device. The second device includes a flag register storing a bus usage flag representing a usage state of a serial bus. A reception unit of the second device sets the bus usage flag at an engaged state upon receiving the first packet. A transmission transmits a data packet to another device as long as the bus usage flag is not set at an engaged state.07-05-2012
20120170587GENERIC BUS DE-MULTIPLEXER/PORT EXPANDER WITH INHERENT BUS SIGNALS AS SELECTORS - A circuit comprising: a device determiner configured to, in a first mode of operation, receive a device selection signal via at least one of: at least one control line and at least one signal line; and a device router configured to, in a second mode of operation, route signals between the at least one of: at least one control line and at least one signal line and at least one device dependent on the device selection signal.07-05-2012
20080304498Packet mirroring - Network devices, systems, and methods are provided for packet processing. One network device includes a network chip including logic and a number of network ports for the device for receiving and transmitting packets therefrom. The logic is operable to mirror packets on a per port per virtual local area network (VLAN) membership basis.12-11-2008
20080212595Mapping PBT and PBB-TE traffic to VPLS and other services - Transferring data in a network is disclosed. Transferring includes receiving a Provider Backbone Transport (PBT) frame, identifying a plurality of location specific identifiers in the PBT frame, mapping the PBT frame to a service based at least in part on the plurality of location specific identifiers, formatting the PBT frame according to the service to obtain a service frame, and transferring the service frame to a network associated with the service.09-04-2008
20080212596Method For Gate Controlling A Media Gateway - A method for gate controlling a media gateway mainly includes the following: the media gateway receives gate control information for gate controlling media streams of the media gateway from a media gateway controller; and the media gateway performs gate control to the media streams passing through the media gateway according to the gate control information.09-04-2008
20120177056METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISCLOSING PERSONAL NETWORK INFORMATION IN CONVERGED PERSONAL NETWORK SERVICE ENVIRONMENT - A method for disclosing, by a Converged Personal Network Service (CPNS) server, Personal Network (PN) information in a CPNS environment is provided. The method includes receiving a PN registration request message including information indicating an information openness level of a Personal Network Entity (PNE), which has been transmitted from the PNE, from a Personal Network GateWay (PN GW) for PN registration of the PNE; checking and storing the information indicating the information openness level of the PNE from the PN registration request message; receiving a service search request message for requesting information regarding a CPNS service provided by the PNE from a predetermined PN GW connected to a predetermined PNE; and checking the information indicating the information openness level of the PNE and providing the information regarding the CPNS service provided by the PNE to the predetermined PNE via the predetermined PN GW, wherein the PN information in the CPNS environment is disclosed in a system including the CPNS server for providing the CPNS service, the PN GW connected to the CPNS server, and the PNE connected to the CPNS server via the PN GW.07-12-2012
20120076151Multi-Bridge LAN Aggregation - A method and system for multi-bridge LAN aggregation is disclosed. The method includes aggregating a plurality of LANs coupling a host to a first and a second intermediate network device. The system includes an intermediate network device. The intermediate network device includes a multi-bridge engine. The multi-bridge engine includes a tunnel engine coupled to a bridge interconnect port and a first physical port.03-29-2012
20090016368System and method for obtaining localized information through a structured overlay network - A method of obtaining and using configuration information for communication devices in a P2P overlay for optimizing decision making based on locality is provided. An alpha-numeric hierarchical look-up procedure is provided that includes a general-to-specific search of a query having a result mapping of a location and purpose of the configuration information of the communication device. A registration procedure is provided for registering at least one resource, where the resource is found by the search on the overlay. The resource can be a communication device location, communication device information or the configuration information. The method provides calling an outside device from the overlay device and determining a gateway service provider that is most proximal to an area code or an exchange of the outside device by using the result mapping. An outside connection is established from the overlay device to the outside device, where a calling toll is minimized.01-15-2009
20100272116METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RESPONDING TO TERMINATION SERVICE STATE CHANGE INDICATION - A method for responding to termination service state change indication is provided. The method includes: receiving a command message indicating a termination service state change, in which the command message at least includes a method parameter and a duration parameter, the method parameter indicates a change method of the service state, and the duration parameter indicates a maintaining duration of the service state after being changed; and changing the service state of the termination according to method parameter content information of the received command message, and maintaining the changed service state according to duration parameter content information of the received command message. Accordingly, a media gateway controller (MGC) and a media gateway (MG) of the termination service state change indication based on the media gateway control protocols are also provided. The termination service state change and the maintaining duration of the service state after being changed are indicated simultaneously, which is rather convenient for the MG or MGC to realize effective subsequent control on the termination after the service state change of the termination.10-28-2010
20100272114ALERTS LIFE CYCLE - Server computers and methods for updating or changing user alert message settings when changes are made to one or more user accounts are disclosed. The change in the user accounts can include transfers of a user account or user account identifier from one user account issuer to another user account issuer. The change in user accounts can be initiated by a user or issuer associated with the user account. When changes are made to the user accounts or changes are made to the user alert message settings, the server computer can confirm the changes with the user or issuer associated with the user accounts that are changed.10-28-2010
20100272113SWITCHING UNIT AND METHOD FOR A TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A switching unit for a telecommunication network, such as an SDH telecommunications network, comprises a command controlled switching matrix having at least two switching degrees of freedom and a control logic for generating a first type of control commands which, for a group of connections, define the switching thereof in a first degree of freedom, and at least a second type of control commands which specify, for a given connection, the switching thereof in all degrees of freedom. Between the control logic and the switching matrix, a conversion circuit there is operative for combining control commands of the first type with control commands of the second type into a control command of the second type.10-28-2010
20120224588DYNAMIC NETWORKING OF VIRTUAL MACHINES - The invention is directed to the use of Provider Backbone Bridging (PBB) technology with Shortest Path Bridging, also called Provider Link State Bridging (PLSB) technology in the context of data centers and virtualized physical servers infrastructures. Virtual servers can be located anywhere inside the data center, or across different data centers, and still act as though they are physically adjacent and share the same Ethernet connectivity. Ethernet virtual machine VLan memberships are mapped to PBB Service Identifiers (I-SIDs). PBB I-SIDs extend the connectivity model to every Ethernet switches in the local, metropolitan or wide area networks. PLSB complements the connectivity by providing dynamic distribution and mapping of I-SID endpoints in the PBB domain. Virtual servers can then be added, removed or transferred to another point in the network and PLSB adjusts the VLan/I-SID specific connectivity pattern to match the physical distribution of the servers.09-06-2012
20100008374RELAY APPARATUS, RELAY PROGRAM, RELAY METHOD, AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR MANAGING DEVICES CONNECTED TO NETWORK - A relay apparatus includes: a tag information acquisition section that acquires tag information attached to the network-connected device; a management section that manages the tag information read out by the tag information acquisition section and an IP address assigned by the management apparatus, and an identification information assigned to the relay apparatus itself in association with one another; and a processing section that receives information that the management apparatus has transmitted with the tag information or IP address as a transmission destination and receives information transmitted from the network-connected device for execution of predetermined processing.01-14-2010
20100008372Network component, method for the operation of such a network component, and automation system with such a network component - A network component including three ports as well as a method for the operation thereof is provided. The ports are exclusively allocated to individual hierarchical levels of a topology of an automation system, in which the network component is operated along with an optional plurality of additional network components, such that telegrams sent in the automation system are efficiently forwarded, particularly on the basis of designators assigned to the network component as an alias. The designators are assigned in an especially recursive process.01-14-2010
20100008371Routing facility for a subsea electronics module - A routing facility (01-14-2010
20100008369System, Method, and Device for Routing Calls Using a Distributed Mobile Architecture - Methods and devices for routing communications between distributed management architecture (DMA) servers using DMA gateways are disclosed. Communications information is received at a first DMA gateway for a communications network accessible by a second DMA gateway. The communications information indicates one or more devices that are accessible by one of a DMA server and a legacy communications network. The first DMA gateway and the second DMA gateway participate in a DMA gateway communications network. The communications information is stored in a home DMA register of the first DMA gateway. A communication is received at the first DMA gateway for a target device indicated by the communications information to be served by the second DMA gateway. The communication is routed from the first DMA gateway to the target device by relaying the communication from the first DMA gateway to the second DMA gateway via the DMA gateway communications network.01-14-2010
20100284416Network relay device and ring network - A network relay device constituting a network includes a transmit/receive unit having plural ports; an FDB for storing as its registered contents at least a port identifier for identifying each of the plural ports, or an LAG port into which are grouped a specified number of the plural ports, a terminal identifier for identifying a terminal, and an FDB_ID for being associated with both the port identifier and the terminal identifier; and an FDB_ID table for storing the FDB_ID associated with the port identifier. When the registered contents of a specified port or LAG port stored in the FDB are erased, the stored FDB_ID associated with the port identifier identifying that port or LAG port is rewritten as another value.11-11-2010
20120257633MULTI-ACCESS COMMUNICATIONS GATEWAY - A gateway which provides network connectivity via network service providers. A method and apparatus can integrate the various connectivity options provided by multiple service providers and present to the user a single point of connectivity. Having more than one way of network connectivity may provide the following additional services: Link Aggregation (to increase bandwidth), Redundancy and ancillary services like TOD (time-of-day) based smart usage (to reduce costs). The access medium may be wired technologies like Cable, DSL, Fiber to wireless 4G technologies. These options may offer various link speeds, latency, reliability and cost structures. The embodiments integrate the various connectivity options provided by multiple service providers and present to the user a single point of connectivity.10-11-2012
20120263185CONDENSED CORE-ENERGY-EFFICIENT ARCHITECTURE FOR WAN IP BACKBONES - An energy-efficient architecture for wide area network (WAN) Internet Protocol (IP) backbones in which a condensed core apparatus routes packets between access routers of different points of presence (PoPs), where the PoPs do not need to include core routers.10-18-2012
20120263187Two-Layer Switch Apparatus Avoiding First Layer Inter-Switch Traffic In Steering Packets Through The Apparatus - Link-level data communications implemented in switching apparatus comprising modular switches disposed within a modular computer cabinet that includes modular computer systems; the switching apparatus configured as two layers of switches, the first layer switches coupled to one another for communications by inter-switch links, each second layer switch coupled for communications to the modular computer systems; all the switches stacked by a stacking protocol that shares administrative configuration information among the switches through the inter-switch links and presents all the switches as a single logical switch; the switching apparatus including ports coupling the apparatus to networks and to service applications and terminating applications on the modular computer systems; and sending the packet from network to modular computer system to which the packet is directed, or from modular computer system to network to which the packet is directed, the packet traversing none of the inter-switch links among the first layer switches.10-18-2012
20120263186CONTENTS BASE SWITCHING SYSTEM AND CONTENTS BASE SWITCHING METHOD - In a routing process based on contents of a communication, there is a problem that it is required to carry out switching to refer to the contents every switch on a route or use a routing label. In order to solve the problem, a relay unit terminates data from a transmission source terminal and transfers the contents to a network controller. The network controller assigns flow data which is necessary for relay and issues a flow transfer instruction to a switch. The assigned flow data is notified to the relay unit and the relay unit sets a communication flow to a destination terminal by using the specified flow data, and relays the data to the destination terminal from the transmission source terminal.10-18-2012
20120257637Latent Space Switch using a Single Transposing Rotator - A single transposing rotator successively connects a set of access ports to a set of memory devices and the set of memory devices to the set of access ports. A set of inlet selectors connecting to rotator inlets and a set of outlet selectors connecting to rotator outlets are coordinated to concurrently connect the access ports to the memory devices through the rotator, and concurrently connect the memory devices to the access ports. Each memory device connects to an inlet selector and a corresponding peer outlet selector. Multiple temporal multiplexers submit upstream control messages from the access ports to a multi-port master controller. Multiple temporal demultiplexers distribute downstream control messages sent from the master controller to the access ports. Alternatively, the multi-port master controller may connect to selected inlet selectors and corresponding peer outlet selectors for successively receiving upstream control messages and sending downstream control messages.10-11-2012
20120257636Single-Rotator Latent Space Switch with an Embedded Controller - A single rotator successively connects a set of access ports to a set of memory devices and a multi-port controller and connects the set of memory devices and the multi-port controller to the set of access ports. The rotator has a set of inlets and a set of outlets and cyclically connects each inlet to each outlet during a rotation cycle. A set of inlet selectors connecting to the inlets of the rotator and a set of outlet selectors connecting to the outlets of the rotator are coordinated to concurrently connect the access ports to the memory devices and to the master controller through the rotator, and concurrently connect the memory devices and the master controller to the access ports. Each memory device connects to an inlet selector and a corresponding transposed outlet selector.10-11-2012
20120257635PACKET SWITCH AND METHOD OF USE - A packet switch device for providing visibility of traffic in a network includes a housing, a processing unit located in the housing, a first network port communicatively coupled to the processing unit, wherein the first network port is configured to communicate with the network, a second network port communicatively coupled to the processing unit, wherein the second network port is configured to communicate with the network, and at least one instrument port communicatively coupled to the processing unit, the at least one instrument port configured to communicate with a first network monitoring instrument, wherein the processing unit is configured to support a movement of packets from one or both of the first and second network ports to the at least one instrument port.10-11-2012
20120257634SOFTWARE CONFIGURABLE NETWORK SWITCHING DEVICE - A network switching device comprises a plurality of input/output devices for receiving or sending communication packets, including an enabler to enable a user to selectively group the input/output devices into one or more logical bridges, and create MAC level bridging between the input/output devices grouped with each logical bridge. Another embodiment of the device includes an enabler to enable a user to selectively connect the bridges with one or more logical routers and perform network layer routing between the bridges associated with each logical router.10-11-2012
20120189018Method And System For An Asymmetric PHY Operation For Ethernet A/V Bridging And Ethernet A/V Bridging Extensions - Signals may be communicated with A/V Bridging services between an upstream link partner and a down stream link partner, each comprising an asymmetric multi-rate Ethernet physical layer (PHY). High bandwidth A/V signals may be transmitted from the upstream link partner and low bandwidth signals may be transmitted from the downstream link partner. One or more of a time stamp, a traffic class and/or a destination address may be utilized in generating PDUs as well as data rate request and a resource reservation messages via the asymmetric Ethernet PHY. The receiving link partner may register for deliver of the PDUs. An aggregate communication rate may be distributed evenly or unevenly among one or more links for transmission and aggregated upon reception via asymmetric multi-rate Ethernet PHY operations. Compressed, uncompressed, encrypted and/or unencrypted signals may be handled. Signal processing may comprise echo cancellation, cross talk cancellation, forward error checking and equalization.07-26-2012
20120189016Network Apparatus and Process to Determine the Connection Context for Connections Used for (Local) Offloading - A method, system and device are provided for managing LIPA and/or SIPTO connection releases by providing predetermined context information in either the context request message or response thereto exchanged between source and target Mobility Management Entity (MME) devices to allow the appropriate MME device to determine if LIPA service continuity is provided or not.07-26-2012
20090034544State-based Communication Station Control System and Method - State-based communication stations are capable of operating on two or more “states.” Principles of the present invention are used to allow the functionality that a multi-state communication station is equipped to change as a result of the current state of the station. The functionality of modern communication stations remains much less hindered by the physical limitations of the stations' physical construction and design. While the number of buttons in a communication station remains the same, the number of functions that such buttons may execute is multiplied by the number of “states” that exist for the station.02-05-2009
20120082169METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FAST PASSING THROUGH SERVICES FOR SYNCHRONOUS DIGITAL HIERARCHY DEVICE - The present invention provides a method for fast passing through services in a SDH device including: a protection switching module compresses first pass-through time slots between adjacent protection ports to a second pass-through time slot; when an action of pass-through is triggered, the protection switching module sending the second pass-through time slot to a time slot configuration module to parse, and the time slot configuration module sending a parsing result to a time slot register to perform a process of a time slot pass-through. The present invention provides an apparatus for fast passing through services in a SDH device, including a protection switching module, a time slot configuration module and a time slot register. With the method and apparatus in the present invention, the processing time for the pass-through configuration is reduced obviously, which benefits to fast completion of protection switching and achieves fast recovery of ring protection network services.04-05-2012
20090016364Proxy Mobility Optimization - Systems and methods are described which provide communication between a correspondent node and a mobile node including receiving a home prefix of the mobile node and a list of correspondent nodes by a mobile access gateway having an access link with the mobile node and submitting proxy binding update messages by the mobile access gateway to a home agent corresponding to the mobile node and to each of the correspondent nodes in the list.01-15-2009
20090016363METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING AND/OR USING A COMMUNICATIONS BAND FOR PEER TO PEER SIGNALING - Methods and apparatus for supporting peer to peer communications are described. A plurality of wide area network communications bands in a wireless communications system are also available for use to communicate peer to peer signals. At different times it may be advantageous for a mobile peer to peer communications device to use a different communications band in order to efficiently share air link resources. A peer to peer communications device receives a signal transmitted by a WAN device, e.g., a base station or WAN wireless terminal, and selects a WAN communications band to use as a function of the received signal, e.g., a corresponding band. In some embodiments, the received signal strength measurements from WAN devices are used in the selection process. In other embodiments, recovered decoded information conveyed in a received WAN device signal is used in the selection process.01-15-2009
20090109983System and Method for Billing End Users in a Peer-to-Peer Transaction in a Network Environment - A method for billing end users in a peer-to-peer transaction in a network environment is provided that includes a client services packet gateway operable to communicate with a first end user and a second end user in order to facilitate the peer-to-peer transaction and a flow manager element operable to receive one or more packets of the peer-to-peer transaction from one or more interfaces, such that the interface is a subscriber interface or a network interface. The flow manager is further operable to associate a first session object with the first user and associate a second session object with the second user.04-30-2009
20120230344FORWARDING INTER-SWITCH CONNECTION (ISC) FRAMES IN A NETWORK-TO-NETWORK INTERCONNECT TOPOLOGY - Systems, mechanisms, apparatuses, and methods are disclosed for forwarding Inter-Switch Connection (ISC) frames in a Network-to-Network Interconnect (NNI) topology, for example, via a network switch which includes a first and second physical switch port to receive a first and second physical switch link from a second network switch; logic to implement first and second logical ISC′ connections to the second switch via the first and second physical switch links respectively; logic to implement a Primary Forwarder which is interfaced with a Secondary Forwarder in the second switch via the first logical ISC′ connection; logic to implement a Secondary Forwarder which is interfaced with a Primary Forwarder in the second switch via the second logical ISC′ connection; and switch forwarding logic to forward frames based on which connection the frames are received by, and/or based on a gateway identifier associated with each received frame. Other embodiments are disclosed.09-13-2012
20120230343ADDRESSING SCHEME FOR HYBRID COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A hybrid network device can implement an address management scheme for maintaining consistency between source/destination addresses and corresponding source/destination communication interfaces. In one embodiment, a first network device can select a first network path from a plurality of network paths associated with the communication network for transmitting a packet to a second network device. A source address can be determined from a plurality of addresses associated with a plurality of communication interfaces of the first network device. A destination address can be determined from a plurality of addresses associated with a plurality of communication interfaces of the second network device based, in part, on the selected first network path. The packet including at least the source address and the destination address can be transmitted via the first network path from a source communication interface of the first network device to a destination communication interface of the second network device.09-13-2012
20120230342METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING IN A SINGLE TIER SWITCHED NETWORK - A method and apparatus for more efficient routing of packets in a network is provided. The apparatus may include dynamic routing of packets or portions of packets which avoids congestion and blocking by making local decisions within the network. The apparatus may further include creating and updating routing tables which map switch outputs to available network output ports. Additionally the header of packets entering the network are processed prior to entry or as part of the entry to the network to produce a processed packet. The processed packets or portions of packets preferably include complete route information or a final destination address that enables rapid routing through the network without further processing of the packet header. One or more aspects of the inventions may be implemented in combination with other aspects of the invention to further improve network efficiency.09-13-2012
20110122882 Implementing method of removing duplication protection for multimedia messaging service interworking forwarding message and multimedia messaging service interworking gateway thereof - An implementing method for removing duplication protection for multimedia messaging service interworking forwarding message and multimedia messaging service interworking gateway. The method determines whether to return response message according to the different value of the acknowledgement request field of the request signaling. Using the SMTP-interactive-status code as a criterion, when the acknowledgement request field is set to be “NO”, requesting not to return the response message, and when the acknowledgement request field is set to be “YES”, requesting to return the response message. Determine whether the forwarding is successful by determining whether the SMTP-sending-status code returned by the response signaling is received according to the replying status of the response signaling.05-26-2011
20110122880GATEWAY DEVICE AND PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT METHOD - When streaming transfer of voice or image is performed using a real time streaming protocol (RTSP), streaming transfer of a high bit rate is enabled even in an environment of using network address port translation (NAPT) and network address translation-protocol translation (NAT-PT). When a SETUP message of RTSP is received, a port number having the same number of digits as a client port number notified by a client is assigned from a port number pool, and is registered in an NAPT table. The SETUP message is rewritten with the port number.05-26-2011
20110122879SYSTEM FOR SEAMLESS CONNECTION OF REAL AND VIRTUAL NETWORKS - A device, based on a standard router, that provides a seamless connection between real nodes and virtual, simulated nodes for the flow of both control and application traffic, such that new technologies and applications can be tested on a simulated large scale network with only a few real nodes.05-26-2011
20080298378Media conversion device for interconnecting communication terminal devices with media converted and a method therefor - A gateway device includes a SIP server and a media converter. The SIP server uses media communication control data output from communication terminal devices (CTDs) to discriminate the communication media standards adopted by the CTDs, based on a call control, to call-control the CTDs. The media converter uses the communication media standards discriminated and acquired to convert media data, delivered from the CTDs, involved in communication, to a signal of a relevant communication media standard. The SIP server causes the communication media standard and information used for communication to be stored in an information memory. The media converter includes input/output interfaces, a controller, a media converter circuit and a data switcher. The interfaces verify whether or not the received data is media data, the media converter circuit converts the communication media standard of received media data received from the source CTD to a communication media standard of the destination CTD.12-04-2008
20120327945Method and system for managing terminal states or terminal events in machine-to-machine or machine-to-man or man-to-machine (M2M) service - The disclosure discloses a method for managing terminal states or terminal events in a Machine-to-Machine, Machine-to-Man or Man-to-Machine (M2M) service, including: a terminal or a terminal gateway transmits state or event information of itself to a state or event management unit through a gateway device; an M2M service platform determines a service interaction operation with the terminal or the terminal gateway according to the state or event information of the terminal or the terminal gateway in the state or event management unit. The disclosure also discloses a system for managing terminal states or terminal events in an M2M service. With the method and the system, a network side can know the state or event of a terminal in time, and process services according to the state or event of the terminal, thus the success rate of the service is improved.12-27-2012
20110038379COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication apparatus in a second network, connected to a relay apparatus configured to relay a packet from a first network to the second network according to destination information of the packet from the first network, includes a receiving unit configured to receive identification information set to the communication apparatus, a processing unit configured to perform processing for enabling data provision to the first network, and a transmission unit configured to transmit to the relay apparatus, before data provision to the first network is enabled by the processing unit, a deletion request for deleting a destination information setting for relaying the packet from the first network to a destination specified by the received identification information.02-17-2011
20110002342NETWORK ACCESS METHOD, AUTHENTICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS AND RELEVANT DEVICES - A network access method, an authentication method, a communications system, and relevant devices are provided to support implicit authentication based on subscriber line information in Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6). The network access method includes: receiving a first request message sent from a User Equipment (UE) on an Access Node (AN), where the first request message carries a Link-Local Address (LLA); obtaining subscriber line information corresponding to the UE; and sending a second request message from the AN to a Broadband Network Gateway (BNG), where the second request message carries the LLA and the subscriber line information and instructs the BNG to perform access authentication. An authentication method, a communications system and relevant devices are also disclosed.01-06-2011
20110002341METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REMOTE ACCESS TO A LOCAL NETWORK - A method and apparatus for enabling remote access to a local gateway (01-06-2011
20110002340PIPELINE METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SWITCHING PACKETS - A switching device comprising one or more processors coupled to a media access control (MAC) interface and a memory structure for switching packets rapidly between one or more source devices and one or more destination devices. Packets are pipelined through a series of first processing segments to perform a plurality of first sub-operations involving the initial processing of packets received from source devices to be buffered in the memory structure. Packets are pipelined through a series of second processing segments to perform a plurality of second sub-operations involved in retrieving packets from the memory structure and preparing packets for transmission. Packets are pipelined through a series of third processing segments to perform a plurality of third sub-operations involved in scheduling transmission of packets to the MAC interface for transmission to one or more destination devices.01-06-2011
20110002339Network access control - The invention provides for telecommunications user equipment including network access control means operative responsive to control parameters and further including a subscriber module accessible remote from the user equipment and arranged to store the said control parameters for use by the said access control means, and wherein the subscriber module can comprise a mobile equipment offering gateway functionality such as between a public access network and a local IP link.01-06-2011
20120263188SYSTEM FOR ADVERTISING ROUTING UPDATES - Systems and methods for advertising routing updates are disclosed. An example method includes forwarding a proposed routing update from a provider edge router to first and second customer edge routers when a route reflector determines that the proposed routing update having a first route target represents a desirable routing configuration for the provider edge router; and when the route reflector determines that the proposed routing update represents an undesirable routing configuration for the provider edge router: forwarding a first substitute routing update from the provider edge router to the first customer edge router different from the proposed routing update and including a second route target different from the first route target; and forwarding a second substitute routing update from the provider edge router to the second customer edge router different from the proposed routing update and including a third route target different from the first route target.10-18-2012
20110026533METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADVERTISING UPDATE MESSAGES TO PEERS AND PEER GROUPS IN A BORDER GATEWAY PROTOCOL PROCESS - A method is disclosed for advertising update messages to peers and peer entities. In an embodiment, all update messages that are to be advertised to a specific peer entity are formatted and enqueued to a peer associated with that peer entity before update messages are formatted for another peer entity. In an aspect, the method advertises update messages to peer entities in a communication network comprises, among a quantity of update messages, formatting one or more of the update messages to establish a quantity of formatted update messages for a peer entity, wherein said peer entity is one of a peer group and a peer, wherein the quantity of the formatted update messages is less than or equal to the quantity of update messages, and among the formatted update messages, enqueueing to a queue, one or more formatted update messages, to establish a quantity of enqueued formatted update messages, wherein the quantity of enqueued formatted update messages is less or equal to the quantity of formatted update messages, and wherein at least one of the quantity of formatted update messages and the quantity of the enqueued formatted update messages is a programmable quantity.02-03-2011
20110038380Method and System for Establishing Tunnels - A method for establishing tunnels includes establishing a first unidirectional tunnel from a first node to a second node, and sending a first instruction for establishing a reverse tunnel of the first tunnel, when sending the first instruction to the second node, triggering the establishment of a second unidirectional tunnel from the second node to the first node, and binding the second tunnel to the first tunnel as the reverse tunnel of the first tunnel. A system for establishing tunnels is also provided. The establishment of a reverse tunnel may be automatically triggered after a forward tunnel is established, and a bidirectional tunnel is established.02-17-2011
20110038382SYSTEM AND METHOD TO PROVIDE MULTIPLE PRIVATE NETWORKS USING PBB/TE - A system and method are supplied to provide multiple private networks. The system can include a Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB/TE) interface or interfaces configured to receive a plurality of data stream types each associated with an Instance Service Identifier (I-SID) from a Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) or public carrier Ethernet. A plurality of local area network (LAN) ports can be configured to communicate data to a plurality of LANs. A switching process is provided between the PBB/TE interface and the LAN ports. The switching process can be configured to bind individual data stream types from subdivided data streams each represented by an I-SID to each of the respective LAN ports. In addition, the switching process can communicate packets between the PBB/TE interface and the bound LAN ports02-17-2011
20110038381METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FAULT RESILIENCE IN NETWORKS WITH AUDIO/VIDEO BRIDGING AWARE SHORTEST PATH BRIDGING - A first network device may select a plurality of network paths for establishing a plurality of network connections to a second network device. The selection may be based on support of IEEE Audio Video Bridging (AVB) protocols. The first network device may establish at least one of the plurality of connections over each of the selected network paths. The first network device may concurrently transmit and/or receive a plurality of data streams via the established plurality of network connections. At least a second one of the plurality of data streams may comprise data that is redundant to a first one of the plurality of data streams. One of the plurality of network connections may be selected for conveying a primary data stream based on determined path costs of the plurality of network paths, where non-AVB links may be assigned higher path costs than AVB link.02-17-2011
20120269199METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INTELLIGENT ENERGY NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM - A system for providing network infrastructure for energy management and control is disclosed. A controller integrates powerline and wireless networking technologies in order to provide an integrated network. A gateway sends and receives command and control data across the integrated network. Client devices may connect to the integrated network and perform a variety of functions. An appliance module may send and receive data across the integrated network in relation to a particular appliance. A panel meter may send and receive data across the integrated network in relation to data measured at a distribution panel. A serial bridge may connect various devices to the integrated network. Computing devices may remotely or locally connect to the integrated network and send and receive data.10-25-2012
20110211587Packet Relaying Device, Packet Relaying Method And Program - A packet relaying device, wherein a reception processing unit judges an interface used to receive an IP packet from a network, and records a reception interface identifier (RID) which is information for identifying the interface, in a packet transmission/reception management table, a route control unit records, in the packet transmission/reception management table, a transmission interface identifier (SID) which is information for identifying the transmission interface obtained by selection of a transmission path and the above described reception interface identifier (RID), in such a manner that the identifies are associated with each other. A transmission processing unit makes a comparison between the reception interface identifier (RID) and the transmission interface identifier (SID) recorded in the packet transmission/reception management table, and when the both identifiers are the interface identifier of the same virtual network interface, the transmission processing unit discards the IP packet to invalidate the transmission process.09-01-2011
20110228792NETWORK SWITCHING DEVICE - Network switching arrangements including: setting an operation mode of a target switching block to a operation mode that is different from an operation mode of a first switching block while the first switching block is handling a switching process, the target switching block being one switching block selected from second switching blocks; performing a switchover process including starting the switching process using the target switching block instead of the first switching block, after completion of setting the operation mode of the target switching block; and copying the switching information held by the first switching block to the target switching block, prior to starting the switching process using the target switching block, after completion of setting the operation mode of the target switching block.09-22-2011
20110228791 NETWORK NODE - The invention relates to a network node arranged to provide an end user of a network terminal in a network with an access link to an external network comprising at least one external network interface, a control unit, and at least one internal network interface, the network node being arranged to be connected between the network and the external network. The network node is characterized in that it the control unit is arranged to deactivate and re-activate the at least one internal network interface towards the network terminal in the network in order to trigger a dynamic host configuration protocol request from the network terminal such that a new IP configuration can be established for the network terminal. The invention also relates to a method for use in a network node and a computer program product.09-22-2011
20110235648DATA RELAY DEVICE AND DATA RELAY METHOD USED IN THE DEVICE - To provide a data relay device which prevents a significant delay even when pieces of data are transmitted/received in protocols that are different from each other. Transmission timings at which pieces of data are transmitted/received in a network using an event trigger type communication protocol are estimated. Stay periods which occur when pieces of data are relayed and transmitted at predetermined transmission timings in a network using a time trigger type communication protocol are calculated while changing a reference time for the time trigger type communication protocol. Then, synchronization processing is performed in the network using the time trigger type communication protocol such that communication is performed using a reference time having a small stay period that has been calculated.09-29-2011
20100232442COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - A communication apparatus, being connected with a wide-area network enabling to execute a band assurance session and an in-site network, for relaying communication between the wide-area network and the in-site network, comprises a communication terminal management means for registering and managing the communication terminal, upon receipt of a first registration request from the communication terminal, which is connected with the in-site network, wherein a second communication start request to said communication terminal, which is registered in the communication management means, upon receipt of a first communication start request from the wide-area network.09-16-2010
20100232443Method and Apparatus for Managing, Configuring, and Controlling an I/O Virtualization Device through a Network Switch - An apparatus and method bridges frames between entities running on the same server. The server has a physical network interface that supports I/O virtualization. The physical network interface has an IOV device with a bridging function capable of bridging frames between entities running on the server. A network switch has a physical port coupled to the server by a physical link and a switching fabric in communication with the physical port for transmitting and receiving Ethernet data frames to and from the IOV device. A control processor, in communication with the IOV device, configures the bridging function of the IOV device to bridge some frames locally within the server between the entities running on the server and to pass other frames through the IOV device over the physical link to the physical port and the switching fabric, so that the switching fabric bridges these other frames between the entities.09-16-2010
20100232441QUALITY OF SERVICE MANAGEMENT FOR HOME-TO-HOME CONNECTIONS - In a first embodiment of the present invention, a method of establishing end-to-end Quality of Service (QoS) is provided, the method comprising: receiving minimum QoS requirements for a connection between a local device in a local network and a remote device in a remote network; requesting that a QoS connection between the local device and a local gateway in the local network be established; computing remaining QoS requirements by deducting achieved QoS between the local device and the local gateway from the minimum QoS requirements; requesting that a QoS connection between the remote device and a remote gateway in the remote network be established, using the remaining QoS requirements; and requesting to configure a QoS connection between a local gateway and a remote gateway.09-16-2010
20100232440PROVIDING SCSI ACCELERATION AS A SERVICE IN THE SAN - Techniques are disclosed for abstracting write acceleration techniques and tape acceleration techniques away from transport providers (e.g., away from an FC or FCIP interlink between two storage area networks) and allowing acceleration to be provided as a service by nodes within the storage area network (SAN). Doing so allows the acceleration service to be provided anywhere in the SAN. Further, doing so allows users to scale the acceleration service as needed, without having to create awkward topologies of multiple VSANS. Further still, as the acceleration service is offered independently from the transport, compression, encryption, and other services may be offered as part of the transport between the FC/FCIP connection along with the acceleration service.09-16-2010
20100232439MEDIATED NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION TRAVERSAL - A method of establishing a connection traversing at least one network address translation (NAT) gateway is presented. In the method, a bind request is sent from a source device to a mediation element via a NAT gateway. A bind response associated with the bind request is received. A connection request is sent to the mediation element. The mediation element causes the connection request to be sent to a destination device. A connection response associated with the connection request is received. A hello message is sent to a predicted destination address. The predicted destination address is based on an address received in the connection response. A data connection is established between the source device and the destination device using the predicted destination address.09-16-2010
20110249681SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR LOOSE COUPLING OF MULTIMEDIA RESOURCE FUNCTION CONTROLLERS AND MULTIMEDIA RESOURCE FUNCTION PROCESSORS - Systems, methods, and computer readable media for loose coupling media resource function controllers (MRFCs) and media resource function processors (MRFPs) are disclosed. According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a method for loose coupling MRFCs and MRFPs. The method includes providing one or more MRFPs having media processing resources simultaneously usable by a plurality of MRFCs, and at one of the MRFPs, allowing a plurality of MRFCs to simultaneously use the media processing resources of the MRFP.10-13-2011
20110255548GATEWAY-BASED AMI NETWORK - Apparatus and methodology provide communications between a utility consumption meter and a utility provider at least in part by way of Internet Protocol (IP) based communications. A gateway device, coupled via either wired or wireless communications links to a utility consumption meter, serves as an interface between the utility consumption meter and a central utility provider server. Communications between the gateway and the central utility provider server are by wired or wireless IP-based communications. At least a portion of the IP-based communications may be by way of public broadband networks operated by Internet Service Providers (ISPs), thereby avoiding the installation of specifically purposed collection infrastructure.10-20-2011
20120087375PACKET SWITCHING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A packet switching system includes a plurality of switch fabrics connected in cascade and a plurality of buffers respectively connected to the plurality of switch fabrics. In the event of packet competition, the plurality of switch fabrics buffer the competing packets to the corresponding buffers through buffer connection ports, and forward the competing packets in excess of the number of buffer connection ports to an adjacent switch fabric through switch connection ports.04-12-2012
20120327944Access Method and Apparatus for Multi-Protocol Label Switching Layer 2 Virtual Private Network - The disclosure discloses an access method and apparatus for an Multi-protocol Label Switching Layer 2 Virtual Private Network (MPLS L2VPN), wherein the method includes the following steps: respectively making a message of a customer side and a message of a network side access operator routing equipment, setting access types of the messages to be mapped to virtual ports, and respectively allocating respective Source Virtual Ports (SVP) and Destination Virtual Ports (DVP) of the customer side and the network side to each access; establishing a data forwarding channel of the MPLS L2VPN by respectively establishing connection from the SVP of the customer side to the DVP of the opposite side and the connection from the SVP of the network side to the DVP of the opposite side. With the disclosure, various access modes are uniformly mapped to virtual ports, and then the MPLS L2VPN is accessed; furthermore, forwarding can be performed based on a Virtual Switch Interface (VSI) and virtual ports. Thus, the disclosure enhances the extensibility of accessing the MPLS L2VPN by is customer messages, reduces the management complexity of accessing the MPLS L2VPN and the difficulty in system development, and improves the system reliability.12-27-2012
20120320927GATEWAY APPARATUS - A gateway apparatus performs frame forwarding between an external device connected to a first bus and controllers connected to a second bus. Each controller outputs a response frame upon reception of a communication frame from the external device. The response frame has an address field in which a private address is set. The private address is uniquely assigned to each controller in a private network space defined by the second bus. When the communication frame is directed to each controller, the communication frame is forwarded to each controller in sequence at different times to prevent collision between the response frames in the second bus. The private address set in the address field of the response frame is converted into a predetermined transmitting address specified in the first bus.12-20-2012
20120320926Distributed Link Aggregation Group (LAG) for a Layer 2 Fabic - Each of first and second bridges of a data network having respective links to an external node implement a network bridge component that forwards traffic inside the data network and a virtual bridge component that forwards traffic outside of the data network. A virtual bridge is formed including the virtual bridge components of the first and second bridges and an interswitch link (ISL) between the virtual bridge components of the first and second bridges. Data frames are communicated with each of multiple external network nodes outside the data network via a respective one of multiple link aggregation groups all commonly supported by the virtual bridge.12-20-2012
20120320928MONITORING SYSTEM, DEVICE, AND METHOD - Provided is a monitoring system which can perform priority control in accordance with the wideband limitation. A priority/filter type selection processing unit (12-20-2012
20120327946SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NETWORK ROUTING IN A MULTIPLE BACKBONE NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - Embodiments of a network architecture include a backbone node having a plurality of independent routers or switches connected in a matrix, wherein the matrix includes a plurality of stages of routers or switches, to form a node having a node switching capacity that is greater than the node switching capacity of the individual routers or switches. A method includes assigning one of a plurality of backbone networks to a destination network address, associating a next hop loopback address with the destination network address, and advertising the destination network address in combination with the next hop loopback address through the selected backbone network address.12-27-2012
20120287938COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system may include a first network connected to lower-layer equipment, a second network connected to a higher-layer application, a gateway device connected to the first network and the second network, and a tunnel device connected to the first network and the second network, the tunnel device bypassing the gateway device.11-15-2012
20090059933VALIDATING CUSTOMER IN-HOME NETWORK CONNECTIVITY USING MOCA BRIDGE MODE - A network terminal includes a bridge to interface the network terminal to a data channel linked to a central office, a first interface of a first type, and a second interface of a second type that is different from the first type of interface. A processor controls the network terminal to route data packets received via the first interface to the data channel via the bridge, when the network terminal is set to operate in a normal mode, and to route data packets received via the first interface to the second interface, when the network terminal is set to operate in a test mode. In an example embodiment, the first interface is an Ethernet interface and the second interface is a MoCA interface.03-05-2009
20100202468BRIDGE, DATA COMPRESSING METHOD THEREOF AND COMPUTER SYSTEM APPLYING THE SAME - Provided is a bridge coupled between an external host and an external storage device. The bridge includes a first interface, an encoder, a memory device, a decoder and a second interface. The first interface is coupled to the external host and receives a first data from an external host. The encoder is coupled to the first interface and compresses the first data by undistorted compression for producing a second data. The memory device is coupled to the encoder and temporally stores the second data produced by the encoder. The decoder is coupled to the memory device and decompresses the second data stored in the memory device for producing a third data. The third data and the first data are substantially the same. The second interface is coupled between the decoder and the external storage device and outputs the third data transmitted from the decoder to the external storage device.08-12-2010
20100202467PREMISES GATEWAY DEVICE - In a premises gateway device that performs encryption or decryption under the IPsec, the throughput of a processor is varied depending on a type of data to be treated in order to realize reduction in power consumption. In the premises gateway device to which a telephone, PCs, and a home appliance that are pieces of home network equipment are connected and which transmits or receives data using an ISP and an IPsec tunnel via an ONU, an OLT, and a carrier network, relevant home network equipment and a data rate are decided based on the data to be treated. The frequency of a clock to be fed to the processor is varied depending on the information.08-12-2010
20130010801SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONGREGATING DISPARATE BROADBAND INFRASTRUCTURE - The present invention is a system and method of configured to congregate the services and content provided by a plurality of providers onto a single broadband network controlled by a CONVERGED BROADBAND INFRASTRUCTURE™ software module. The CONVERGED BROADBAND INFRASTRUCTURE™ software module enables the connecting of a plurality of provider legacy systems to the single broadband network and the distribution of the services of the plurality of provider legacy systems to a plurality of end users over the single broadband network. The plurality of provider legacy systems include a plurality of provider legacy systems of the type offering at least one of the same type of services comprising voice, data and internet. The CONVERGED BROADBAND INFRASTRUCTURE™ software module allows for the distribution of multiple services offered by different services providers over single broadband network.01-10-2013
20130016729Systems and Methods For Efficient Handling of Data Traffic and Processing Within a Processing Device - The present invention provides an improved platform hub that aims to, in some embodiments, optimize system resources to improve system performance and/or reduce consumption of power.01-17-2013
20130016730SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING A PACKET PROCESS PROXY TO SUPPORT A FLOODING MECHANISM IN A MIDDLEWARE MACHINE ENVIRONMENT - A system and method can support flooding mechanism using a packet process proxy in a middleware machine environment. The middleware machine environment can comprise a gateway instance that includes an external port for receiving data packets from an external network. The middleware machine environment also comprises one or more host servers, each of which is associated with one or more virtual machines. Furthermore, said host servers can provide virtual interfaces that belong to a virtual hub associated with the gateway instance. At least one said packet is a flooded packet that is specified with an unknown destination address when it is received at the external port. The gateway instance can send the flooded packet to a designated virtual interface on a host server, and a packet process proxy on the host server can forward the flooded packet to a virtual machine on another host server for processing this packet.01-17-2013
20130016732POLICY DECISION FUNCTION ADDRESSING METHOD, NETWORK ELEMENT AND NETWORK SYSTEM - A policy decision function (PDF) addressing method includes: receiving a PDF allocation request that contains a user equipment (UE) identifier (ID) from a second network element (NE); obtaining ID information of a PDF associated with the UE ID according to pre-registered addressing information of the PDF, where the addressing information of the PDF is an association between the UE ID and the ID information of the PDF, and the PDF associated with the UE ID is accessed by a first NE; and sending the obtained ID information of the PDF to the second NE.01-17-2013
20130016731SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING DIRECT PACKET FORWARDING IN A MIDDLEWARE MACHINE ENVIRONMENT - A system and method can support packet direct forwarding in a middleware machine environment. The middleware machine environment comprises one or more external ports on at least one network switch instance, wherein each external port can receive one or more data packets from an external network. Furthermore, the middleware machine environment comprises a plurality of host channel adapter (HCA) ports on one or more host servers, wherein each said HCA port is associated with a said host server, and each said host server can support one or more virtual machines that operate to process the one or more data packets. The at least one network switch operate to send a packet received at an external port to a designated HCA port associated with the external port. An external switch in the external network can send the data packet to the particular external port based on a packet distribution algorithm.01-17-2013
20110158247PACKET COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, A MEMORY ACCESS CONTROL DEVICE, AND AN INFORMATION-PROCESSING SYSTEM - A packet communication control device transfers a control packet and a data packet and includes a plurality of sending units and a multiplexer which separates a data communication path and a control communication path, multiplexes the control packets and transfers the multiplexed control packets by the control communication path and the data packet by the data control path. The average Round Trip communication time can be shortened and the hardware cost can be reduced because the Shortest-Job-First control is implemented by separating data communication pathway from control communication pathway logistically or physically, and also multiplexing the control communication pathway with control packet.06-30-2011
20130170501Service Router Architecture - An apparatus comprising at least one receiver configured to receive a traffic flow, receive information comprising a set of functions and an order of the set from a controller, and a processor coupled to the at least one receiver and configured to assign the traffic flow to one or more resources, determine a processing schedule for the traffic flow, and process the traffic flow by the set of functions, following the order of the set, using the one or more resources, and according to the processing schedule.07-04-2013
20120243548SYSTEM AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Systems and methods for implementing and designing protocols in such communications systems which can be wireless or wired. The systems and methods can include fundamental changes in the traditional protocol design approaches with their constraints of one-to-one mapping in protocols. By doing so, embodiments of the present invention enable an efficient way to design and implement a system to support single or multiple protocols.09-27-2012
20080253385FLEXIBLE ETHERNET BRIDGE - In one embodiment, an Ethernet bridge operates in either VLAN aware mode or VLAN unaware mode as specified by a user. The width of a CAM used for storing address table can be minimized by using a mapping of VLAN identifiers to small numbers, which are stored in the CAM. Flooding can be minimized by employing various techniques. Communication can be quickly re-established even if the Ethernet address (or the machine having that address) moves to be reachable on different ports of the Ethernet bridge. Sufficiently quick response to bridge protocols may be ensured by using an external processor to generate responses, and providing a higher priority DMA channel to transfer packets related to the bridge protocols.10-16-2008
20080247406Layer 2 virtual private network over PBB-TE/PBT and seamless interworking with VPLS - A Layer 2 Virtual Private Network (L2VPN) system is provided. A Provider Backbone Bridge (PBB) network is provided which comprises a plurality of sites to be connected via a L2VPN. The plurality of sites in the PBB network is connected using a plurality of provider backbone trunks that includes a Provider Backbone Transport (PBT) trunk or a Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) trunk, such that the L2VPN includes the plurality of sites.10-09-2008
20080240133COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND LAG MANAGEMENT TABLE MANAGEMENT METHOD USED THEREFOR - A communication device has link aggregation management tables, one for each of a plurality of line cards, each of the link aggregation management tables managing a relation between a link aggregation group and ports belonging thereto. The communication device has a function, which makes statuses of the link aggregation management tables consistent, in each of the plurality of line cards.10-02-2008
20080240130Device, system and method of multicast communication - Device, system and method of multicast communication. For example, an apparatus in accordance with an embodiment of the invention includes a non-kernel multicast protocol handler adapted to perform a multicast operation of a user mode application by bypassing the operating system kernel and directly accessing a communication adapter having an operating system bypass capability.10-02-2008
20080240129SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PREVENTING COUNT-TO-INFINITY PROBLEMS IN ETHERNET NETWORKS - A system and method for preventing a count-to-infinity problem in a network using epochs of sequence numbers in protocol messages to eliminate stale protocol information in the network and to allow the forwarding topology to recover in merely one round trip time across the network.10-02-2008
20080240122CONFIGURING INTERCOMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN COMPUTING NODES - Techniques are described for configuring intercommunications between multiple computing nodes, such as multiple virtual machine nodes hosted on one or more physical computing machines or systems. In some situations, virtual networks may be established and maintained for groups of computing nodes, such as those operated by or on behalf of various users. Such virtual networks may be established in some situations by automatically configuring various communication manager modules to associate communications from a computing node belonging to a virtual network with one or more networking identifiers associated with the virtual network, such that other communication manager modules may appropriately forward or otherwise process such communications.10-02-2008
20080232384VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK APPARATUS - A VPN apparatus is included in a VPN system with other VPN apparatuses to interconnect bases including first bases each having an access line and a second base having at least two access lines. The VPN apparatus comprises a first virtual VPN apparatus and a second virtual VPN apparatus. The first virtual VPN apparatus is connected to one of the first bases via an access line and carries out frame forwarding by using a first forwarding table for forwarding frames to be transmitted/received between two first bases or between one first base and one second base. The second virtual VPN apparatus is connected to the second base via one of the at least two access lines, carries out frame forwarding by using a second forwarding table for forwarding frames to be transmitted/received between at least two bases including the second base, and does not carry out forwarding frames to one of the other VPN apparatuses that is connected to the second base via another one of the at least two access lines.09-25-2008
20080232383TRANSPARENT WIRELESS BRIDGE ROUTE AGGREGATION - In an example embodiment, there is described herein a “Wireless Route Aggregation Protocol” (WRAP) that is used to aggregate multiple wireless links into a WRAP “route bundle” that functions as a single logical LAN bridge link. WRAP link aggregation can be used for example to increase the bandwidth and robustness of the wireless path between two wired Ethernet LANs.09-25-2008
20080232382Mobile Wireless Communication System, Mobile Wireless Terminal Apparatus, Virtual Private Network Relay Apparatus and Connection Authentication Server - A mobile radio communication system (09-25-2008
20130142203MULTI-DOMAIN INTERCONNECT - A network system that includes a first set of network hosts in a first domain and a second set of network hosts in a second domain. Within each of the domains, the system includes several edge switching elements (SEs) that each couple to the network hosts and forward network data to and from the set of network hosts. Within the first domain, the system includes (i) an interior SE that couples to a particular edge SE in order to receive network data for forwarding from the edge SE when the edge SE does not recognize a destination location of the network data and (ii) an interconnection SE that couples to the interior SE, the edge SE, and the second domain through an external network. When the edge SE receives network data with a destination address in the second domain, it forwards the network data directly to the interconnection SE.06-06-2013
20080225871SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BRIDGING PROXY TRAFFIC IN AN ELECTRONIC NETWORK - A system and method are provided of bridging proxy traffic in an electronic network. The method can include the operation of receiving a data stream from a client into a packet scanning device using a first socket. This data stream can be directed to an external communication network. The socket information for the first socket can be cached or stored in a cache in the packet scanning device using a cache ID. The first socket can then be connected to a user space process. A second socket can be generated by the user space process using the cache ID. The second socket can be modified using information retrieved from the cache based on the cache ID to make the second socket emulate the first socket. An additional operation is sending the data stream through the second socket to the external communication network.09-18-2008
20080225870Methods, systems, and computer program products for providing predicted likelihood of communication between users - Methods, systems, and computer program products for providing predicted likelihood of communication between users are disclosed. According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a method for providing predicted likelihood of communication between users. The method includes predicting a likelihood that a first user will initiate communication with a second user based on stored information for the first user that indicates the second user, associating the predicted likelihood with status information for the first user, and providing for indicating the status information with the predicted likelihood to the second user.09-18-2008
20080225869Enabling sharing of devices on a network - A system and method for enabling sharing of devices on a network is disclosed. The technology includes a method for enabling sharing of non-network enabled devices on a network. The method includes detecting a non-network enabled device locally coupled to a first computer system, the first computer system coupled to the network. The method for enabling sharing of non-network enabled devices on a network also includes enabling a second computer system coupled to the network to access the non-network enabled device by using the first computer system as a communication interface between the non-network enabled device and the second computer system.09-18-2008
20080225868Allowing IPv4 clients to communicate using Teredo addresses when both clients are behind a NAT - Methods and systems for allowing clients behind a network address translation device to communicate when those clients are assigned Teredo IPv6 addresses.09-18-2008
20080225867Faster NAT detection for Teredo client - Methods and systems for allowing a Teredo client behind a network address translation device to detect more rapidly the type of network address translation device.09-18-2008
20080225866Reducing network traffic to teredo server - Methods and systems for reducing network load on a Teredo server.09-18-2008
20080225865Cost reduction of NAT connection state keep-alive - Keep-alive processing for NAT devices and reducing power consumption in wireless clients. A server driven keep-alive mechanism facilitates keep-alive messages to a NAT device currently providing a connection to a mobile client to refresh the NAT state, thereby reducing or eliminating power consumption in a wireless device to respond to the connection with keep-alive packets. In one instance, keep-alive packets are sent to the NAT device to reset the NAT timeout timer, and then to the mobile client. The client responds only when expected keep-alive packets are not received at the client. In another instance, keep-alive packets reset the NAT timer to maintain the connection but are dropped or self-destruct before reaching the mobile client thereby providing the optimum power conservation in the mobile device. Thus, the client is not forced into extra client activity to send or receive wireless data, thereby draining the battery.09-18-2008
20080225864COMMUNICATION NETWORK ROUTING APPARATUS AND TECHNIQUES USING LOGICAL COMMUNICATION LINKS - Communication network routing apparatus and techniques using logical communication links are disclosed. A routing apparatus identifies a logical communication link that it is capable of being used to establish a virtual connection with another routing apparatus within a virtual connection operational domain, which includes multiple sub-domains, of an underlying communication system. A destination that is associated with the routing apparatus and is reachable through the virtual connection is also identified. Information that is indicative of the identified logical communication link and of the identified destination is provided for distribution from a sub-domain of the routing apparatus in the virtual connection operational domain to another sub-domain within the virtual connection operational domain. This distribution of information enables a routing apparatus in one sub-domain to dynamically route a virtual connection toward a destination in a different sub-domain. Data structures for distributing the information are also disclosed.09-18-2008
20110261827Distributed Link Aggregation - Systems and methods to forward data frames are described. A particular method may include generating a plurality of management frames at a controlling bridge. The management frames may include routing information. The plurality of management frames may be communicated to a plurality of bridge elements coupled to a plurality of server computers. The plurality of bridge elements are each configured to selectively forward a plurality of data frames according to the routing information.10-27-2011
20110261826Forwarding Data Frames With a Distributed Fiber Channel Forwarder - Systems and methods to forward data frames are described. A particular method may include associating a fiber channel forwarder with a bridge element. The fiber channel forwarder may be one of a plurality of fiber channel forwarders coupled to the bridge element. A data frame received at the bridge element may be forwarded to the fiber channel forwarder.10-27-2011
20130170499BORDER GATEWAY BROKER, NETWORK AND METHOD - A device-implemented network with domains each having nodes, the nodes of each of the domains sharing network information with one another according to an intra-domain communication policy. An inter-domain protocol is configured to control communication between at least one of the nodes of one of the domains and at least one of the nodes of a different one of the domains. A broker is configured to be communicatively coupled to the nodes and configured to control communication according to the inter-domain protocol and to which all of the nodes of each of the plurality of domains are configured to send the network information.07-04-2013
20130142202DISTRIBUTING FUNCTIONS IN A DISTRIBUTED AND EMBEDDED ENVIRONMENT - The different switch modules making up a distributed virtual switch may route configuration commands for hardware resources to different modules within the distributed switch using a distribution and routing layer. At least one of the switch modules maintains a routing table that defines which switch modules are responsible for which hardware resources. The switch module uses the routing tables to forward the commands on the distribution and routing layer to the responsible switch module which then ensures that the relevant hardware resources are configured.06-06-2013
20130177023Access Network Architecture Having Dissimilar Access Sub-Networks - A subscriber network architecture includes a packet processing node that communicates with a network backbone and with a plurality of access nodes. The access nodes communicate with a plurality of user devices. The packet processing node controls Quality of Service (QoS) levels for the subscriber devices, routes user data to devices via the access nodes and receives data from devices via the access nodes for forwarding across the network backbone.07-11-2013
20110274117BANDWITH ALLOCATION METHOD AND ROUTING DEVICE - A bandwidth allocation method and a routing device are provided. The bandwidth allocation method includes: obtaining traffic of a member port belonging to a binding link (11-10-2011
20110274116GATEWAY APPARATUS, METHOD AND SYSTEM - When a location of a portable terminal connected to another network beyond a packet communication network side changes, the gateway apparatus that is arranged between a mobile circuit switching network and a packet communication network (IMS network) and that performs mutual conversion between a circuit switching protocol and a packet communication protocol to execute voice communication, exercises control such that at least one of a sequence number and a timestamp in a packet destined to a portable terminal and output to the packet communication network, is made to vary continuously before and after movement of the portable terminal, in case the portable terminal connected to a network beyond the packet communication network side, moves its location.11-10-2011
20110274115NETWORK COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHODS - A network communication device has multiple communication modules and a coordination module. The communication modules provide data communications services according to a plurality of communication protocols, respectively. The coordination module generates a plurality of sub-data download requests indicating information of a plurality of downlink sub-data according to a data download request with information of a desired downlink data, and sends the sub-data download requests to the communication modules for downloading the downlink sub-data. The coordination module further assembles the downloaded downlink sub-data to generate the desired downlink data.11-10-2011
20110274114FCoE ISOLATED PORT CHANNELS AND FCoE SESSION RESYNCHRONIZATION IN vPC/MCEC ENVIRONMENTS USING DCBXP - Methods and apparatus for automatically configuring an aggregated link between a device supporting Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) and two or more FCoE Forwarders (FCFs) configured as a virtual switch in an effort to isolate FCoE traffic from FCoE Initialization Protocol (FIP) traffic in the aggregated link without user intervention. The virtual switch may be configured using virtual PortChannel (vPC) or MultiChassis EtherChannel (MCEC) technology, for example. For some embodiments, following an exchange of Data Center Bridge Exchange (DCBX) Protocol packets identifying the aggregated link relationship to the device (e.g., a host or intermediate bridge), subchannels may be automatically created within the aggregated link and designated as carrying either FCoE or FIP traffic, thereby isolating the subchannels. In this manner, a user need not perform manual isolation of FCoE-carrying trunks in a data center environment.11-10-2011
20080219273SCHEDULING METHOD FOR EXECUTING JOB, SCHEDULING APPARATUS FOR EXECUTING JOB, AND COMMUTATIVE RECORDING MEDIUM HAVING RECORDED THEREON SCHEDULING PROGRAM FOR CAUSING EXECUTION OF JOB - A router is interposed between a subnet, configured of a plurality of layer 2 switches, which relay an ARP response packet and learn an MAC address, and a plurality of terminals, and a backbone network. The router has a severance detection unit; an ARP transmission/reception unit which transmits an ARP request packet to an intra-subnet route and a backbone network route. The ARP request packet requests an MAC address for an IP address of each of the plurality of terminals. The ARP transmission reception unit receives an ARP response packet, which has the MAC address of the terminal as a transmission source. An ARP response forwarding unit generates a learning packet which has the MAC address of the terminal, stored in the ARP response packet, and forwards the ARP response packet to a route, a reversal of a route by means of which the ARP response packet has been received.09-11-2008
20080219272INTER-DOMAIN POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT PATH COMPUTATION IN A COMPUTER NETWORK - In one embodiment, distributed path computation elements (PCEs) collaboratively build local portions of an inter-domain P2MP path to each path destination or to each ingress border router of one or more respective successor domains based on a cost associated with using one or more local ingress border routers received from each predecessor domain. Once a furthest destination is reached, each PCE may recursively return a list of local ingress border routers used in the P2MP path to each predecessor domain, where each PCE receiving the list correspondingly prunes segments of its computed local portion of the P2MP path that lead to unused successor ingress border routers, and sends a prune message to its predecessor domains accordingly. A root PCE receives the final prune message(s) and a representation of each locally computed portion of the inter-domain P2MP path, and combines the portions into a final inter-domain P2MP path.09-11-2008
20120250697INTER-CLUSTER COMMUNICATIONS TECHNIQUE FOR EVENT AND HEALTH STATUS COMMUNICATIONS - Communication between clusters of processing nodes is initiated by designating a link layer address and a target node name in a remote cluster. The link layer address is transmitted to the target node via a regular network transmission. The link layer address is stored locally in each cluster and the nodes in each cluster are signaled that a configuration change has been made, so that gateway nodes in the clusters can obtain the link layer address to use for subsequent communications with the other cluster, such as event notifications of node status changes.10-04-2012
20130170503SWITCH SYSTEM, AND DATA FORWARDING METHOD - The upper limit of the number of the flow entries subjected to retrieval is increased by making it possible to retrieve the flow entries in plural switches for one communication data. Specifically, the control server registers flow entries by distributing them to the flow table in each switch belonging to a switch group. When acquiring the communication data, each switch checks whether the communication data is matched with any of the flow entries registered in the flow table. When the communication data is matched with a flow entry, the communication data is forwarded based on the forwarding procedure defined in the flow entry. When the communication data is not matched with any flow entry, the communication data is forwarded to “flow table unretrieved switch” belonging to the same switch group. When there is no flow table unretrieved switch, a query of the forwarding procedure is performed to the control server.07-04-2013
20130170500System and Non-Transitory Computer-Readable Medium - A system includes a communication control device, a first communication device and a second communication device. The communication control device acquires first network information that identifies a first internal network to which the first communication device is connected, and second network information that identifies a second internal network. The communication control device decides a first method based on the acquired information. The first method indicates a method of transmission from the first communication device to the second communication device, and of transmission from the second communication device to the first communication device. The communication control device transmits information indicating the first method to the first communication device and the second communication device. The first communication device and the second communication device mutually communicate using the first method, based on the received information indicating the first method.07-04-2013
20130114615SWITCH AND FLOW TABLE CONTROLLING METHOD - In an open flow system, it is made possible to confirm a flow having succeeded or failed in the registration on a flow table. Specifically, a controller transmits and receives an open flow message to and from a switch. The switch is provided with a flow table which manages flows registered from a controller, and a flow table reading section which reads corresponding data, a flow table control section which performs processing of addition, deletion and modification of a flow entry, and a platform function managing section which determine whether an object flow entry is valid or invalid according to an inquiry from the flow table control section. The flow table has a normal flow table and a save flow table. A valid flow entry which conforms to configuration data of the switch is registered on the normal flow table. An invalid flow entry which does not conform to the configuration data of the switch is registered on the save flow table.05-09-2013
20130114614ADDRESSABLE NODE UNIT AND METHOD FOR ADDRESSING - An addressable node unit includes connections for at least two lines via which the node unit can be addressed. The connections are connected to a circuit which evaluates an addressing signal. The node unit includes at least one power source which is supplyable with power via at least one of the lines. A switch is provided in the path between the evaluating circuit and the corresponding line connection, the switch being opened after an addressing process so that the power supply of the evaluating circuit is ensured by the at least one power source after the addressing.05-09-2013
20130114613Virtual Machines in a Packet Switching Device - In one embodiment, a packet switching device creates multiple virtual packet switching devices within the same physical packet switching device using virtual machines and sharing particular physical resources of the packet switching device. One embodiment uses this functionality to change the operating version (e.g., upgrade or downgrade) of the packet switching device by originally operating according to a first operating version, operating according to both a first and second operating version, and then ceasing operating according to the first operating version. Using such a technique, a packet switching device can be upgraded or downgraded while fully operating (e.g., without having to reboot line cards and route processing engines).05-09-2013
20130114612Distributed Network Flow Exporter - A network appliance that is part of a distributed virtual switch collects network flow information for network flows passing through the network appliance. The network flow information is encapsulated into packets as a data record for transport. Network flow exporter type information is added to the network flow records configured to indicate that the packets are from a distributed exporter. An option template is sent to the network flow data collectors that includes a device identifier that is configured to uniquely identify the network appliance. The packets are exported to the network flow data collector. The network flow data collector uses the network flow exporter type information and the device identifier to associate the network flow information with the distributed virtual switch.05-09-2013
20130100959METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PROTECT AND AUDIT COMMUNICATION LINE STATUS - Methods and apparatus to protect and audit communication line status are disclosed. An example method includes receiving a set of available communication lines from a media gateway, associating a plurality of destination numbers with respective ones of the available communication lines, and dialing the plurality of destination numbers from the media gateway to identify the communication line status information.04-25-2013
20130100958METHODS TO COMBINE STATELESS AND STATEFUL SERVER LOAD BALANCING - The processing of data packets sent over a communication session between a host and a server by a service gateway, includes: processing a data packet using a current hybrid-stateful or hybrid-stateless, processing method; checking whether a hybrid-stateless, or hybrid-stateful, condition is satisfied; when the condition is satisfied, changing from a hybrid-stateful to a hybrid-stateless processing method, or vice versa, for a subsequently received data packet; and otherwise, continue processing the subsequently received data packet using the current hybrid processing method.04-25-2013
20130114616COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND OPERATING METHOD USING HOME GATEWAY - A communication system and operating method use a home gateway. A method of a terminal in a communication system using a home gateway includes transmitting a service request signal using the home gateway to an adjacent node; receiving information of at least one home gateway of other user from the adjacent node; and transmitting and receiving signals to and from the at least one home gateway of other user. A method of a home gateway in the communication system using the home gateway includes receiving information of a user of other home gateway from a home gateway server; and transmitting and receiving signals to and from a user terminal of the other home gateway.05-09-2013
20110268129VPN COMPOSING METHOD, INTERWORK ROUTER, PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD, DATA COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND PACKET RELAYING APPARATUS - A data communication apparatus to be coupled to a first network and a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) network, includes a receiving unit which receives a data including header information indicating a destination and first header information used to identify a first Virtual Private Network (VPN) in the first network. The apparatus also includes a transmitter which transmits data having added thereto a MPLS header information used to identify one of the plurality of second VPNs in the MPLS network, the MPLS header information corresponding to both the header information indicating the destination and the first header information used to identify the first VPN in the first network included in the received data.11-03-2011
20110268128METHOD FOR GROUPING TERMINATIONS - Method for grouping terminations of a media gate-way by a grouping parameter. When a command containing a grouping parameter is received, the command is executed for a termination if the grouping parameter contained in the received command corresponds to the grouping parameter stored in connection with said termination.11-03-2011
20130170502METHOD, APPARATUS, AND NETWORK SYSTEM FOR TERMINAL TO TRAVERSE PRIVATE NETWORK TO COMMUNICATE WITH SERVER IN IMS CORE NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, an apparatus, and a network system for a terminal to traverse a private network to communicate with a server in an IMS core network. The method includes: the terminal sets a source address of service data to be sent as a virtual IP address, sets a destination address of the service data to be sent as an address of an internal network server, and obtains a first service packet, where the virtual IP address is an address allocated by the IMS core network to the terminal, encapsulate the first service packet into a first tunnel packet, and send the first tunnel packet to the security tunnel gateway over a VPN tunnel between the terminal and a security tunnel gateway, then the security tunnel gateway sends the first service packet in the first tunnel packet to the internal network server.07-04-2013
20130128894Registration and Data Exchange Using Proxy Gateway - A system and method is presented for broadcasting from a utility node a request for network routing information, receiving at the utility node routing information from neighboring utility nodes in response to the broadcast request, and registering the utility node with an access point that provides ingress and egress to and from the network. A node is selected to function as a proxy gateway for one or more other nodes in the network. A new utility node becomes connected to one or more utility networks by registering with the proxy gateway. The proxy gateway transmits registration requests and registration information from each node to a back office server and/or a Domain Name Server via an access point for which the proxy gateway functions as its proxy.05-23-2013
20100278188Network relay device, network connection confirmation method, and nertwork - A network relay device is for receiving, from an external network relay device, connection confirmation information indicative of being in communication connection with the external network relay device. When the connection confirmation information is particular connection confirmation information indicative of being transmitted from a predetermined external network relay device, the network relay device provides return confirmation information to the predetermined external network relay device.11-04-2010
20100278186Electronic Communications Recording System - An electronic communications recording system (11-04-2010
20080205421Fibre channel arbitrated loop bufferless switch circuitry to increase bandwidth without significant increase in cost - A switch, switched architecture and process for transferring data through an FCAL switch is disclosed. The switch uses multiple switch control circuits each coupled to one FCAL network and all connected to a crossbar switch. The switch control circuits are coupled together by a protocol bus for coordination purposes. Local conversations can occur on each FCAL loop and crossing conversations through the switch can occur concurrently. The OPN primitive is used to establish the connection before any data is transferred thereby eliminating the need for buffer memory in the switch control circuits. The destination address of each OPN is used to address a lookup table in each switch control circuit to determine if the destination node is local. If not, the destination is looked up and a connection request made on the protocol bus. If the remote port is not busy, it sends a reply which causes both ports to establish a data path through the backplane crossbar switch.08-28-2008
20110216779SYSTEM AND METHOD TO PROVIDE MULTIPLE PRIVATE NETWORKS USING PBB - A system and method are supplied to provide multiple private networks. The system can include a Provider Backbone Bridge (PBB) interface or interfaces configured to receive a plurality of data stream types each associated with an Instance Service Identifier (I-SID) from a Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) or public carrier Ethernet. A plurality of local area network (LAN) ports can be configured to communicate data to a plurality of LANs. A switching process is provided between the PBB interface and the LAN ports. The switching process can be configured to bind individual data stream types from subdivided data streams each represented by an I-SID to each of the respective LAN ports. In addition, the switching process can communicate packets between the PBB interface and the bound LAN ports09-08-2011
20110216777ROUTING DEVICE AND RELATED CONTROL CIRCUIT - A control circuit for use in a routing device is disclosed including: an input/output interface; and a processor coupled with the input/output interface for setting address resolution information of a network protocol address of a first network section as unchangeable if the network address at least once accessed other network sections and complies with a predetermined condition.09-08-2011
20110211584Smart Home Hub - The present invention provides a method and device for an integrated smart hub. The method and device for an integrated smart hub provides for a simultaneously multicasting of a plurality of functions with a simple and an easy process to operate the device. The integrated device utility includes applications in the areas of telephony, data processing, content storage, multimedia, augmentative communications, personal computing, home or facility security and automation. The integrated smart hub system incorporates integrated components and functions including a Set Top Box (STB), telephone modem, wireless modems, Optical Network Terminal (ONT), Very-high-speed Digital Subscriber Line (VDSL), data server, video server, solid-state storage, game server, an Internet Protocol (IP) intelligent gateway router, and a plurality of microprocessors.09-01-2011
20110222550APPARATUS AND METHOD TO HIDE TRANSIT ONLY MULTI-ACCESS NETWORKS IN OSPF - In one embodiment, a Link State Advertisement (LSA) is received from a first router in a network at a second router in the network. The LSA advertises an address of an interface of the first router. The second router determines whether the LSA includes a transit-only identification that indicates the interface of the first router is a transit-only interface. If the LSA does not include a transit-only identification, the second router installs the advertised address of the interface of the first router in a Router Information Base (RIB) of the second router. If the LSA does include a transit-only identification, the second router declines to install the advertised address of the interface of the first router in the RIB of the second router.09-15-2011
20080198864GATEWAY DEVICE - A gateway device according to the present art includes a storage part that stores a list having identification information identifying another gateway device that is selectable as a move-destination gateway device; a receiving part that receives a call-out signal from a device located in a telephone network; a move-destination-gateway-device selecting part that selects a move-destination gateway device from the list; a re-direction notification generating part that generates a re-direction notification to be transmitted to the selected move-destination gateway device; a re-direction notification transmitting part that transmits the re-direction notification to the move-destination gateway device; a re-direction request signal generating part that generates a re-direction request signal including call identification information identifying the call-out signal; and a re-direction request signal transmitting part that transmits the re-direction request signal to the device located in the telephone network that transmits the call-out signal.08-21-2008
20080198863Bridged Cryptographic VLAN - The invention comprises three extensions of the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN bridge model. The first extension is the cryptographic separation of VLANs over trunk links. A LAN segment type referred to as an encapsulated LAN segment is introduced. All frames on such a segment are encapsulated according to an encryption and authentication code scheme. The second extension is the division of a trunk port into inbound and outbound ports. The third extension is a protocol that automatically infers for each outbound port in a bridged VLAN, a set of LAN segment types for the port that minimizes the number of transfers between encapsulated and unencapsulated segments required to transport a frame in the bridged VLAN.08-21-2008
20080198862Methods, systems, and computer program products for using a location routing number based query and response mechanism to route calls to IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) subscribers - Methods, systems, and computer program products for using an LRN based query and response mechanism (e.g., a switching office number portability processing system) to route calls to IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) subscribers are disclosed. According to one method, an LRN based response message including a communications service subscriber identifier is received. An IMS gateway LRN associated with the communications service subscriber identifier may be determined. The IMS gateway LRN associated with the communications service subscriber identifier may be inserted into the LRN based response message and routing the message.08-21-2008
20080198861Method for the routing and control of packet data traffic in a communication system - The invention relates to a method, which comprising initiating the establishment of a security association between a client node and a gateway node. User data is obtained from an authentication server and the user is au-thenticated. Authorization is obtained for the user for certain network services from a separate authorization node. An authorized address is provided to the client node. The authorization is checked by the gateway node for the allowing outbound packets to specific destinations.08-21-2008
20080198860Enabling routing of data on a network based on a portion of data accessed from a non-network enabled device - A system and method for enabling routing of data on a network based on a portion of data accessed from a non-network enabled device is disclosed. The technology includes a method for enabling routing of data on a network based on a portion of data accessed from a non-network enabled device. The method includes detecting a non-network enabled device locally coupled to a first computer system, the first computer system coupled to the network. The method further includes enabling routing of data through the non-network enabled device to a second computer system coupled to the network by using the first computer system as a communication interface between the non-network enabled device and the second computer system wherein the second computer system is automatically identified based on recognizing a portion of the data as a routing destination.08-21-2008
20080198859SYSTEM FOR ADVERTISING ROUTING UPDATES - A system for advertising routing updates is disclosed. A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a route reflector having a controller element that generates from a routing update a plurality of dissimilar routing advertisements transmitted in whole or in part to one or more provider edge routers operating in a packet-switched communication system. Other embodiments are disclosed.08-21-2008
20080198857EPON bridge apparatus and method for forwarding thereof - The invention relates to an EPON bridge apparatus and a forwarding method thereof. In case of receiving frame from the network port or the PON port, the apparatus associates the port having the received frame inputted with source MAC address of the received frame to learn the information in an FDB table which manages port information for the learned MAC address. Then the apparatus refers to the FDB table to remove LLID from upstream frame, and then forwards the upstream frame to the network port, while attaching LLID corresponding to destination MAC address to downstream frame to transmit to the PON port. Bridging between ONUs are possible with flooding capability using anti-LLID. It provides VLAN-LLID translation mode with support for VLAN tag addition/removal at the ONU side. It also provides multicast pruning function for the downstream.08-21-2008
20110243148METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ATTACHING A MOBILE EQUIPMENT TO A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention provides a method and device which may perform a combined attach and communication connection establishment procedure when attaching an equipment such as a mobile station to a mobile communication network. An attach request sent form the equipment may initiate this combined attach and communication connection establishment process. In the Home Location Register, communication connection parameters are set as default values which may be automatically selected, for instance when receiving a combined attach and communication connection establishment request. The combined attach and communication connection establishment process reduces the signaling load in the network and speeds up communication connection establishment.10-06-2011
20110235649HETEROGENEOUS MEDIA PACKET BRIDGING - Methods and systems for bridging network packets transmitted over heterogeneous media channels are provided. According to one embodiment, a network-computing device comprises multiple network interfaces (netmods) and a shared processing resource. The shared processing resource executes a virtual bridging application representing a single bridging domain for all network packets received by the network-computing device. A translation data structure defines translations between a first framing media format and an intermediate format and between the intermediate format and a second framing media format. If the virtual bridging application determines a network packet is to be relayed between a netmod operable to receive network packets encapsulated within the first framing media format and a netmod operable to transmit network packets encapsulated within the second framing media format, then it uses the translation data structures to translate the network packet before relaying the network packet.09-29-2011
20130148668INTELLIGENT TRAFFIC QUOTA MANAGEMENT - A network element acts as a gateway to a data network for a subscriber end station. The network element includes control plane operable to communicate with a first network processing unit (NPU) and a second NPU, which are operable to communicate with the subscriber end station. The control plane includes a quota management module, which determines a quota amount to be assigned to the first NPU and the second NPU. The quota management module assigns a portion of the quota amount to the first NPU and another portion of the quota amount to the second NPU. The quota management module may determine to change the distribution of an unconsumed quota amount between the first NPU and the second NPU, determine the unconsumed quota amount, and assign a portion of the unconsumed quota amount to the first NPU and another portion of the unconsumed quota amount to the second NPU.06-13-2013
20130148669Virtual Computer System, Virtual Computer Management Program, and MAC Address Management Method - The virtual computer system comprises a network device which is capable of being coupled via a network to an external network apparatus and is able to operate multiple virtual computers. The network device comprises multiple communication ports which can be provided to a virtual computer with respect to a single physical communication port. When a certain the above-mentioned virtual computer is booted up, the virtual computer system acquires a MAC address corresponding to the above-mentioned certain virtual computer from multiple MAC addresses, which correspond to each of multiple the above-mentioned virtual computers and are allocated to the virtual communication port provided in the virtual computer, and configures this MAC address as the MAC address of the virtual communication port allocated to the above-mentioned certain virtual computer.06-13-2013
20100284417DATA STREAM ROUTER - The invention provides a router for providing isochronous data transfer and asynchronous data transfer on the basis of a predetermined protocol between devices of different network sections connected to said router, wherein a connection management application executed by said router translates a user request to transfer data from a transmitting device of a first network section to a receiving device of a second network section into commands of said protocol for establishing a first data connection between said transmitting device and said router and a second data connection between said router and said receiving device, wherein said data is transferred from said transmitting device via the established data connections to said receiving device.11-11-2010
20130114617METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING BETWEEN CUSTOMER DEVICE AND SERVER DEVICE - The method includes interacting between a first proximity transceiver which is associated to the customer device, and a second proximity transceiver; and generating thereby interaction information. The method further includes defining an TR069 Management protocol object called proximity-object and defining thereby at least one TR069 Management protocol parameter related to the interaction information, and furthermore interchanging between the server device and the customer device at least one name-value pair of the at least one parameter of the proximity-object by means of TR69 Management protocol messages.05-09-2013
20120275463High-Capacity Data Switch Employing Contention-Free Switch Modules - A scalable router-switch that grows from a capacity of a few gigabits per second to hundreds of terabits per second is disclosed. In one embodiment, the router-switch comprises a plurality of switch units arranged in a plurality of combinations. Within each combination, each switch unit cyclically connects to each other switch unit to form a contention-free temporal mesh. Each switch unit belongs to a number of combinations and any two combinations have at most one switch unit in common. The router-switch further includes a distributed-control system which comprises an outer controller associated with each of the switch units and an inner controller associated with each combination. The structural simplicity significantly simplifies the operation and control of the router-switch.11-01-2012
20100316060INTERCONNECTING MULTIPLE MPLS NETWORKS - A system may include a first customer edge (CE) router that is included in a customer network and is connected to a first provider edge (PE) router in a first multi-protocol label switch (MPLS) network, the first CE router configured to communicate with the first PE router using an external border gateway protocol (EBGP). The system may also include a second CE router that is included in the customer network and is connected to a second PE router in a second MPLS network. The second CE router may be configured to exchange routing information with the second PE router based on the EBGP and distribute routing information to the first CE router based on an interior gateway protocol (IGP). The system may also include a third CE router that is included in a first local network and is connected to a third PE router in the first MPLS network, the third CE router configured to exchange routing information with the third PE router.12-16-2010
20100316059METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING TONE IN MEDIA STREAM - A method, apparatus and system for processing a tone in a media stream are disclosed in the present inventions. The method includes: receiving, by a media gateway (MG), a command issued by a media gateway controller (MGC) which carries a property parameter for controlling removal of the tone in the media stream; and removing or reserving, by the MG, the tone in the media stream according to the property parameter.12-16-2010
20100316058SYSTEM AND METHOD OF DEMULTIPLEXING PROVIDER BACKBONE BRIDGING TRAFFIC ENGINEERING INSTANCES - A system and method of demultiplexing Provider Backbone Bridging Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) service instances. The method is used when monitoring service instances between a first bridge port and a second bridge port by exchanging CFM frames over each service instance. The CFM frame is received by the second bridge port where the complete ESP-3-tuple is demultiplexed. The CCM frames may be demultiplexed by a Full Traffic Engineering Service Instance Multiplex Entity which demultiplexes both the source address value and destination address value of the CCM frames.12-16-2010
20100316057Relay device suppressing frame flooding - In a relay device, a first memory stores correspondence information representing a correspondence relationship between a node and a port. A second memory stores information by which a port to suppress flooding of a frame is distinguishable. A relay part limits a port, which floods a frame addressed to a node of which information is not stored in the first memory, based on the information stored in the second memory.12-16-2010
20100316056TECHNIQUES FOR ROUTING DATA BETWEEN NETWORK AREAS - Techniques for routing data between network area are disclosed, In one particular exemplary embodiment, the techniques may be realized as a method for routing data between layer 2 network areas of backbone bridges comprising the steps of receiving data at a network element containing an internally terminated Network to Network Interface (NNI) for a plurality of network areas, identifying a destination address associated with the data, determining a network area of the plurality of network areas associated with the data, and performing one or more data flow treatments associated with the data using the internally terminated Network to Network Interface (NNI).12-16-2010
20130156041APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR EFFICIENT NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION AND APPLICATION LEVEL GATEWAY PROCESSING - Apparatus and methods for efficient NAT and ALG processing is disclosed. An exemplary method includes the operations of deep scanning a packet received over a connection to determine an application level gateway (ALG) process to be performed on the packet, associating the connection with the ALG process, and forwarding additional packets received over the connection to receive the ALG process based on said associating so that deep scanning of the additional packets is bypassed. An exemplary apparatus includes a processor to deep scan a packet received over a connection to determine an ALG process to be performed on the packet, a database to associate the connection with the ALG process, and a packet transmitter to forward additional packets received over the connection to receive the ALG process based on said associating so that deep scanning of the additional packets is bypassed.06-20-2013
20120281709MODULAR SCALABLE SWITCH ARCHITECTURE - A scalable Ethernet switch includes modules which can be interconnected to provide a single, virtual switch. The modules may be of uniform physical size and shape relative to a standard telecommunications rack. When greater capacity is required, an additional module is mounted in a rack and interconnected with the other modules, e.g., in a bi-directional ring. Enhanced port density is provided by interconnecting the modules with 12 GbE links which operate on standard 10 GbE wiring and connectors. Consequently, throughput between modules in increased relative to standard 10 GbE links without increasing form factor. Further, transmission power control can be implemented such that modules of the virtual switch may be physically adjacent or separated by distances of several meters.11-08-2012
20120281708SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CLOUD BRIDGING BETWEEN PUBLIC AND PRIVATE CLOUDS - The cloud bridge may comprise a tunnel between a datacenter network via a WAN to a cloud network. The cloud bridge makes cloud-hosted applications appear as though they are running on one contiguous enterprise network. With a cloud bridge in place, administrators, tools and the applications believe that the application resides on the enterprise network.11-08-2012
20120281707METHODS PROVIDING PUBLIC REACHABILITY AND RELATED SYSTEMS AND DEVICES - A method of obtaining addressing information may include establishing a communication path through a network between first and second peer devices with a router coupled between the first peer device and the communication path through the network. A communication may be received at the first peer device from the second per device through the communication path and the router. Moreover, a payload of the communication received at the first peer device from the second peer device may include a public reachability address used by the second peer device to transmit the communication through the network and the router to the first peer device. Related methods of providing such addressing information and related devices are also discussed.11-08-2012
20130182715POLICY AND CHARGING RULES NODE EXPIRED MESSAGE HANDLING - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node and machine-readable storage medium including a policy and charging rules node (PCRN) receiving a plurality of related service requests from different devices. The PCRN may proceed to generate a policy and charging control (PCC) rule based on at least one service request and other information stored in the PCRN if a mate service request does not arrive during the duration of a waiting timer. If the mate service request arrives subsequent to the expiry of the waiting timer, the PCRN may then generate a subsequent PCC rule to replace the previously generated rule, with the new PCC rule incorporating information from both of the mate service requests.07-18-2013
20110292948APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A NETWORK TERMINATION POINT - Apparatus and method for providing a termination point for service emulation instances in an access network is provided. In an embodiment, the service emulation instances are implemented utilizing, for example, pseudowires. Communications to and from the access network are aggregated and transmitted via one or more pseudowires to a service emulation instance terminator. The service emulation instance terminator converts the traffic to its native form and, if necessary, converts the traffic to a different type of format or service. The service emulation instance terminator then frames the traffic for the appropriate type of service and transmits the traffic to the service edge. Traffic received from the service is removed prepended with a pseudowire label and aggregated with other traffic. The aggregated traffic is transmitted to the customer via the access network. If necessary, an interworking function may convert the traffic from one type of service to another type of service. Further, functionalities of equipment such as frame relay switching or Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) switching may be realized in the service emulation instance terminator.12-01-2011
20110310908APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING PERSONAL NETWORK USING PN ROUTING TABLE - A method and an apparatus are provided for configuring a Personal Network (PN). A connection request message is received from a Personal Network Entity (PNE) at the PN gateway. A registration request message for a PN, to which the PNE belongs, is transmitted from the PN gateway to a server located in a Wide Area Network (WAN). An authentication request message including ID information of the PN is received at the PN gateway from the server. The authentication request message is forwarded from the PN gateway to one or more PNEs mapped to the ID information of the PN, with reference to a PN routing table in which information about the one or more PNEs is mapped to the ID information of the PN. The one or more PNEs receive a service from the server through the PN gateway.12-22-2011
20110310907SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPLEMENTING A CONTROL PLANE IN A DISTRIBUTED NETWORK - Systems and methods for emulating the bridging of control packets of a first network through a second network. Control packets may be Ethernet control packets instantiating a stream through the emulated bridge. One such protocol is the Institute for Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.1Q protocol. One second network may be a MoCA 2.0 network or a Power Line Communication (PLC) network or any other suitable network. Control packets may be encapsulated as unicast packets according the second network and sent to a control plane node. The encapsulated unicast packets may be indentified and decapsulated by the control plane node. The control plane node may verify access to resources required by the control packet of the emulated bridge. The control plane may send encapsulated packets to the egress nodes of the second network that have sufficient resources to satisfy the control packet requirements. Each egress nodes receiving the encapsulated packets may decapsulate the control packet and sent it to a first network device.12-22-2011
20110310906 Multiple Access System - A Packet Data Network Gateway, a PDN-GW (12-22-2011
20110310905METHOD FOR DATA COMMUNICATION AND DEVICE FOR ETHERNET - A method for data communication and a device for Ethernet MAC chip communicates with a plurality of PHY chips by a multi-address bus, wherein, the different ports of PHY for different PHY chips is distinguished by using the different addresses on the address bus of the multi-address bus. It causes that the MAC chip can support more number of ports, and connect to more PHY chips, so that the number of users that can access a Ethernet device is increased.12-22-2011
20110310904L2 METHOD FOR PARTIAL VLAN SERVICE MIGRATION - An upgraded edge node (e.g., enhanced PBB edge node, enhanced IP/MPLS edge node) and a method are described herein for providing a VLAN service for a customer in a metro network. In addition, a metro network is described herein which includes the upgraded edge nodes, traditional PB edge nodes, and a PB domain that has PB core nodes located therein.12-22-2011
20130188650HIGH FREQUENCY SWITCH - There is provided a high frequency switch formed on an SOI substrate and having improved insertion loss characteristics in a multimode system. The high frequency switch includes: at least one first port; at least one second port; a common port; a first series switch; and a second series switch.07-25-2013
20090296726ACCESS CONTROL LIST MANAGEMENT IN AN FCoE ENVIRONMENT - A Fibre Channel Forwarder (FCF) suspends a fabric session with a virtual machine (VM) in response to receipt of a deregister message from the virtual machine through an Ethernet bridge and transmits a deregister acceptance message to the VM. The Ethernet bridge detects the messages and updates its Access Control List (ACL) to remove the MAC address of the VM. While the fabric session is suspended, a virtual machine may migrate to another physical machine without terminating its connection to the fabric. After migration, the FCF resumes its fabric session with the VM in response to receipt of a register message from the VM through a second Ethernet bridge. The FCF responds to the register message with a register acceptance message. The Ethernet bridge detects the messages and updates its Access Control List (ACL) to add the MAC address of the VM.12-03-2009
20120287937RELAY DEVICE, NETWORK SYSTEM AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A relay device comprises: a routing controller configured to perform learning of routing information, which includes area information used to identify a relay area of communication packets and a network address of one or more other relay devices, and to determine a relay route of the communication packets, based on the learnt routing information; and a relay module configured to send the communication packets received by the relay device to a destination address of the received communication packets, based on the determined relay route. When the relay device receives a disaster notification packet notifying of a disaster area and when the determined relay route includes the disaster area, the routing controller changes the relay route to an alternative relay route that does not include the disaster area.11-15-2012
20120020365MODULAR INTERCONNECT STRUCTURE - Some embodiments of the invention include an interconnect structure to transfer data among a plurality of devices. The interconnect structure includes a crossbar and a number of interconnect branches coupled to the crossbar. Each of the interconnect branches includes a number of connector circuits coupled in series to transfer data in a group of devices of the plurality of devices. The crossbar includes a number of connector circuits coupled in series to allow one group of devices from one interconnect branch to exchange data with another group of devices from another interconnect branch. Other embodiments are described and claimed.01-26-2012
20120020364BORDER GATEWAY PROTOCOL INBOUND POLICY OPTIMIZATION - A BGP capable packet network device is located at the boundary of an autonomous network and in communication with a peer BGP capable packet network device in a neighboring autonomous network. The BGP capable packet network device is comprised of one or more line cards for receiving and, processing and sending packets of information, and for receiving and forwarding routing update information to a route processor comprising the packet network device. The route processor runs a border gateway protocol which is configured with one or more policies that operate to filter the routing update information received from the line card. The routing update information filter is comprised of at least one variable length path attribute and the filter operates such that it only applies the variable length path attribute one time to the routing update information.01-26-2012
20130195115VRRP and Learning Bridge CPE - The present invention describes an access node for communication in a telecommunication network comprising: an input/output unit adapted for receiving a first information message, wherein the first information message comprises a logical address associated with a virtual network node, a processing unit for extracting the logical address of the virtual network node and for determining a hardware address associated with the logical address of the virtual network node, where the processing unit is further adapted for a determining a logical address of an end-user host communicating with the virtual network node, wherein the access node is configured to transmit a second information message comprising the logical and hardware address of the virtual network node to the logical address of the end-user host. Also, a network infrastructure where the access node is operating, is described. The access node also implements a method of the present invention by means of a computer program comprising instruction sets for implementing the method steps of the invention.08-01-2013
20130195113System and Method for Network Switch Data Plane Virtualization - A network switching device includes a hardware data plane with a forwarding table. The forwarding table has a sub-table. The network switching device also includes a control plane with a processor and a virtual data plane. The virtual data plane has a virtual sub-table. The processor maps changes in the virtual sub-table to the sub-table.08-01-2013
20130195114COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ISOCHRONOUS DATA TRANSMISSION IN REAL TIME - A communication system which has a PROFINET IRT system with first communication devices for isochronous transmission. A special IRT bridge device is created, so that a traditional standard Ethernet communication device can also transmit real time-critical data over the PROFINET IRT system. The bridge device has a timer, which is synchronized in time with the timers of the first communication devices. In addition, a device for analysis of the transmission point in time of a real time-critical data telegram received by the communication device and a control unit are provided, such that the control unit controls the forwarding of the respective real time-critical data telegram to at least one second communication device as a function of the analyzed transmission point in time.08-01-2013
20120027022MULTIPLE SOURCE VIRTUAL LINK REVERSION IN SAFETY CRITICAL SWITCHED NETWORKS - In a system that uses a switched network and virtual links (for example, an AFDX, TT-ETHERNET, or TT-Gigabit ETHERNET switched ETHERNET network), the system is configured so that, for at least one virtual link, the end system that sources frames for that virtual link can change (for example, when an end system that was previously sourcing frames for that virtual link fails). The switches used in such a system are configured to be able to accept frames if there is such a change.02-02-2012
20120033676MGCP PACKAGE FOR BATTERY BACKUP CONTROL - In one embodiment, a gateway includes an interface, and a processor cooperatively operable with the interface to transmit and receive packet communications. The processor receives, over the interface, a request-notification for a backup battery status, which is formatted according to a media gateway control protocol (MGCP) package protocol. The processor transmits, over the interface, a notify of an observed event, the observed event indicating the backup battery status which is formatted according to the MGCP package protocol. In another embodiment, a call agent includes an interface and a processor. The call agent processor transmits a request-notification for a backup battery status, which is formatted according to a media gateway control protocol (MGCP) package protocol. The call agent processor also receives a notify of an observed event over the interface, the observed event indicating the backup battery status, which is formatted according to the MGCP package protocol.02-09-2012
20090185571TRANSLATING MST INSTANCES BETWEEN PORTS OF A BRIDGE IN A COMPUTER NETWORK - In one embodiment, a first port of a bridge is configured for a first spanning tree (ST) and not a second ST, while a second port of the bridge is configured for the second ST and not the first ST. A multiple ST (MST) bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) for the first and second STs is generated for the first and second ports having a first portion corresponding to the first ST and a second portion corresponding to the second ST. To translate MST instances, the second portion is stripped from the MST BPDU of the first port, and the first portion from the MST BPDU of the first port is associated with the second ST. Conversely, the first portion is stripped from the MST BPDU of the second port, and the second portion from the MST BPDU of the second port is associated with the first ST.07-23-2009
20130201993NETWORK SWITCH WITH INTEGRATED CABLE TERMINATION LOCATIONS - A network switch that can directly receive and connect to telecommunications cables includes: a body; a first panel mounted to the body; a first plurality of ports located in the first panel, each of the first plurality of ports configured to receive a telecommunications cable; a second panel mounted to the body; a second plurality of ports located in the second panel, each of the second plurality of ports configured to receive a patch cord; and electronic circuitry housed in the body for conducting network switching operations, the electronic circuitry being connected with the first plurality of ports and the second plurality of ports. Such a network switch can receive a cable directly, rather than requiring an intermediate patch panel, and therefore can simplify either an interconnect or a cross-connect telecommunications system.08-08-2013
20130201994Packet-Switching Node with Inner Flow Equalization - Independent switches arranged into multiple switch planes interconnect nodes coupled to data sources and sinks to form a switching node which scales gracefully from a capacity of a fraction of a terabit per second to hundreds of terabits per second. The switches of each switch plane are arranged in a matrix. Each node connects to an inlet of a selected switch in each column and an outlet of a selected switch in each row in each switch plane. A route set for each directed node pair includes simple paths, each traversing one switch, and compound paths, each traversing two switches. The connectivity of nodes to switches ensures that each switch may be selected to handle data flow of any directed node pair and that all simple paths leading to any node traverse switches which receive data from mutually orthogonal sets of nodes. This feature equalizes flow rates through the switches.08-08-2013
20120082168COMMUNICATION MODULE AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication module mounted on a communication apparatus includes a communication apparatus main body including a plurality of slots, and being insertable into or removable from the slots, a plurality of apparatus side signal processing circuits for processing a communication signal which is transmitted to or received from the communication module, and a switch LSI for changing a destination of the communication signal. The communication module includes a switching portion for performing dividing the communication signal transmitted or received at a communication speed of the communication module, and combining the communication signals transmitted or received at a communication speed of an external apparatus, a connector including a plurality of input-output ports, each of the plurality of the input-output ports being connected to the external apparatus respectively, and a plurality of connecting terminals being connected to the communication apparatus main body when the communication module is inserted into the slots.04-05-2012
20120082167Method and Apparatus for Predicting Characteristics of Incoming Data Packets to Enable Speculative Processing to Reduce Processor Latency - A system for processing data packets in a data packet network has at least one input port for receiving data packets, at least one output port for sending out data packets, a processor for processing packet data, and a packet predictor for predicting a future packet based on a received packet, such that at least some processing for the predicted packet may be accomplished before the predicted packet actually arrives at the system. The system is used in preferred embodiments in Internet routers.04-05-2012
20120082166ANALOG FRONT END PROTOCOL CONVERTER/ADAPTER FOR SLPI PROTOCOL - In an embodiment, an analog front end (AFE) bridge for a SLPI PHY includes: an AFE LINK-side circuit having at least one pair of differential LINK-side nodes which does not conform to SLPI PHY specifications; an AFE PHY-side circuit having a pair of differential PHY-side nodes conforming to SLPI PHY specifications, wherein the AFE PHY-side circuit is coupled to the AFE LINK-side circuit; and a termination control circuit coupled to the AFE PHY-side circuit. A method of bridging a legacy LINK circuit to a SLPI PHY circuit includes: communicating with a legacy LINK circuit with a legacy LINK protocol; communicating with a SLPI PHY circuit with a SLPY PHY protocol over a differential pair; converting outputs of the legacy LINK circuit into inputs of the SLPI PHY circuit; converting outputs of the SLPI PHY circuit into inputs of the legacy LINK circuit; controlling a termination of the differential pair.04-05-2012
20120082165CENTRALIZED TELECOM SERVER FOR DIFFERENT TECHNOLOGY NETWORKS - Systems and methods are disclosed for providing service management across different technology networks. A centralized telecom serving system (TSS) includes a plurality of interface gateways, a central adapter, and a common interface. When in operation, a first interface gateway receives a first service request from a first network, and converts the first service request from a signaling interface used in the first network to the common interface. The central adapter receives the first service request over the common interface, and processes service management logic to identify multiple services that trigger on the first service request and determine a sequence for providing the multiple services. For each service, the central adapter generates a second service request in the common interface, and transmits the second service request to a second interface gateway that is coupled to a second network.04-05-2012
20120093169METHOD AND APPARATUSES FOR MOVING A SERVICE OR IP SESSION FROM FIRST TO SECOND ACCESS - The present invention relates to a method for moving at least one service or an IP session from a first access to a second access, comprising the following steps: a Gateway, GW, routes (04-19-2012
20120093168Method and system for accessing IMS domain for traditional fixed network users - The present invention discloses a method and system for traditional fixed network users accessing Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) domain, both of the method and system can classify fixed network users in a same region into a group, and configure group information in an access gateway control function; when an access gateway initiates fixed network user registration to the access gateway control function, the access gateway control function initiating group registration to an interrogating call session control function according to the group to which the fixed network users belong; the interrogating call session control function interrogates to a home subscriber server about a service call session control function to which the group belongs, and the group is registered to the service call session control function. The method and system of the present invention greatly reduce the generation of register messages, increase the registration efficiency and overcome the defects that there is a long registration time delay and a great traffic when the fixed network users access IMS domain in the prior art.04-19-2012
20120093167Call Localization and Processing Offloading - In one embodiment, a gateway implements: receiving an indication that a first and a second end point of a communication session are both associated with a first gateway, the first gateway in communication with a second gateway to access services; receiving from the first end point at the first gateway a compressed packet; and communicating within the first gateway, the compressed packet from the first end point to the second end point, where the communicating is initiated in response to the indication that the first and second end points of the communication session are both associated with the first gateway, and where the communicated compressed packet is communicated through the first gateway without passing through the second gateway.04-19-2012
20120093166METHODS AND APPARATUS TO UTILIZE ROUTE AGGREGATION FOR EXCHANGING ROUTES IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods and apparatus to utilize route aggregation for exchanging routes in a communication network are disclosed. An example method to exchange routes in a communication network disclosed herein comprises aggregating a plurality of individual routes into an aggregate route characterized by an aggregate route identifier and a plurality of aggregate route parameter values, the plurality of individual routes comprising a respective plurality of individual route identifiers and respective pluralities of individual route parameter values, the aggregate route identifier to represent an aggregation of the plurality of individual route identifiers, the plurality of aggregate route parameter values to match at least some of the pluralities of individual route parameter values for at least some of the plurality of individual routes, and sending the aggregate route identifier and the plurality of aggregate route parameter values to a recipient in the communication network to forward the plurality of individual routes to the recipient.04-19-2012
20130208725CONTENT-BASED FORWARDING OF NETWORK TRAFFIC - A method includes reading content of network traffic that arrives at a network port of a network switch of a mesh of network switches. A hash algorithm is applied to the read content to indicate a path to a destination network switch of the mesh, the hash algorithm being common to all network switches of the mesh. The network traffic is forwarded via a network port that is associated with the indicated path.08-15-2013
20130208728PACKET ROUTING FOR EMBEDDED APPLICATIONS SHARING A SINGLE NETWORK INTERFACE OVER MULTIPLE VIRTUAL NETWORKS - Techniques are provided for packet routing in a distributed network switch. The distributed network switch includes multiple switch modules operatively connected to one another, and each switch module includes multiple bridge elements and a management controller. In one embodiment, a shared interface routing (SIR) framework is provided that includes an analysis and bifurcation layer and at least one packet interface. A packet is received over a first logical network and via a physical port, the packet being destined for at least a first application executing on the management controller. The analysis and bifurcation layer analyzes the packet and sends the packet to the packet interface, which then routes the packet to the first application.08-15-2013
20130208729SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FACILITATION OF COMMUNICATIONS SESSIONS AMONGST A PLURALITY OF NETWORKS - Systems and methods that allow carriers, content providers and other stakeholders to, among other things, efficiently manage communications sessions, such as delivery of content, across one or more of a plurality of networks.08-15-2013
20130208730SWITCHING MATRIX FOR INTERCONNECTING AN ACCESS NETWORK AND OPERATOR NETWORKS - A switching matrix connects to an access network and a set of at least two operator networks. A controller performs a method of establishing new connections across the switching matrix in response to new connection requests. The new connection requests involve a sub-set of the set of operator networks. The controller determines if the new connections can be established across the switching matrix by rearranging only existing connections across the switching matrix to the sub-set of operator networks and, in response, establishes the at least one new connection. Otherwise, the controller rearranges existing connections across the switching matrix to at least one other of the set of operator networks to establish the new connections. The controller minimises the number of other operator networks which are involved when rearranging existing connections. The switching matrix can be a Clos switching matrix.08-15-2013